REX521 Conf 751802 ENk PDF

Protection Relay
REX 521
Technical Reference Manual, Standard Configurations

1MRS751802-MUM Protection Relay REX 521
Issued: 27.06.2001
Version: K/29.09.2006
Technical Reference Manual, Standard Configurations
Contents
1. About this manual ...................................................................15
1.1. General .......................................................................................15
1.2. Use of symbols ............................................................................15
1.3. Related documents .....................................................................16
1.4. Document revisions .....................................................................16
2. Safety information ...................................................................17
3. Introduction .............................................................................19
4. Standard configurations .........................................................25
4.1. HW version: Basic .......................................................................25
4.1.1. Standard configuration B01 ................................25
4.1.1.1. Features .............................................................25
4.1.1.2. Application ..........................................................26
4.1.2. Standard configuration B02 ................................28
4.1.2.1. Features .............................................................28
4.1.2.2. Application ..........................................................29
4.2. HW version: Medium ...................................................................31
4.2.1. Standard configuration M01 ...............................31
4.2.1.1. Features .............................................................31
4.2.1.2. Application ..........................................................32
4.2.2. Standard configuration M02 ...............................34
4.2.2.1. Features .............................................................34
4.2.2.2. Application ..........................................................35
4.3. HW version: High/Sensor ............................................................37
4.3.1. Standard configuration H01 (Sensor) .................37
4.3.1.1. Features .............................................................37
4.3.1.2. Application ..........................................................38
4.3.2. Standard configuration H02 ...............................40
4.3.2.1. Features .............................................................40
4.3.2.2. Application ..........................................................41
4.3.3.1. Features .............................................................43
4.3.3.2. Application ..........................................................44
4.3.4.1. Features .............................................................46
4.3.4.2. Application ..........................................................47
4.3.5.1. Features .............................................................49
4.3.5.2. Application ..........................................................50
3
REX 521 Protection Relay 1MRS751802-MUM
Technical Reference Manual, Standard
4.3.6. Standard configuration H06 ............................... 52

4.3.6.1. Features ............................................................. 52
4.3.6.2. Application ......................................................... 53
4.3.7. Standard configuration H07 ............................... 55
4.3.7.1. Features ............................................................. 55
4.3.7.2. Application ......................................................... 56
4.3.8. Standard configuration H08 (No sensors) ......... 58
4.3.8.1. Features ............................................................. 58
4.3.8.2. Application ......................................................... 59
4.3.9.1. Features ............................................................. 61
4.3.9.2. Application ......................................................... 62
4.3.10.1.Features ............................................................ 64
4.3.10.2.Application ......................................................... 65
4.3.11.1.Features ............................................................ 67
4.3.11.2.Application ......................................................... 68
5. Reading of the overview diagrams of the signal routings . 71
5.1. Digital inputs ............................................................................... 71
5.1.1. Input selectors ................................................... 72
5.1.2. Input switchgroups (SWGRP) ............................ 73
5.1.3. Input signals ....................................................... 74
5.2. Function blocks in the overview diagrams of the signal
routings ....................................................................................... 75
5.2.1. Function blocks .................................................. 75
5.3. Output switchgroups (SWGRP) .................................................. 76
5.3.1. Output selectors ................................................. 76
5.4. Other functions described in signal overview diagrams .............. 77
5.4.1. Lockout function ................................................. 77
5.4.2. HSPO1 Open logic ............................................ 80
5.4.3. Frequency protection logic, H50 and H51 ......... 80
5.4.3.1. Functional description ........................................ 81
5.4.3.2. Example of usage .............................................. 82
5.4.4. Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection,
H50 and H51 ...................................................... 83
6. Parametrization of the digital inputs .................................... 85
6.1. Selectors ..................................................................................... 85
6.1.1. Reset ................................................................. 85
6.1.2. Group ................................................................. 85
6.1.3. Blocking ............................................................. 85
6.1.4. Disturbance recorder trigger .............................. 85
4
6.1.5. Power quality trigger ..........................................86

6.1.6. Master trip ..........................................................86
6.1.7. External trip ........................................................86
6.1.8. Lockout reset ......................................................86
6.1.9. Local/Remote .....................................................86
6.1.10. Close enable ......................................................86
6.1.11. Direct control (Open/Close) ................................86
6.1.12. Object indication .................................................86
6.1.13. Time synchronization .........................................87
6.1.14. AR inhibit, AR on input, start AR ........................87
6.1.15. BACTRL (Basic angle control) ...........................87
6.1.16. Logic input 1...3 ..................................................87
6.2. Interlocking ..................................................................................87
6.2.1. Interlocking options ............................................87
7. Default settings .......................................................................91
8. Function block descriptions ................................................101
8.1. Protection ..................................................................................101
8.1.1. 3I>, 3I>> and 3I>>> ..........................................101
8.1.2. Io>, Io>> and Io>>> ..........................................102
8.1.3. Io>-->, Io>>--> and Io>>>--> ............................104
8.1.4. 3I>--> and 3I>>--> ............................................106
8.1.5. 3U> and 3U>> ..................................................107
8.1.6. 3U< and 3U<< ..................................................109
8.1.7. 3I2f> .................................................................110
8.1.8. Iub> ..................................................................110
8.1.9. 3Ith> .................................................................111
8.1.10. O-->I .................................................................112
8.1.10.1.Autoreclose in H50 ...........................................114
8.1.11. Uo>, Uo>> and Uo>>> .....................................115
8.1.12. f1 and f2 ...........................................................116
8.1.13. SYNC1 .............................................................116
8.1.14. Is2t n< ..............................................................117
8.1.15. 3I() ....................................................................118
8.1.16. I2> and I2>> .....................................................119
8.1.17. 3I< ....................................................................119
8.1.18. FUSEF .............................................................120
8.1.19. 3Ithdev> ...........................................................121
8.1.20. U1U2<>_1 ........................................................122
8.2. Control .......................................................................................124
8.2.1. I<->O CB1 ........................................................124
8.2.2. I<->O IND1 and I<->O IND2 ............................124
8.2.3. I<->O IND3 .......................................................124
5
8.2.4. I<->O POS ....................................................... 124

8.2.5. ALARM1-8 ....................................................... 125
8.3. Measurement ............................................................................ 128
8.3.1. 3I ...................................................................... 128
8.3.2. Io ...................................................................... 128
8.3.3. Uo .................................................................... 128
8.3.4. DREC ............................................................... 129
8.3.5. 3U .................................................................... 132
8.3.6. 3U_B ................................................................ 132
8.3.7. f ........................................................................ 133
8.3.8. PQE ................................................................. 133
8.3.9. AI1 ................................................................... 133
8.4. Condition monitoring ................................................................. 134
8.4.1. CB wear1 ......................................................... 134
8.4.2. TCS1 ................................................................ 134
8.4.3. MCS 3I ............................................................. 134
8.4.4. MCS 3U ........................................................... 135
8.4.5. TIME1 .............................................................. 135
8.5. Power quality ............................................................................ 136
8.5.1. PQ 3Inf ............................................................. 136
8.5.2. PQ 3Unf ........................................................... 137
8.6. Standard functions .................................................................... 138
8.6.1. Switchgroups (SWGRP) .................................. 138
8.6.2. Selectors .......................................................... 138
9. Example substations ........................................................... 139
10.Application examples, Basic .............................................. 143
10.1.Outgoing feeder, Basic B01 ..................................................... 143
10.1.1. Features ........................................................... 143
10.1.2. Measurement connections ............................... 145
10.1.3. Protection ......................................................... 145
10.1.3.1.Phase overcurrent protection .......................... 145
10.1.3.2.Earth-fault protection ....................................... 146
10.1.3.3.Phase discontinuity protection ......................... 147
10.1.3.4.Thermal overload protection ............................ 147
10.1.4. Connections and signal routings ...................... 148
10.1.4.1.Protection signal routing .................................. 148
10.1.4.2.Indication and control connections .................. 150
10.1.5. Implementations .............................................. 153
10.1.5.1.Outgoing blocking signal to the incoming
feeder ............................................................... 153
10.1.5.2.Blocking signal received from the
residual voltage relay ....................................... 153
6
10.1.5.3.Circuit-breaker failure protection ......................153

10.1.5.4.Trip-circuit supervision .....................................154
10.1.5.5.Condition monitoring of the breaker wear ........154
10.1.5.6.Disconnector and earth-switch indication ........155
10.2.Incoming feeder, Basic B01 ......................................................157
10.2.1. Features ...........................................................157
10.2.2. Measurement connections ...............................159
10.2.3. Protection .........................................................159
10.2.3.1.Phase overcurrent protection ...........................160
10.2.3.2.Earth-fault protection ........................................161
10.2.3.3.Protection signal routing ..................................161
10.2.3.4.Indication and control connections ...................162
10.2.4. Implementations ...............................................162
10.2.4.1.Blocking signal received from the outgoing
feeder ..............................................................162
10.2.4.2.Outgoing blocking signal to the
overcurrent relay on the HV side ......................162
10.2.4.3.Earth-fault stage Io>>> used to trip the
breaker on the HV side of the transformer .......163
10.2.4.5.Disturbance recorder .......................................163
10.2.4.6.Power quality ...................................................164
10.3.Transformer feeder, Basic B01 .................................................166
10.3.1. Features ...........................................................166
10.3.3. Protection .........................................................168
10.3.3.2.Transformer inrush ...........................................169
10.3.4.1.Blocking signal from the MV relay on the
secondary side of the transformer ....................170
10.3.5. Blocking signal overview ..................................173
10.4.Outgoing feeder, Basic B02 ......................................................174
10.4.1. Features ...........................................................174
10.4.3. Protection .........................................................176
10.4.3.1.Autoreclose function ........................................177
10.4.4. Protection signal routing ...................................179
10.4.5. Indication and control connections ...................179
7

10.4.6.1.Definite Trip alarm to output relay .................... 180
10.4.6.2.Digital input to initiate auto-reclosing
function ............................................................ 181
11.Application examples, Medium .......................................... 183
11.1.Outgoing feeder, Medium M01 ................................................. 183
11.1.1. Features ........................................................... 183
11.1.3. Protection ......................................................... 185
11.1.3.1.Directional earth-fault protection ...................... 186
11.1.4.1.Basic angle control by digital input .................. 187
11.1.4.2.Outgoing blocking signal to the incoming
feeder ............................................................... 188
11.1.4.3.Trip-alarm signals from overcurrent and
earth fault ......................................................... 188
11.1.4.4.Circuit-breaker failure protection ...................... 188
11.1.4.5.Trip-circuit supervision ..................................... 189
11.2.Incoming feeder, Medium M01 ................................................. 191
11.2.1. Features ........................................................... 191
11.2.3. Protection ......................................................... 194
11.2.3.1.Overcurrent protection ..................................... 194
11.2.3.2.Residual voltage protection ............................. 194
11.2.4. Connections ..................................................... 194
11.2.5.1.Start signal from the second residual
voltage stage to release blocking .................... 195
outgoing feeder ................................................ 195
overcurrent relay on the HV side ..................... 196
11.2.5.4.Trip signal from second residual voltage
stage ................................................................ 196
11.2.5.5.Second settings for residual voltage
protection ......................................................... 196
11.2.5.7.Trip-circuit supervision ..................................... 197
8
11.3.Outgoing feeder, Medium M02 .................................................199

11.3.1. Features ...........................................................199
11.3.3. Protection .........................................................201
11.3.3.1.Autoreclose function ........................................201
11.3.4. Protection signal routing ...................................204
11.3.5. Indication and control connections ...................204
11.3.6.1.Definite trip alarm to output relay .....................205
11.3.6.2.Digital input to initiate auto-reclosing
function .............................................................205
11.3.6.3.Basic angle control by digital input ...................205
12.Application examples, High ................................................207
12.1.Incoming feeder, High H01 .......................................................207
12.1.1. Features ...........................................................207
12.1.2. Measurements .................................................209
12.1.3. Protection .........................................................209
12.1.3.1.Overcurrent protection .....................................209
12.1.3.2.Synchro-check function ....................................209
12.1.4. Connections .....................................................210
12.1.6. Blocking principles ...........................................211
12.2.Incoming feeder, High H02 .......................................................212
12.2.1. Features ...........................................................212
12.2.3. Protection .........................................................214
12.2.3.1.Overcurrent protection .....................................214
12.2.4. Connections .....................................................215
outgoing feeder and the bus sectionalizer .......216
12.2.5.2.Blocking signal from 3I>--> stage to
3I>> stage ........................................................217
12.3.Bus sectionalizer, High H03 .....................................................219
12.3.1. Features ...........................................................219
9
12.3.2. Measurements ................................................. 221

12.3.3. Protection ......................................................... 221
12.3.3.1.Overcurrent protection ..................................... 221
12.3.3.2.Synchro-check function ................................... 222
12.3.4. Connections ..................................................... 223
12.4.Outgoing feeder, High H04 ...................................................... 224
12.4.1. Features ........................................................... 224
12.4.2. Measurements ................................................. 226
12.4.4. Protection ......................................................... 226
12.4.4.1.Non-directional earth-fault protection ............... 226
12.4.4.2.Autoreclose function ........................................ 227
12.4.5. Connections ..................................................... 227
12.5.Incoming feeder, High H05/H50 ............................................... 228
12.5.1. Features ........................................................... 228
12.5.2. Measurements ................................................. 230
12.5.3. Protection ......................................................... 230
12.5.3.1.Phase overcurrent protection .......................... 230
12.5.3.2.Earth-fault protection ....................................... 230
12.5.3.3.Overvoltage and undervoltage protection ........ 230
12.5.4. Connections ..................................................... 231
outgoing feeder ................................................ 232
overcurrent relay on the HV side ..................... 232
12.5.5.3.Earth-fault stage Io>>> to trip the breaker
on the HV side of the transformer .................... 232
12.5.5.5.Disturbance recorder ....................................... 233
12.5.5.6.Power quality ................................................... 233
12.6.Measurement cubicle, High H06 .............................................. 234
12.6.1. Features ........................................................... 234
12.6.2. Measurements ................................................. 236
12.6.3. Protection ......................................................... 236
12.6.3.1.Residual voltage protection ............................. 236
10
12.6.3.2.Overvoltage and undervoltage protection ........236

12.6.3.3.Underfrequency protection ...............................237
12.6.4. Connections .....................................................237
12.6.5.1.Disturbance recorder .......................................239
12.6.5.2.Power quality ...................................................239
12.7.Motor protection, High H07/H51 ...............................................241
12.7.1. Features ...........................................................241
12.7.2. Measurements .................................................243
12.7.3. Protection .........................................................243
12.7.3.1.Thermal overload protection ............................243
12.7.3.2.Start-up supervision (stall protection) ..............244
12.7.3.3.Cumulative start-up counter .............................244
12.7.3.4.Short-circuit (high-set overcurrent)
protection .........................................................246
12.7.3.5.Unbalance protection .......................................246
12.7.3.6.Phase reversal protection ................................247
12.7.3.7.Undercurrent protection ...................................247
12.7.3.8.Fuse fail protection ...........................................247
12.7.4. Condition monitoring ........................................247
12.7.4.1.Operation time counter ....................................247
12.7.5. Connections .....................................................248
12.7.5.3.Indication of motor status .................................248
12.8.Incoming feeder, High H08/H09 ...............................................250
12.8.1. Features ...........................................................250
12.8.2. Measurements .................................................252
12.8.3. Protection .........................................................252
12.8.3.2.Earth-fault protection ........................................252
12.8.3.3.Overvoltage and undervoltage protection ........252
12.8.4. Connections .....................................................253
12.8.5.1.Blocking signal received from the outgoing
feeder ...............................................................254
overcurrent relay on the HV side ......................254
11
12.8.5.3.Earth-fault stage Io>>> to trip the breaker

on the HV side of the transformer .................... 254
12.8.5.5.Disturbance recorder ....................................... 254
12.8.5.6.Power quality ................................................... 255
13.Symbol notations ................................................................ 257
14.Abbreviations ....................................................................... 259
12
Copyrights
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not
be construed as a commitment by ABB Oy. ABB Oy assumes no responsibility for
any errors that may appear in this document.
In no event shall ABB Oy be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document,
nor shall ABB Oy be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use
of any software or hardware described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB Oy, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third
party nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under alicense and
may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Copyright © 2006 ABB Oy
All rights reserved.
Trademarks
ABB is a registered trademark of ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Guarantee
Please inquire about the terms of guarantee from your nearest ABB representative.
13
14
1. About this manual
1.1. General
This document provides detailed information about the separate functions of the
protection relay REX 521 Revision G.
1.2. Use of symbols

This publication includes the following icons that point out safety-related conditions
or other important information:
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of
a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader to relevant facts and

conditions.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it should be understood that
operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,
comply fully with all warning and caution notices.
15
1.3. Related documents

Manuals for REX 521
• Technical Reference Manual, General 1MRS751108-MUM

• Operator’s Manual 1MRS751107-MUM
• Installation Manual 1MRS750526-MUM
• Technical Descriptions of Functions (CD-ROM) 1MRS750889-MCD
• Modbus Remote Communication Protocol for REX 521, 1MRS755017
Technical Description
• DNP 3.0 Remote Communication Protocol for RE_ 54_ 1MRS755260
and REX 521, Technical Description
Parameter and event lists for REX 521
• Parameter List for REX 521 1MRS751999-RTI

• Event List for REX 521 1MRS752000-RTI
• General Parameters for REX 521 1MRS752156-RTI
• Interoperability List for REX 521 1MRS752157-RTI
Tool-specific manuals
• CAP505 Installation and Commissioning Manual 1MRS751901-MEN

• CAP505 User’s Guide 1MRS752292-MEN
• CAP505 Protocol Mapping Tool Operator’s Manual 1MRS755277
• Tools for Relays and Terminals, User’s Guide 1MRS752008-MUM
• CAP 501 Installation and Commissioning Manual 1MRS751899-MEN
• CAP 501 User’s Guide 1MRS751900-MUM
1.4. Document revisions
Version Date History

F 22.6.2004 New configuration, H08
New function block, 3U_B.
H 23.02.2006 Layout updated
FB updates
Standard configurations H09, H50, H51 added
K 29.09.2006 Small corrections to the standard configuration table
16
2. Safety information
Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors, even though
the auxiliary voltage has been disconnected.
Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or
substantial property damage.
Only a competent electrician is allowed to carry out the electrical
installation.
National and local electrical safety regulations must always be
followed.
The frame of the device has to be carefully earthed.
The device contains components which are sensitive to

electrostatic discharge. Unnecessary touching of electronic
components must therefore be avoided.
Breaking the sealing tape on the rear panel of the device will
result in loss of warranty and proper operation will no longer be
guaranteed.
17
18
3. Introduction
This document provides descriptions of the standard configurations for REX 521.
Chapter 4. Standard configurations describes the features of the different standard
configurations one by one while Chapters 5 to 7 describe the signal routings and
functionality. A short introduction of the function blocks available in different
standard configurations of REX 521 is given in Chapter 8. Function block
descriptions. Chapter 9. Example substations, Chapter 10. Application examples,
Basic, Chapter 11. Application examples, Medium, and Chapter 12. Application
examples, High present different application examples.
The standard configurations available are presented in Table 3.-1. Note that in the
function block descriptions in the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions
(see Related documents), the ABB standard FB names are used instead of the IEC
or ANSI names.
Hardware (HW) versions for REX 521 are basic, medium, high and sensor. The
sensor variant of the standard configuration is indicated with the letter ‘S’ in the
Config. name parameter, for example H02S.
Differences between REX 521 and RED 500 platform in the

function block descriptions
The REX 521 and the RED 500 platform differ in some respects concerning the
function block descriptions in the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions
(see Section 1.3. Related documents). Firstly, there are some terms that refer to other
products than REX 521. Secondly, there are a few characteristics that appear only in
REX 521:
• Event mask 1 is only for SPA communication.
• The direct control of the autoreclose function has been disabled.
• A limited number of inputs and outputs are used in standard configurations of
REX 521.
19
Table 3.-1 Standard configurations for REX 521

HW versions Basic Medium High/Sensor
Standard configurations B01 B02 M01 M02 H01a H02 H03 H04 H05 H06 H07 H08bc H09bc H50b H51b
ANSI
IEC FB name
device
symbol (CD-ROM)
number
Protection
3I> 51-1 NOC3Low x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
3I>> 51-2 NOC3High x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
3I>>> 51-3 NOC3Inst x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Io> 51N-1 NEF1Low x x xd x x x x x x
Io>> 51N-2 NEF1High x x xd x x x x x x
Io>>> 51N-3 NEF1Inst x x xd x x x
Io>-->e 67N-1 DEF2Low x x x x x x x x x
Io>>--> e 67N-2 DEF2High x x x x x x x x x
Io>>>-->e 67N-3 DEF2Inst x x x x x x
3I>--> 67-1 DOC6Low xf xf xf xf
3I>>--> 67-2 DOC6High xf xf xf xf
3U> 59-1 OV3Low x x x x x x x
3U>> 59-2 OV3High x x x x x x
3U< 27-1 UV3Low x x x x x x x
3U<< 27-2 UV3High x x x x x x
3I2f> 68 Inrush3 x x x x x x x x x x x x
Iub> 46 CUB3Low x x x x x x x x
3Ith> 49F TOL3Cab x x x x x x x x
O-->I 79 AR5Func x x x x x x x x
Uo> 59N-1 ROV1Low x x x x x x
Uo>> 59N-2 ROV1High x x x x x
Uo>>> 59N-3 ROV1Inst x x x x
f1 81-1 Freq1St1 x x x x x x x
f2 81-2 Freq1St2 x x x x
SYNC1 25-1 SCVCSt1 x x
Is2t n< 48 MotStart x x
3I() 46R PREV3 x x
I2> 46-1 NPS3Low x x
I2>> 46-2 NPS3High x
3I< 37-1 NUC3St1 x
FUSEF 60 FuseFail x x
3Ithdev> 49M/G/T Tol3Dev x x x x
U1U2<>_1 47-1 PSV3St1 x x x
Control functions
I<->O CB1 COCB1 COCB1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
I<->O IND1 COIND1 COIND1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
I<->O IND2 COIND2 COIND2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
I<->O IND3 COIND3 COIND3 xg xg
20
Table 3.-1 Standard configurations for REX 521 (Continued)

Standard configurations B01 B02 M01 M02 H01a H02 H03 H04 H05 H06 H07 H08bc H09bc H50b H51b
ANSI
IEC FB name
device
symbol (CD-ROM)
number
I<->O POS COLOCAT COLOCAT x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ALARM1-8 ALARM1-8 MMIALAR1-8 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Measurement
3I 3I MECU3A x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Io Io MECU1A x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Uo Uo MEVO1A x x x x x x x x x x x x x
DREC DREC MEDREC x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
3U 3U MEVO3A x x x x x x x x x x x
3U_B 3U_B MEVO3B x x
f f MEFR1 x x x x x x x x x x x
PQE PQE MEPE7 x x x x x x x x x x x
AI1 AI1 MEAI1 x x
Condition monitoring
CB wear1 CB wear1 CMBWEAR1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
TCS1 TCS1 CMTCS1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
MCS 3I MCS 3I CMCU3 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
MCS 3U MCS 3U CMVO3 x x x x x x x x x x x
TIME1 TIME1 CMTIME1 x x
Power quality monitoring
PQ 3Inf PQ 3Inf PQCU3H x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
PQ 3Unf PQ 3Unf PQVO3H x x x x x x x x x x x
Standard
SWGRP SWGRP SWGRP x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
a. H01 available only as sensor version
b. Not available as sensor version
c. VTs are used to measure phase-to-earth voltages, calculated phase-to-phase voltages are shown by 3U_B
d. Configured fixedly to the Io (1/5 A) channel or Ios if selected
e. Can be used as Io>, Io>> and Io>>> or Uo>, Uo>> and Uo>>> function block with some limitations
f. 3I>--> and 3I>>--> cannot be set to operate as 3I>, 3I>> or 3I>>>
g. Motor status indication
Calculated Uo (Uos) is used in the Sensor versions of H01 and H03

configurations. Calculated Io (Ios) is available in H01-H05, H08,
H09 and H50 configurations.
21
Table 3.-2 Protection functions available in the different standard

configurations of REX 521
Function Description
Is2t n< Three-phase motor start-up supervision
3I> Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, low-set stage
3I>> Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, high-set stage
3I>>> Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage
3I() Phase reversal protection
Io> Non-directional earth-fault protection, low-set stage
Io>> Non-directional earth-fault protection, high-set stage
Io>>> Non-directional earth-fault protection, instantaneous stage
Io>--> Directional earth-fault protection, low-set stage
Io>>--> Directional earth-fault protection, high-set stage
Io>>>--> Directional earth-fault protection, instantaneous stage
I2> Negative phase sequence protection, low-set stage
I2>> Negative phase sequence protection, high-set stage
3I>--> Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, low-set stage
3I>>--> Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, high-set stage
3I< Three-phase undercurrent protection
3U> Three-phase overvoltage protection, low-set stage
3U>> Three-phase overvoltage protection, high-set stage
3U< Three-phase undervoltage protection, low-set stage
3U<< Three-phase undervoltage protection, high-set stage
3I2f> Three-phase transformer inrush and motor start-up current detector
Iub> Phase discontinuity protection
3Ith> Three-phase thermal protection for cables
3Ithdev> Three-phase thermal overload protection for devices
O-->I Autoreclose function (5 shots)
Uo> Residual overvoltage protection, low-set stage
Uo>> Residual overvoltage protection, high-set stage
Uo>>> Residual overvoltage protection, instantaneous stage
U1U2<>_1 Phase sequence voltage protection
f1 Underfrequency or overfrequency protection, stage 1
f2 Underfrequency or overfrequency protection, stage 2
FUSEF Fuse failure protection
SYNC1 Synchro-check / voltage-check function
Table 3.-3 Control functions available in the different standard

I<->O CB1 Circuit breaker control with indication
I<->O IND1 Object indication
I<->O POS Logic control position selector
ALARM1-8 Alarm LED 1-8
22
Table 3.-4 Measurement functions available in the different standard

3I Three-phase current measurement
Io Neutral current measurement
Uo Residual voltage measurement
DREC Transient disturbance recorder
3U Three-phase voltage measurement
3U_B Three-phase voltage measurement
f System frequency measurement
PQE Three-phase power and energy measurement
MEAI1 Analog measuring function
Table 3.-5 Condition monitoring functions available in the different

standard configurations of REX 521
CB wear1 Circuit breaker electric wear 1
TCS1 Trip-circuit supervision 1
MCS 3I Supervision function of the energizing current input circuit
MCS 3U Supervision function of the energizing voltage input circuit
TIME1 Operation time counter
Table 3.-6 Power quality monitoring function available in the different

standard configurations of REX 521
PQ 3Inf Current waveform distortion measurement
PQ 3Unf Voltage waveform distortion measurement
23
24
4. Standard configurations
4.1. HW version: Basic
4.1.1. Standard configuration B01
4.1.1.1. Features
• Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection with three stages
• Non-directional earth-fault protection with three stages
• Phase discontinuity protection for three phases
• Three-phase thermal protection for cables
• Three-phase transformer inrush and motor start-up current detector
• Supervision function for the energizing current input circuit
• Current waveform distortion measurement
• Three-phase current measurement
• Neutral current measurement
• Calculation of the accumulated electric breaker wear of the circuit breaker (CB)
• Transient disturbance recorder
• Trip-circuit supervision
• Delayed trip output for the circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) function
• Circuit breaker control with indication
• Lockout function
• Object indication
• Logic control position selector
• User-configurable I/Os
• Interlocking
• User-configurable alarm LEDs
For more information about the features, refer to Chapter 8. Function block
descriptions.
25
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 50N/51N TCS
CBCM 0 I
3I 2f > 68
3I~harm R
I> 46
3 49F
CBFP 62 3I I0
LO 86
REX 521 B01

A051927
Fig. 4.1.1.1.-1 Block diagram of B01
4.1.1.2. Application
The B01 standard configuration for REX 521 is designed to be used in single busbar
systems using one circuit breaker for selective short-circuit, time overcurrent and
earth-fault protection of radial isolated neutral networks, solidly earthed networks,
resistant earthed networks and resonant earthed networks.
For more detailed information, refer to the application examples of B01 in Section
10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01, Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01 and
Section 10.3. Transformer feeder, Basic B01.
26
Digital Input signals Input SWGRP s Function blocks Output SWGRP s Output signals Output relays
inputs
3I>
3I>> Master Trip Open LOGIC *) HSPO1
3I>>> (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
SWGRP Io> Trip 1
>1 >1
Io>>
Selector Reset 1 O/C Io>>> Lockout
3I> I<->O CB1 S
E/F Iub> HSPO1
OOPEN Q
Iub> 3Ith> 3I>
O/C OCLOSE Lockout
Lockoutreset
reset R Lockout Working
3Ith> CBFP 3I>>
E/F BS1 OPEN AOPEN
PQ 3Inf 3I>>>
Iub> BS2 START CLOSE ACLOSE 1 Lockout
Reset 2 Io> Trip 2
Terminal 3Ith> GROUP TRIP CLOSEENA
Io>>
connection PQ 3Inf RESET CBFP BINOPEN
O/C Io>>>
1MRS751802-MUM
DI1 BINCLOSE 3I>

X4.2.5/6 Group E/F 3I>> Iub>
X4.2.6/7 DI2 Iub> I<->O IND1 3I>> 3Ith> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
X4.2.8/9 DI3 3Ith> BINOPEN 3I>>>
Blocking 1 CBFP
X4.2.9/10 DI4 BS1 Io> Trip 3 PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
BS1 3I> BINCLOSE
X4.2.11/12 DI5 BS2 BSOUT Io>>
X4.2.13/14 DI6 BS2 3I> BS1 3I>> GROUP START I<->O IND2 PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
Io>>>
X4.2.15/16 DI7 BS2 3I>> BS1 3I>>> DOUBLE TRIP BINOPEN Iub> 3I>
X4.2.17/18 Blocking 2 BS2 3I>>> BS1 Io> RESET CBFP
DI8 BINCLOSE 3Ith> 3I>> SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
X3.1.1/2 BS2 Io> BS1 Io>>
DI9 3I>>>
BS2 Io>> BS1 Io>>> 3I>>> I<->O POS
Io> Trip 4 SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
BS2 Io>>> BS1 Iub>
BINREMOTE Io>>
BS2 Iub> CBFP Io>>>
BS 3Ith> BS1
BS2 BSOUT 3I> Iub>
DREC trig Io Alarm LED1
GROUP START 3I>> 3Ith>
PQ 3Inf trig 3I>>> 3I> Start
DOUBLE TRIP Io 3I> Trip
RESET CBFP Io> Trip 5 3I>> Start
Io>> 3I>> Trip
3I
Master trip Io> Io>>> 3I>>> Start
Master trip Iub> External trip
IL1 3I>>> Trip
IL2 3Ith>
External trip CBFP
External trip BS1 IL3 3I>
Lockout reset BS2 START 3I>> Alarm LED2
Lockout reset GROUP TRIP IL1 DREC 3I>>> Io> Start
RESET CBFP IL2 Io> CBFP Io> Trip
Remote I<->0 POS IL3 Io>> Start
Io>>
Io>> Io Io>> Trip
Io>>>
Uo Io>>> Start
BI1 Start 3I> Iub>
Io>>> Trip
CBFP BI2 Start 3I>> 3Ith>
Close enable BS1 BI3 Start 3I>>> Close
Open BS2 START BI4 Start Io>
Protection Relay
I<->O CB1 GROUP TRIP Alarm LED3

BI5 Start Io>> Open Iub> Start
Close RESET CBFP BI6 Start Io>>> Iub> Trip
BI7 Start 3Iub> 3Ith> Start
CBO SWGRP Io>>> Open
BI8 Start 3Ith> 3I> 3Ith> Trip
CB pos. open TCS BS BI9 Trip 3I>
CBO 3I>>
CBFP BI10 Trip 3I>>
CB pos. close BI11 Trip 3I>>> 3I>>>
BS1 Start 1
BS2 START BI12 Trip Io> Io>
GROUP TRIP BI13 Trip Io>> Io>>
RESET CBFP BI14 Trip Io>>> Io>>> Alarm LED4
DC1 DC1 Trip 3Iub> Iub> 3I> DI1
I<->O IND1 BI15
DC pos. open Trip 3Ith> 3I>> DI2
3I2f> BI16 3Ith>
3I>>> DI3
EXT_TRG
DC2 3I2f /I1f >
Io> Start 2 DI4
DC2
DC pos. close 3dI/dt> Io>> DI5
START DI6
GROUP Io>>>
DI7
ES1 ES1 Iub>
I<->O IND2 CB wear 1 DI8

ES pos. open Iub> 3Ith>
OPEN ALARM Alarm LED5
3DI> DI1
BINOPEN DI2
ES2 ES2 Lockout
ES pos. close BINCLOSE DI3
CBFP DI4
BS1 3I>> BSOUT
CLOSEENA
TCS1 DI5
Logic input 1 Interlocking_A BS2 START 3I>>>
I<->O CB1 DI6
Interlocking_B & GROUP TRIP TCSSTATE DI7
Logic input 2 RESET CBFP BS ALARM I<->0 CB1 open
Interlocking_C DI8
I<->0 CB1 close
Fig. 4.1.1.2.-1 Block diagram of the standard configuration B01 for REX 521
Interlocking_D 3Ith> MCS 3I 3Ith>
Logic input 3 MEAS_HI Alarm LED6
Interlocking_E
Interlocking 3 ALARM MCS 3I Alarm 1
scheme DI2
J> TCS1 DI3
Cab PQ 3Inf har DI4
Lockout Working CBFP PQ 3Inf I<->0 CB1 open PQ 3Inf cum DI5
BLOCK I<->0 CB1 close CB wear1 DI6
TRIGG HAR_HIGH
DOUBLE 3I>> (BS) START 3Ith> DI7
3I2f START RESET CUM_HIGH Alarm 2 Interlocking
DOUBLE 3I>>> GROUP TRIP MCS 3I
RESET CBFP TCS1
CU_ALARM PQ 3Inf har MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
BS1 3I> PQ 3Inf cum MEAS HI ALARM
3I2f START BS1 3I>> CB wear1 DI3
BS1 3I>>> DI4
BS1 Io> BS2 3I> DI5
BS1 Io>> 3I2f START DI6
BS2 3I>>
BS1 Io>>> BS2 3I>>> DI7
BS1 Iub> BS2 Io> Lockout
BS2 Io>>
CB wear1 Alarm LED8
3I2f START BS2 Io>>>
BS2 Iub> TCS1
MCS 3I
BS 3Ith>
DI4
*) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1 DI5
if Open is selected by any multiplexers for DI6
DI7
PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2. DI8
27
A051928
REX 521
4.1.2. Standard configuration B02
4.1.2.1. Features
• Automatic reclosing 1...5 shots
• Interlocking
28
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 50N/51N TCS
3I 2f> CBCM 0 I
68
3I~harm R
I> 46
3 49F
0 I 79 I0
3I
CBFP 62
LO 86
REX 521 B02

A051929
Fig. 4.1.2.1.-1 Block diagram of the standard configuration B02
The B02 standard configuration for REX 521 is designed to be used in single busbar
systems using one circuit breaker for selective short-circuit protection, time-
overcurrent protection, earth-fault protection and automatic reclosing. The
configuration can be used in different types of networks such as radial isolated
neutral networks, solidly earthed networks, resistant earthed networks and resonant
earthed networks.
For more detailed information about the configuration, refer to the application
examples of the standard configuration B02 in Section 10.4. Outgoing feeder, Basic
B02.
29
Digital Input signals Input SWGRPs Function blocks Output SWGRP s Output signals Output relays
30
inputs
Open LOGIC **)
3I>
3I>> Master Trip Ropen HSPO1
SWGRP 3I>>> (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
3I> O-->I Io> Trip 1 >1
O/C AR1 ROPEN >1
Reset 1 Io>> Lockout
Selector E/F AR2 RCLOSE
CBFP Io>>> HSPO1
Iub> AR3 SHOT1 S
O/C BS1 Iub> Q
3Ith> AR4 SHOT2 3I>
E/F BS2 START 3Ith> Lockout reset R Lockout Working
PQ 3Inf ARINH SHOT3 3I>>
Iub> GROUP TRIP
O-->I CBOPEN SHOT4 3I>>>
RESET CBFP
REX 521
Reset 2 3Ith> CBCLOSE SHOT5 Io> Trip 2 1 Lockout

Terminal PQ 3Inf ON AR1TRIP
3I>> Io>>
connection O/C O-->I RESET AR2TRIP
Io>>>
X4.2.5/6 DI1 E/F AR3TRIP
Group CBFP Iub> 3I>
DI2 Iub> BS1 AR4TRIP PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
X4.2.6/7 3Ith> 3I>>
3Ith> BS2 CB FAIL
X4.2.8/9 DI3 BSOUT 3I>>>
Blocking 1 GROUP DEFTRIP
X4.2.9/10 DI4 BS1 3I> START Io> PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
DOUBLE LOCKOUT Trip 3
X4.2.11/12 DI5 TRIP Io>> >1
BS2 3I> BS1 3I>> TRDUE
X4.2.13/14 DI6 RESET CBFP PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
BS2 3I>> BS1 3I>>> TDDUE Io>>>
X4.2.15/16 DI7 BS2 3I>>> BS1 Io> ACTIVE Iub>
Blocking 2 3I>>> SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
X4.2.17/18 DI8 BS2 Io> BS1 Io>> SHOT_ALARM 3I> 3Ith>
X3.1.1/2 DI9 BS2 Io>> BS1 Io>>> 3I>>
CBFP I<->O IND1 3I>>> SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
BS2 Io>>> BS1 Iub> BS1 Trip 4
BS2 BSOUT BINOPEN Io>
BS2 Iub>
BINCLOSE Io>>
BS 3Ith> GROUP START
DREC trig DOUBLE TRIP I<->O IND2 Io>>>
Alarm LED1
PQ 3Inf trig RESET CBFP BINOPEN Iub> 3I> Start
3I> External trip 3I> Trip
BINCLOSE 3Ith>
O-->I INH Io> 3I>> 3I>> Start
I<->O POS 3I>>> 3I>> Trip
O-->I ON Trip 5
Io> 3I>>> Start
O-->I CBFP BINREMOTE Io>> 3I>>> Trip
BS1 Io>>>
O-->I Ext. start AR1 BS2 START Io
O-->I Ext. trip AR2 Io Iub> 3I>
GROUP TRIP
AR3 RESET
3Ith> 3I>>
*) CBFP Alarm LED2
AR4 3I 3I>>> Io> Start
Io>> Io> CBFP Io> Trip
Master trip IL1 Io>> Io>> Start
Master trip
IL2 Io>>> Io>> Trip
External trip CBFP IL3 Io>>> Start
External trip BS1 Iub>
BS2 START 3Ith> Io>>> Trip
Lockout reset
Lockout reset GROUP TRIP DREC
Remote RESET CBFP RCLOSE
IL1 Close
Io>>> 1 Iub> Start Alarm LED3
IL2 CLOSE
Close enable Open Iub> Trip
IL3
Open CBFP Io Open 3Ith> Start
Start 3I> 3Ith> Trip
I<->O CB1 BS1 Uo Start 3I>>
Close BI1 O->I OPEN
BS2 START Start 3I>>>
SWGRP BI2 Lockout O->I ACTIVE
GROUP TRIP Start Io> 3I>
CBO BI3 O->I ALAR1
CB pos. open RESET CBFP Start Io>> 3I>>
TCS BS BI4 O->I ALAR2
CBO Start Io>>> 3I>>>
3I2f> BI5 Start 3Iub> Start 1
Protection Relay
CB pos. close BI6 Io> Alarm LED4

3I2f /I1f > Start 3Ith> DI1
BI7 Io>> DI2
3dI/dt> Trip 3I>
BI8 Trip 3I>> Io>>> DI3
GROUP START BI9 Trip 3I>>> Iub> DI4
DC1 DC1 I<->O IND1 BI10
3I>
Trip Io> 3Ith> DI5
DC pos. open Iub> BI11 3I>>
Trip Io>> DI6
BI12 3I>>>
3DI> Trip Io>>> Start 2 DI7
DC2 DC2 BI13 Io> DI8
Trip 3Iub>
DC pos. close BI14 Trip 3Ith> Io>>
CBFP BI15 Io>>> Alarm LED5
BS1 BI16 DI1
ES1 ES1 I<->O IND2 Iub> DI2
BS2 START EXT_TRG
ES pos. open 3Ith> DI3
GROUP TRIP
RESET CBFP DI4
CB wear1
ES2 ES2 3I>> BSOUT DI5
ES pos. close 3Ith> OPEN ALARM DI6
3I>>>
3 BINOPEN DI7
J> BINCLOSE DI8
Logic input 1
Cab I<->0 CB1 open
TCS1 MEAS HI ALARM Alarm LED6
CBFP I<->0 CB1 close
Logic input 2 DI2
Interlocking BLOCK (BS) TCSSTATE 3Ith>

START Alarm 1 DI3
scheme GROUP BS ALARM MCS 3I
Logic input 3 TRIP DI4
CLOSEENA RESET TCS1
I<->O CB1 CBFP MCS 3I DI5
Interlocking_A PQ 3Inf har DI6
& CU_ALARM PQ 3Inf cum
Interlocking_B ALARM I<->0 CB1 open DI7
Interlocking_C I<->O CB1 CB wear1 Interlocking
I<->0 CB1 close
Interlocking_D OOPEN 3Ith>
PQ 3Inf
Interlocking_E OPEN OCLOSE Alarm 2 MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
MCS 3I
OPENENA AOPEN TRIGG HAR_HIGH TCS1 MEAS HI ALARM
Lockout Working CLOSE ACLOSE RESET CUM_HIGH DI3
PQ 3Inf har
CLOSEENA DI4
I<->O IND1 PQ 3Inf cum
Fig. 4.1.2.2.-1 Block diagram of the standard configuration B02 for REX 521
BINOPEN SHOT1 DI5
BINOPEN CB wear1 DI6
DOUBLE 3I>> BINCLOSE SHOT2
3I2f START BINCLOSE DI7
DOUBLE 3I>>> SHOT3
O-->I Active Lockout
SHOT4
BS1 3I> SHOT5 Alarm LED8
CB wear1
3I2f START BS1 3I>> TRDUE
TCS1
BS1 3I>>> TDDUE MCS 3I
AR1TRIP
BS1 Io> ACTIVE DI4
BS2 3I> AR2TRIP
BS1 Io>> BS2 3I>> AR3TRIP DI5
BS1 Io>>> O-->I Alarm 1 DI6
BS2 3I>>> AR4TRIP
BS1 Iub> DI7
BS2 Io> CBFAIL
DI8
BS2 Io>> DEFTRIP
3I2f START BS2 Io>>> LOCKOUT AR1TRIP
BS2 Iub> SHOT_ALARM AR2TRIP
BS 3Ith> AR3TRIP O-->I Alarm 2
AR4TRIP
*) NOTE! The trip and start signals from the protection function blocks CBFAIL **) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
are routed directly to the auto-recloser (O->I) via the input switchgroups DEFTRIP if Open is selected by any multiplexers for
of the auto-recloser and are not shown in the diagram. 3I2f START LOCKOUT PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
SHOT_ALARM
1MRS751802-MUM
A051930
4.2. HW version: Medium
4.2.1. Standard configuration M01
4.2.1.1. Features
• Directional earth-fault protection with three stages
• Residual voltage measurement
• Interlocking
31
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 67N TCS
CBCM 0 I
3I 2f> 68
3I~harm R
I> 46
3 49F
CBFP 62 3I I0
LO 86
U0
REX 521 M01

A051931
Fig. 4.2.1.1.-1 Block diagram of the standard configuration M01
The M01 standard configuration for REX 521 is designed to be used in single busbar
systems using one circuit breaker for selective short-circuit, time overcurrent and
directional earth-fault protection of radial isolated neutral networks, solidly earthed
networks, resistant earthed networks and resonant earthed networks.
examples of the standard configuration M01 in Chapter 11. Application examples,
Medium and Section 11.2. Incoming feeder, Medium M01.
32
Digital Input signals Input SWGRPs Function blocks Output SWGRPs Output signals Output relays
inputs
SWGRP
3I>
Reset 1 O/C 3I> I<->O CB1 3I>> Master Trip Open LOGIC *)
Selector HSPO1
E/F OOPEN 3I>>> (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
OCLOSE Trip 1
Iub> O/C CBFP Io>-->
3Ith> BS1 OPEN AOPEN >1 >1
E/F Io>>-->
PQ 3Inf BS2 START CLOSE ACLOSE Lockout
Iub> Io>>>-->
GROUP TRIP CLOSEENA S HSPO1
Reset 2 3Ith> Iub> Q
Terminal RESET CBFP BINOPEN 3I>
PQ 3Inf 3Ith> Lockout reset R Lockout Working
connection BINCLOSE 3I>>
O/C 3I>>
1MRS751802-MUM
DI1 Group E/F 3I>>>

X4.2.5/6 I<->O IND1 1
Iub> Io>--> Trip 2 Lockout
X4.2.6/7 DI2 CBFP BINOPEN
X4.2.8/9 DI3 3Ith> BS1 Io>>-->
Blocking 1 BINCLOSE Io>>>-->
X4.2.9/10 DI4 BS2 BSOUT
X4.2.11/12 DI5 BS1 3I> GROUP I<->O IND2 3I> Iub>
START
X4.2.13/14 DI6 BS2 3I> BS1 3I>> DOUBLE 3I>> 3Ith> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
TRIP BINOPEN
X4.2.15/16 DI7 BS2 3I>> BS1 3I>>> RESET 3I>>>
CBFP BINCLOSE
X4.2.17/18 DI8 BS2 3I>>> BS1 Io>-->
Blocking 2 Io>--> Trip 3 PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
X3.1.1/2 DI9 BS2 Io>--> BS1 Io>>--> 3I>>> I<->O POS
BS1 Io>>>--> Io>>-->
BS2 Io>>-->
BS1 Iub> Io>>>--> PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
BS2 Io>>>--> BINREMOTE
BS2 Iub> CBFP Iub> 3I>
BS1
BS 3Ith> Io 3Ith> 3I>> SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
BS2 BSOUT
DREC trig GROUP START Io 3I>>>
DOUBLE Io>--> Trip 4 SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
TRIP 3I
PQ 3Inf trig RESET CBFP Io>>-->
IL1 Io>>>-->
Io> 3I> Iub> Alarm LED1
Io>--> IL2 3I> Start
BACTRL IL3 3I>> 3Ith>
Io>>--> 3I> Trip
Io>>>--> 3I>>> 3I>> Start
CBFP
BACTRL Uo Io>--> Trip 5 3I>> Trip
Master trip BS1 START Io>>--> 3I>>> Start
Uo
Master trip BS2 TRIP Io>>>--> 3I>>> Trip
Iub> External trip
External trip GROUP CBFP DREC
External trip RESET 3Ith>
IL1
Lockout reset Io>> IL2 3I> Alarm LED2
Lockout reset IL3 3I>> Io>-> Start
Io 3I>>> Io>-> Trip
Remote Io>>-> Start
CBFP Iob Io>--> CBFP
Uo Io>>-> Trip
BACTRLB START Io>>--> Io>>>-> Start
Close enable S1 TRIP BI1 Start 3I> Io>>>--> Io>>>-> Trip
Protection Relay
BS2 CBFP BI2 Start 3I>> Iub>

Open BI3 Start 3I>>>
I<->O CB1 GROUP 3Ith>
RESET BI4 Start Io>
Close BI5 Start Io>> Close
BI6 Start Io>>> Iub> Start Alarm LED3
SWGRP Io>>> Iub> Trip
CBO BI7 Start 3Iub> Open
CB pos. open 3Ith> Start
CBO TCS BS BI8 Start 3Ith>
BI9 Trip 3I> 3Ith> Trip
CB pos. close CBFP Open
BI10 Trip 3I>> 3I>
BACTRL START BI11 Trip 3I>>>
BS1 TRIP 3I>>
BI12 Trip Io> 3I>>>
BS2 CBFP BI13 Trip Io>>
GROUP Io>--> Start 1
DC1 DC1 I<->O IND1 BI14 Trip Io>>>
DC pos. open RESET Io>>--> Alarm LED4
BI15 Trip 3Iub> DI1
BI16 Trip 3Ith> Io>>>-->
3I2f> 3I> DI2
DC2 DC2 EXT_TRG Iub>
3I>> DI3
DC pos. close 3I2f /I1f > 3Ith>
3I>>> DI4
3dI/dt> Start 2 DI5

ES1
Io>-->
ES1 I<->O IND2 GROUP START DI6
ES pos. open CB wear1 Io>>-->
DI7
Iub> OPEN ALARM Io>>>--> DI8
BINOPEN Iub>
ES2 ES2 3DI>
ES pos. close BINCLOSE 3Ith> Alarm LED5
DI1
DI2
CBFP TCS1 DI3
Logic input 1 BS1 Lockout
TCSSTATE DI4
BS2 START 3I>> BSOUT DI5
Logic input 2 GROUP TRIP BS ALARM
DI6
Fig. 4.2.1.2.-1 Block diagram of the standard configuration M01 for REX 521
3I>>>
Interlocking RESET CBFP DI7
MCS 3I
Logic input 3 scheme I<->0 CB1 open DI8
CLOSEENA 3Ith> ALARM
I<->O CB1 3 I<->0 CB1 close
Interlocking_A & 3Ith> MEAS HI ALARM Alarm LED6
J>
Interlocking_B Alarm 1 DI2
Cab PQ 3Inf MCS 3I
Interlocking_C DI3
Interlocking_D TCS1
TRIGG HAR_HIGH DI4
Interlocking_E BLOCK (BS) PQ 3Inf har
RESET CUM_HIGH DI5
GROUP START I<->0 CB1 open PQ 3Inf cum
DI6
RESET TRIP I<->0 CB1 close CB wear1
Lockout Working DI7
CBFP 3Ith> Interlocking
CU_ALARM MCS 3I Alarm 2
DOUBLE 3I>> TCS1
3I2f START MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
DOUBLE 3I>>> PQ 3Inf har MEAS HI ALARM
PQ 3Inf cum DI3
BS1 3I> CB wear1 DI4
3I2f START BS1 3I>> DI5
BS1 3I>>> 3I2f START DI6
BS1 Io>--> BS2 3I>
DI7
BS1 Io>>--> BS2 3I>>
Lockout
BS1 Io>>>--> BS2 3I>>>
BS1 Iub> BS2 Io>-->
CB wear1 Alarm LED8
BS2 Io>>-->
BS2 Io>>>--> TCS1
BS2 Iub> *) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1 MCS 3I
3I2f START DI4
BS 3Ith> if Open is selected by any multiplexers for DI5
DI7
DI8
33
A051932
REX 521
4.2.2. Standard configuration M02
4.2.2.1. Features
• Interlocking
34
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 67N TCS
CBCM 0 I
3I 2f> 68
3I~harm R
I> 46
3 49F
0 I 79 I0
3I
CBFP 62
U0
LO 86
REX 521 M02

A051933
Fig. 4.2.2.1.-1 Block diagram of the standard configuration M02
The M02 standard configuration for REX 521 is designed to be used in single busbar
systems using one circuit breaker for selective short-circuit protection, time-
overcurrent protection, directional earth-fault protection and automatic reclosing.
The configuration can be used in different types of networks such as of radial
isolated neutral networks, solidly earthed networks, resistant earthed networks and
resonant earthed networks.
examples of the standard configuration M02 in Section 11.3. Outgoing feeder,
Medium M02.
35
36
inputs
Open LOGIC **)
3I>
3I>> Master Trip Ropen HSPO1
SWGRP 3I>>> (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
Io>--> Trip 1
O/C 3I> O-->I >1 >1
Reset 1 Io>>-->
Selector E/F AR1 ROPEN Lockout
Iub> AR2 RCLOSE
Io>>>-->
O/C CBFP S HSPO1
3Ith> AR3 SHOT1 Iub> Q
E/F BS1 3I>
PQ 3Inf BS2 AR4 SHOT2 3Ith> Lockout reset R Lockout Working
Iub> START 3I>>
O-->I ARINH SHOT3
REX 521
3Ith> GROUP TRIP 3I>>>

Reset 2 RESET CBOPEN SHOT4
Terminal PQ 3Inf CBFP Io>--> Trip 2 1 Lockout
O-->I CBCLOSE SHOT5
connection O/C Io>>-->
3I>> ON AR1TRIP
X4.2.5/6 E/F RESET AR2TRIP Io>>>-->
DI1 Group
X4.2.6/7 Iub> Iub> 3I>
DI2 AR3TRIP PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
X4.2.8/9 3Ith> CBFP 3Ith> 3I>>
DI3 BS1 AR4TRIP
X4.2.9/10 Blocking 1 3I>>>
DI4 BS2 BSOUT CB FAIL
X4.2.11/12 BS1 3I> Io>--> PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
DI5 GROUP START DEFTRIP Trip 3
X4.2.13/14 BS2 3I> BS1 3I>>
DI6 DOUBLE TRIP LOCKOUT Io>>-->
X4.2.15/16 BS2 3I>> BS1 3I>>> PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
DI7 RESET CBFP TRDUE Io>>>-->
X4.2.17/18 BS2 3I>>> BS1 Io>-->
DI8 Blocking 2 TDDUE Iub>
X3.1.1/2 BS2 Io>--> BS1 Io>>--> SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
DI9 3I>>> ACTIVE 3I> 3Ith>
BS2 Io>>--> BS1 Io>>>-->
SHOT_ALARM 3I>>
BS2 Io>>>--> BS1 Iub>
CBFP 3I>>> SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
BS2 Iub> I<->O CB1
Trip 4
BS1 Io>-->
BS 3Ith> BS2 BSOUT OOPEN Io>>-->
DREC trig GROUP START OCLOSE Io>>>-->
PQ 3Inf trig DOUBLE TRIP OPEN AOPEN Iub> Alarm LED1
RESET CBFP CLOSE ACLOSE 3I>
O-->I INH 3Ith> External trip 3I> Start
CLOSEENA 3I>> 3I> Trip
O-->I ON Io> BINOPEN 3I>>> 3I>> Start
BINCLOSE Io>--> Trip 5
3I>> Trip
O-->I Io>>--> 3I>>> Start
CBFP I<->O IND1
O-->I Ext. start AR1 Io>>>--> 3I>>> Trip
BACTRL
O-->I Ext. trip AR2 BINOPEN Iub> 3I>
BS1 START
AR3 BINCLOSE 3Ith> 3I>>
*) BS2 TRIP
AR4 GROUP CBFP I<->O IND2 3I>>>
CBFP Alarm LED2
RESET BINOPEN Io>--> Io>-> Start
Io>--> BINCLOSE Io>>--> Io>-> Trip
BACTRL Io>>
Io>>--> Io>>>--> Io>>-> Start
Io>>>--> I<->O POS Io>>-> Trip
Iub>
Master trip 3Ith> Io>>>-> Start
Master trip CBFP BINREMOTE Io>>>-> Trip
External trip BACTRLB START RCLOSE
External trip S1 Io
TRIP Close
Lockout reset Io 1
Lockout reset BS2 CBFP CLOSE
Remote GROUP 3I Open Iub> Start Alarm LED3
Close enable RESET IL1 Open Iub> Trip
IL2 3Ith> Start
Open
I<->O CB1 Io>>> IL3 3Ith> Trip
Lockout O->I OPEN
Close SWGRP
Protection Relay
Uo 3I> O->I ACTIVE

CBO CBO TCS BS Uo
3I>> O->I ALAR1
CB pos. open CBFP
3I>>> O->I ALAR2
BACTRL START Start 1
DREC Io>-->
CB pos. close BS1 TRIP
BS2 IL1 Io>>--> DI1 Alarm LED4
CBFP
GROUP IL2 Io>>>--> DI2
DC1 DC1 RESET IL3 Iub> DI3
I<->O IND1 3I>
DC pos. open Io 3Ith> DI4
3I>>
3I2f> Iob DI5
Uo
3I>>>
DC2 DC2 3I2f /I1f > Start 2 DI6
BI1 Start 3I> Io>--> DI7
DC pos. close 3dI/dt> Io>>-->
BI2 Start 3I>> DI8
GROUP START BI3 Start 3I>>> Io>>>-->
ES1 ES1 I<->O IND2 BI4 Start Io>-> Iub> Alarm LED5
ES pos. open Iub> DI1
BI5 Start Io>>-> 3Ith> DI2
3DI> BI6 Start Io>>>-> DI3
ES2 ES2 BI7 Start 3Iub> DI4
Start 3Ith> 3I>> BSOUT
ES pos. close BI8 DI5
CBFP BI9 Trip 3I> 3I>>>
BS1 DI6
BI10 Trip 3I>> DI7

Logic input 1 BS2 START BI11 Trip 3I>>>
GROUP TRIP I<->0 CB1 open DI8
BI12 Trip Io>->
Logic input 2 RESET CBFP BI13 Trip Io>>-> I<->0 CB1 close
MEAS HI ALARM Alarm LED6
Interlocking scheme BI14 Trip Io>>>-> 3Ith>
3Ith> Trip 3Iub>
Alarm 1 DI2
Logic input 3 CLOSEENA BI15 MCS 3I
3 Trip 3Ith> DI3
BI16 TCS1
I<->O CB1 J> DI4
Interlocking_A EXT_TRG PQ 3Inf har
& Cab DI5
Interlocking_B PQ 3Inf cum
I<->0 CB1 open DI6
Interlocking_C CBFP CB wear1 DI7
Interlocking_D I<->0 CB1 close
CB wear1 Interlocking
Interlocking_E BLOCK (BS) 3Ith>
Fig. 4.2.2.2.-1 Block diagram of the standard configuration M02 for REX 521
START MCS 3I Alarm 2
GROUP OPEN ALARM
MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
Lockout Working RESET TRIP BINOPEN TCS1
CBFP MEAS HI ALARM
BINCLOSE PQ 3Inf har
CU_ALARM DI3
PQ 3Inf cum DI4
TCS1 SHOT1 CB wear1
DOUBLE 3I>> SHOT2 DI5
3I2f START PQ 3Inf
DOUBLE 3I>>> TCSSTATE DI6
TRIGG HAR_HIGH SHOT3
BS ALARM O-->I Active DI7
RESET CUM_HIGH SHOT4 Lockout
BS1 3I> MCS 3I SHOT5
3I2f START BS1 3I>> ALARM TRDUE
CB wear1 Alarm LED8
BS1 3I>>> TDDUE TCS1
AR1TRIP
BS1 Io>--> BS2 3I> ACTIVE MCS 3I
AR2TRIP
BS1 Io>>--> BS2 3I>> DI4
AR3TRIP
BS1 Io>>>--> BS2 3I>>> O-->I Alarm 1 DI5
AR4TRIP
BS1 Iub> BS2 Io>--> DI6
CBFAIL
BS2 Io>>--> DI7
DEFTRIP DI8
3I2f START BS2 Io>>>--> LOCKOUT
BS2 Iub> AR1TRIP
SHOT_ALARM AR2TRIP
BS 3Ith>
AR3TRIP O-->I Alarm 2
AR4TRIP
*) NOTE! The trip and start signals from the protection function blocks CBFAIL **) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
are routed directly to the auto-recloser (O->I) via the input switchgroups DEFTRIP if Open is selected by any multiplexers for
of the auto-recloser and are not shown in the diagram. 3I2f START LOCKOUT PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
SHOT_ALARM
1MRS751802-MUM
A051934
4.3. HW version: High/Sensor
4.3.1. Standard configuration H01 (Sensor)
4.3.1.1. Features
• Three-phase directional overcurrent protection with two stages
• Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection with one stage
• Three-phase thermal protection for cable
• Synchro-check/voltage-check function with one stage
• Supervision function for energizing current input circuit
• Supervision function for energizing voltage input circuit
• Voltage waveform distortion measurement
• Three phase-to-earth voltage measurements
• System frequency measurement
• Three-phase power and energy measurement
• Automatic reclosing 1…5 shots
• Interlocking
The standard configuration H01 is available only with the sensor

HW version.
37
3I> 67 MCS 000
TCS1
3I> 50
CBCM 0 I
I 0> 67N
3I~harm R
3I 2f> 68
3U~harm
I> 46
3I I0 P
3 49F
SYNC 25
3U U Q
0
0 I 79
CBFP */62 f pf E
LO 86
REX 521 H01

A051935
Fig. 4.3.1.1.-1 Block diagram of standard configuration H01
The H01 standard configuration for REX 521 is designed to be used in single busbar
systems using one circuit breaker for selective directional and non-directional short-
circuit protection, directional time-overcurrent protection, directional earth-fault
protection and automatic reclosing with synchro- and voltage-check functionality.
For more detailed information about the standard configuration, refer to the
application example of the standard configuration H01 in Section 12.1. Incoming
feeder, High H01.
38
inputs Open LOGIC **)
SWGRP
REX 521 Master Trip Ropen HSPO1
O/C Io> I<->O CB1
Trip 1 (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
E/F OPEN OOPEN 3I>-->
Reset 1 >1 >1
Iub> O/C OPENENA OCLOSE 3I>>--> Lockout
3Ith> E/F CBFP CLOSE AOPEN 3I>>> HSPO1
Selector BACTRL 3I>--> S
PQ 3Inf Iub> CLOSEENAACLOSE Io>--> Q
O-->I BS1 START BINOPEN 3I>>--> Io>>-->
3Ith> Lockout reset R Lockout Working
PQ 3Unf BS2 TRIP BINCLOSE 3I>>> Io>>>-->
Reset 2 PQ 3Inf GROUP CBFP
O-->I I<->O IND1 Io>--> Iub> 1 Lockout
RESET 3I>-->
Terminal PQ 3Unf BINOPEN Io>>--> 3Ith>
O/C 3I>>-->
connection Io>> BINCLOSE Io>>>-->
Group E/F 3I>>>
X4.2.5/6 Iub> Trip 2
DI1 Iub> I<->O IND2 Io>-->
X4.2.6/7 BS1 3I>--> 3Ith> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
3Ith>
1MRS751802-MUM
DI2 CBFP BINOPEN Io>>-->

X4.2.8/9 SYNC1 BS1 3I>>-->
DI3 BACTRL START BINCLOSE Io>>>-->
Blocking 1 BS1 3I>>> Trip 3
X4.2.9/10 DI4 BS1 TRIP PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
BS1 Io>--> I<->O POS Iub>
X4.2.11/12 DI5 BS2 CBFP
BS1 Io>>--> BS2 3I>--> BINLOCAL 3Ith> PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
X4.2.13/14 DI6 GROUP
BS1 Io>>>--> BS2 3I>>--> BINREMOTE 3I>-->
X4.2.15/16 RESET
DI7 BS2 3I>>> 3I>>-->
X4.2.17/18 BS1 Iub> Io SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
DI8 BS2 Io>--> Io>>> Io 3I>>>
X3.1.1/2 BS SYNC1
DI9 BS2 Io>>--> Io>--> Trip 4
Uo SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
BS2 Io>>>--> Io>>-->
Blocking 2 BS2 Iub> CBFP Uos Io>>>-->
BACTRL START
BS 3Ith> BS1 TRIP 3I>--> Iub>
DREC trig 3I
BS2 CBFP IL1 3I>>--> 3Ith> Alarm LED1
PQ 3Inf trig 3I>-> Start
GROUP IL2 3I>>> 3I>-> Trip
PQ 3Unf trig RESET IL3 Io>--> Trip 5 3I>>-> Start
3I>--> Io>>--> 3I>>-> Trip
O-->I INH 3I> IL1
DREC
3I>>--> Io>>>--> 3I>>> Start
O-->I ON IL2 3I>>> 3I>>> Trip
Iub>
IL3 Io>--> External trip
O-->I CBFP 3Ith>
Io
O-->I Ext. start BACTRL START Io>>-->
AR1 Iob
O-->I Ext. trip BS1 TRIP Io>>>--> Alarm LED2
AR2 U1 CBFP Io>-> Start
BS2 CBFP Iub>
U2 Io>-> Trip
AR3 *) GROUP 3Ith>
AR4 U3 Io>>-> Start
Io>--> RESET
BACTRL U12b Start 3I>-->
Io>>--> Io>>-> Trip
3I>> BI1 Start 3I>>--> RCLOSE Io>>>-> Start
Io>>>--> BI2 Start 3I>>> Close
1 Io>>>-> Trip
Master trip BI3 Start Io>--> CLOSE
Master trip
CBFP BI4 Start Io>>--> Open
External trip BACTRL BSOUT Open
External trip BI5 Start Io>>>-->
Lockout reset BS1 START BI6 Start Iub> Iub> Start Alarm LED3
Lockout reset BS2 TRIP BI7 Start 3Ith> Iub> Trip
Remote
GROUP CBFP BI8 Trip 3I>--> 3I>--> Start 1 3Ith> Start
Close enable DOUBLE Trip 3I>>-->
BI9 3I>>--> 3Ith> Trip
Open RESET BI10 Trip 3I>>>
Protection Relay
I<->O CB1 3I>>> O->I OPEN

BI11 Trip Io>--> O->I ACTIVE
Close SWGRP 3I>>> Io>-->
BI12 Trip Io>>--> O->I ALAR1
Io>>--> 3I>-->
CBO CBO TCS BS BI13 Trip Io>>>--> O->I ALAR2
BS1 CBFP Io>>>--> 3I>>-->
CB pos. open BI14 Trip Iub>
BS2 BSOUT Trip 3Ith> Iub> 3I>>> Alarm LED4
BI15 Lockout DI1
CB pos. close GROUP START BI16 3Ith> Io>-->
Io>>--> DI2
DOUBLE TRIP EXT_TRG DI3
RESET CBFP Io>>>--> Start 2 DI4
DC1 DC1 I<->O IND1 Iub>
DC pos. open 3I2f> DI5
3U 3Ith> DI6
3I2f /I1f > UL1 DI7
DC2 DC2 3dI/dt> UL2 BSOUT
DC pos. close 3I>>--> DI8
GROUP START UL3 3I>>>
DI1 Alarm LED5
Iub>
ES1 ES1 I<->O IND2 3DI>
f DI2
ES pos. open I<->0 CB1 open Alarm 1 DI3
I<->0 CB1 close DI4
BS1 CBFP PQE 3Ith>
ES2 ES2 DI5
ES pos. close BS2 START MCS 3I DI6

GROUP TRIP I<->0 CB1 open
CLOSEENA TCS1 I<->0 CB1 close Alarm 2 DI7
RESET CBFP CB wear1
Logic input 1 PQ 3Inf har DI8
OPEN ALARM 3Ith>
Interlocking_A I<->O CB1 PQ 3Inf cum
& 3Ith> BINOPEN MCS 3I MEAS HI ALARM Alarm LED6
Logic input 2 Interlocking_B 3 CB wear1 TCS1
BIN- MCS 3U DI2
Interlocking_C J> PQ 3Inf har SHOT1 DI3
Logic input 3 Interlocking_D Interlocking Cab
CLOSETCS1 PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Inf cum SHOT2 DI4
Interlocking_E scheme CBFP PQ 3Unf cum CB wear1 SHOT3 DI5
BLOCK START TCSSTATE
BS ALARM MCS 3U SHOT4 DI6
Lockout Working GROUP TRIP
Fig. 4.3.1.2.-1 Block diagram of the standard configuration H01 for REX 521
PQ 3Unf har SHOT5 DI7
RESET CBFP MCS 3I PQ 3Unf cum TRDUE Interlocking
DOUBLE 3I>>--> CU_ALARM ALARM TDDUE O-->I Active
3I2f START ACTIVE MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
DOUBLE 3I>>> O-->I MCS 3U
AR1 ROPEN MEAS HI ALARM
AR2 RCLOSE ALARM DI3
3I2f START BS1 3I>--> AR3 DEFTRIP AR1TRIP O-->I Alarm 1 DI4
BS1 3I>>--> AR4 PQ 3Inf AR2TRIP
LOCKOUT DI5
BS1 3I>>> ARINH TRIGG HAR_HIGH AR3TRIP DI6
BS1 Io>--> CBOPEN RESET CUM_HIGH AR4TRIP DI7
BS2 3I>--> CBCLOSE AR1TRIP Lockout
BS1 Io>>--> CBFAIL
BS2 3I>>--> ON PQ 3Unf AR2TRIP
BS1 Io>>>--> DEFTRIP
BS2 3I>>> RESET TRIGG HAR_HIGH AR3TRIP CB wear1 Alarm LED8
BS1 Iub> LOCKOUT
BS2 Io>--> RESET CUM_HIGH AR4TRIP TCS1
BS SYNC1 SHOT_ALARM
BS2 Io>>--> SYNC CBFAIL O-->I Alarm 2 MCS 3I
BS2 Io>>>--> COMMAND DEFTRIP MCS 3U
3I2f START DI5
BS2 Iub> GROUP LOCKOUT
BS 3Ith> BLOCK SC_OK SHOT_ALARM DI6
DI7
DI8
*) NOTE! The trip and start signals from the protection function blocks 3I2f START
are routed directly to the auto-recloser (O->I) via the input switchgroups
**) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
of the auto-recloser and are not shown in the diagram.
if Open is selected by any multiplexers for
PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
39
A051936
REX 521
4.3.2. Standard configuration H02
4.3.2.1. Features
• Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection with two stages
• Underfrequency or overfrequency protection with one stage
• Three phase voltage measurements
• Interlocking
40
3I> 67 MCS1 000
TCS
3I > 50/51
CBCM 0 I
I0 > 67N
3I~harm R
f</f> 81U/81O
3U~harm
3I2f> 68
I> 46
3 49F 3I I0 P
0 I 79
3U U0 Q
CBFP */62
LO 86
f pf E
REX 521 H02
A051937
Fig. 4.3.2.1.-1 Block diagram of the standard configuration H02
systems using one circuit breaker for selective directional and non-directional short-
circuit protection, directional and non-directional time-overcurrent protection,
directional earth-fault protection and automatic reclosing.
application example of the standard configuration H02 in Section 12.2. Incoming
feeder, High H02.
41
42
inputs
REX 521 Open LOGIC **)
SWGRP 3I>-->
Io> I<->O CB1 3I>>-->
O/C OPEN OOPEN Master Trip Ropen HSPO1
3I>
E/F OPENENA OCLOSE 3I>>
Iub> O/C Trip 1 (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
CBFP CLOSE AOPEN Io>--> >1
Reset 1 3Ith> E/F BACTRL
>1
CLOSEENAACLOSE Io>>--> Lockout
Selector PQ 3Inf Iub> BS1 START BINOPEN HSPO1
O-->I 3Ith> BS2 TRIP Io>>>--> S
BINCLOSE 3I>--> Q
PQ 3Unf PQ 3Inf GROUP CBFP Iub>
3I>>--> Lockout reset R Lockout Working
f1 O-->I RESET I<->O IND1 3Ith>
3I>
REX 521
Reset 2 PQ 3Unf BINOPEN f1 Trip1

Io>> 3I>> Trip 2 1 Lockout
f1 BINCLOSE f1 Trip2
Terminal O/C Io>-->
connection I<->O IND2 Io>>-->
Group E/F
CBFP BINOPEN Io>>>-->
X4.2.5/6 DI1 Iub> BACTRL START BINCLOSE
BS1 3I>--> Iub> 3I>-->
X4.2.6/7 DI2 3Ith> BS1 TRIP
X4.2.8/9 BS1 3I>>--> I<->O POS 3Ith> 3I>>-->
DI3 Blocking 1 f1 BS2 3I>--> BS2 CBFP
X4.2.9/10 BS1 3I> BINLOCAL f1 Trip1 3I> PO1
DI4 BS2 3I>>--> GROUP (X4.1.12/13)
X4.2.11/12 BS1 3I>> RESET BINREMOTE f1 Trip2 3I>>
DI5 BS2 3I> Io>-->
X4.2.13/14 BS1 Io>--> Io PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
DI6 BS2 3I>> Io>>> Io>>--> Trip 3
X4.2.15/16 BS1 Io>>--> Io
X4.2.17/18 DI7 BS2 Io>--> Io>>>-->
BS1 Io>>>--> PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
X3.1.1/2 DI8 BS2 Io>>--> Uo Iub>
BS1 Iub>
DI9 BS2 Io>>>--> CBFP Uo
BS1 f1 BACTRL START 3Ith> SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
BS2 Iub> 3I>--> f1 Trip1
BS 3Ith> BS1 TRIP 3I
Blocking 2 BS2 CBFP IL1 3I>>--> f1 Trip2
BS2 f1 SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
DREC trig GROUP IL2 3I>
RESET IL3 3I>> Trip 4
PQ 3Inf trig Io>-->
PQ 3Unf trig 3I> IL1 DREC Io>>--> Alarm LED1
IL2 Io>>>--> 3I> Start
O-->I INH 3I>-->
BS1 CBFP IL3 External trip 3I> Trip
O-->I ON Iub>
BS2 START Io 3I>>--> 3I>> Start
3Ith> 3I>> Trip
O-->I GROUP TRIP Iob 3I>
f1 Trip1 3I>-> Start
RESET CBFP Uo 3I>> Trip 5
O-->I Ext. start AR1 f1 Trip2 3I>-> Trip
U12 Io>-->
O-->I Ext. trip AR2 3I>> 3I>>-> Start
U23 Io>>-->
AR3 *) U31 Io>>>--> 3I>>-> Trip
AR4 BS1 CBFP BI1 Start 3I>--> 3I>-->
Iub> Alarm LED2
BACTRL Io>-> BS2 BSOUT BI2 Start 3I>>--> 3I>>--> Io>-> Start
Io>>-> GROUP START 3Ith> 3I>
BI3 Start 3I> Io>-> Trip
Master trip Master trip Io>>>-> DOUBLE TRIP f1 Trip1 3I>> Io>>-> Start
BI4 Start 3I>>
RESET CBFP Start Io>--> f1 Trip2 Io>--> Io>>-> Trip
External trip BI5
External trip BI6 Start Io>>--> Io>>--> Io>>>-> Start
Lockout reset 3I> Io>>>--> CBFP
BI7 Start Io>>>--> Io>>>-> Trip
Lockout reset Iub>
Remote BI8 Start Iub>
BI9 Start 3Ith> 3Ith>
Close enable CBFP
BACTRL START BI10 Start1 f1 RCLOSE
Open Close f1 Start 1 Alarm LED3
I<->O CB1 BS1 TRIP BI11 Start2 f1
1 f1 Trip 1
BS2 CBFP BI12 Trip 1 CLOSE
Protection Relay
Close SWGRP BI13 Trip 2 Open f1 Start 2

GROUP
BI14 Trip 3 Open f1 Trip 2
CBO CBO TCS BS RESET
CB pos. open BI15 Trip 4 Iub> Start
3I>> BI16 Trip 5 Iub> Trip
CB pos. close EXT_TRG 3Ith> Start
3I>--> 3Ith> Trip
CBFP 3I>>--> Start 1
DC1 DC1 BACTRL BSOUT 3I> O->I OPEN Alarm LED4
DC pos. open I<->O IND1 BS1 START 3I>>
3U O->I ACTIVE
BS2 TRIP UL1_U12 Io>--> O->I ALAR1
DC2 GROUP CBFP UL2_U23 3I>-->
DC2 Io>>--> O->I ALAR2
DC pos. close DOUBLE UL3_U31 3I>>--> DI1
Io>>>-->
RESET 3I> Lockout DI2
Iub>
ES1 ES1 f 3I>> DI3
I<->O IND2 3I2f> 3Ith>
ES pos. open Io>--> DI4
3I2f /I1f > f1 Start1
Io>>-->
3dI/dt> PQE f1 Start2 Alarm LED5
ES2 ES2 Io>>>--> DI1
ES pos. close GROUP START Iub> DI2
Start 2 DI3
Interlocking Iub> CB wear1 3Ith>

scheme CLOSEENA 3DI> f1 Start1 DI4
Logic input 1 OPEN ALARM DI5
f1 Start2
I<->O CB1 BINOPEN DI6
Logic input 2 Interlocking_A & BS1 CBFP BINCLOSE DI7
Interlocking_B BS2 START 3I>>--> BSOUT
DI8
Interlocking_C GROUP TRIP TCS1 3I>>
Logic input 3 Interlocking_D RESET CBFP Alarm LED6
MEAS HI ALARM
Interlocking_E TCSSTATE
DI2
3Ith> BS ALARM I<->0 CB1 open Alarm 1 DI3
Lockout Working 3 MCS 3I I<->0 CB1 close
DI4
J> 3Ith>
ALARM DI5
Cab MCS 3I
DOUBLE 3I>>--> DI6
3I2f START CBFP MCS 3U TCS1 I<->0 CB1 open
DOUBLE 3I>> DI7
BLOCK START ALARM PQ 3Inf har I<->0 CB1 close Alarm 2
Interlocking
GROUP TRIP PQ 3Inf cum 3Ith>
RESET CBFP PQ 3Inf CB wear1 MCS 3I MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
3I2f START BS1 3I>--> CU_ALARM MCS 3U TCS1
TRIGG HAR_HIGH MEAS HI ALARM
BS1 3I>>--> RESET CUM_HIGH
PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Inf har DI3
BS1 3I> BS2 3I>--> f1 PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Inf cum DI4
BS1 3I>> BS2 3I>>--> f< PQ 3Unf CB wear1 SHOT1 DI5
BS1 Io>--> BS2 3I> f> MCS 3U SHOT2
TRIGG HAR_HIGH DI6
BS1 Io>>--> BS2 3I>> PQ 3Unf har SHOT3 DI7
RESET CUM_HIGH PQ 3Unf cum
BS1 Io>>>--> BS2 Io>--> df/dt< SHOT4 Lockout
BS1 Iub> BS2 Io>>--> df/dt> O-->I SHOT5
BS2 Io>>>--> AR1 ROPEN O-->I Active CB wear1 Alarm LED8
BS1 f1 AR2
TRDUE
BS2 Iub> RCLOSE TCS1
BS1 START1 AR3 TDDUE
DEFTRIP MCS 3I
3I2f START BS 3Ith> BS2 TRIP1 AR4 ACTIVE
LOCKOUT MCS 3U
BS2 f1 GROUP START2 ARINH AR1TRIP O-->I Alarm 1 DI5
RESET TRIP2 CBOPEN
*) NOTE! The trip and start signals from the protection function blocks AR2TRIP DI6
CBCLOSE DI7
are routed directly to the auto-recloser (O->I) via the input switchgroups ON AR3TRIP
AR4TRIP DI8
of the auto-recloser and are not shown in the diagram. RESET AR1TRIP
CBFAIL
DEFTRIP AR2TRIP
LOCKOUT AR3TRIP **) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
SHOT_ALARM AR4TRIP
CBFAIL
DEFTRIP PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
O-->I Alarm 2
LOCKOUT
SHOT_ALARM
3I2f START
1MRS751802-MUM
A051938
4.3.3.1. Features
• Synchro-check/voltage-check function with one stage
• Three phase voltage measurements 1
• Interlocking
1. Only in Sensor version.
43
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
TCS
I0 > 67N
CBCM 0 I
3I 2f> 68
3I~harm R
I> 46
3U~harm
3 49F
25 3I I0 P
SYNC
0 I 79
3U U0 Q
CBFP */62
LO 86 f pf E
REX 521 H03
A051939
systems using one circuit breaker for selective non-directional short-circuit
protection, non-directional time-overcurrent protection, directional earth-fault
protection and automatic reclosing with synchro- and voltage-check functionality.
application example of the standard configuration H03 in Section 12.3. Bus
sectionalizer, High H03.
44
inputs
Open LOGIC **)
SWGRP REX 521
O/C 3I> I<->O CB1 Master Trip Ropen HSPO1
E/F OPEN (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
Reset 1 OPENENA OOPEN 3I> Trip 1
Iub> O/C BS1 CBFP >1 >1
3Ith> E/F BS2 START CLOSE OCLOSE 3I>>
Selector
PQ 3Inf Iub> GROUP TRIP CLOSEENA AOPEN 3I>>> Lockout
BINOPEN ACLOSE S
PQ 3Unf 3Ith> RESET CBFP 3I> Io>--> Q HSPO1
O-->I PQ 3Inf BINCLOSE 3I>> Io>>--> R Lockout Working
3I>> Lockout reset
Reset 2 3I>>>
PQ 3Unf I<->O IND1 Io>>>-->
O-->I Io>--> Iub> 1 Lockout
Terminal O/C BS1 CBFP BINOPEN
BINCLOSE 3I> Io>>--> 3Ith>
connection Group E/F BS2 BSOUT 3I>> Io>>>-->
X4.2.5/6 Iub> GROUP START I<->O IND2
DI1 3I>>> Iub> Trip 2
3Ith> BS1 3I> DOUBLE TRIP BINOPEN
X4.2.6/7 DI2 Io>--> 3Ith>
1MRS751802-MUM
SYNC1 BS1 3I>> RESET CBFP BINCLOSE PO1 (X4.1.12/13)

X4.2.8/9 DI3 Io>>-->
Blocking 1 BS1 3I>>>
X4.2.9/10 DI4 3I>>> I<->O POS Io>>>-->
BS1 Io>--> Trip 3 PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
X4.2.11/12 DI5 BINLOCAL Iub>
BS1 Io>>--> BS2 3I>
X4.2.13/14 DI6 BINREMOTE
BS1 Io>>>--> BS2 3I>> BS1 CBFP 3Ith> PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
X4.2.15/16 DI7
BS1 Iub> BS2 3I>>> BS2 BSOUT 3I 3I>
X4.2.17/18 DI8
BS SYNC1 BS2 Io>--> GROUP START IL1 3I>> (X4.1.8/7/6)
X3.1.1/2 DI9 SO1
BS2 Io>>--> DOUBLE TRIP IL2 3I>>>
BS2 Io>>>--> RESET CBFP IL3 Io>--> Trip 4
BS2 Iub> SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
Blocking 2 Io> Io Io>>-->
BS 3Ith> Io>>>-->
Io
DREC trig Iub>
3I>
PQ 3Inf trig Uo Alarm LED1
CBFP 3I>> 3Ith> 3I> Start
BACTRL Uo
PQ 3Unf trig 3I>>> 3I> Trip
BS1 START Trip 5 3I>> Start
O-->I INH DREC Io>-->
BS2 TRIP IL1 3I>> Trip
3I> Io>>-->
O-->I ON GROUP CBFP IL2 3I>>> Start
IL3
3I>> Io>>>-->
RESET 3I>>> Trip
O-->I Io 3I>>> Iub>
Io>> Io>--> External trip
O-->I Ext. start AR1 Iob 3Ith>
O-->I Ext. trip AR2 Uo Io>>-->
AR3 U12 Io>>>--> Alarm LED2
*) CBFP CBFP Io>-> Start
AR4 BACTRL START U23 Iub> Io>-> Trip
Io>--> BS1 TRIP U12b Start 3I> 3Ith> Io>>-> Start
BACTRL
Io>>--> BS2 CBFP BI1 Start 3I>> Io>>-> Trip
Io>>>--> GROUP BI2 Start 3I>>> Io>>>-> Start
RCLOSE
Master trip RESET BI3 Start Io>--> Close Io>>>-> Trip
Master trip BI4 Start Io>>--> 1
External trip CLOSE
External trip Io>>> BI5 Start Io>>>--> Open
Lockout reset BI6 Start Iub> Open
Lockout reset BI7 Start 3Ith> Iub> Start Alarm LED3
Remote
CBFP BI8 Trip 3I> Iub> Trip
Close enable BACTRL START BI9 Trip 3I>> 3Ith> Start
BS1 TRIP 3I> Start 1
Open BI10 Trip 3I>>> 3Ith> Trip
3I>>
Protection Relay
I<->O CB1 BS2 CBFP BI11 Trip Io>--> O->I OPEN

Close GROUP BI12 Trip Io>>--> 3I>>> O->I ACTIVE
SWGRP
RESET BI13 Trip Io>>>--> Io>--> O->I ALAR1
CBO CBO TCS BS BI14 Io>>--> 3I>
CB pos. open 3I2f> Trip Iub> O->I ALAR2
BI15 Trip 3Ith> Io>>>--> 3I>>
3I2f /I1f >
BI16 Iub> 3I>>> DI1 Alarm LED4
CB pos. close 3dI/dt> Lockout
EXT_TRG 3Ith> Io>--> DI2
GROUP START
Io>>--> DI3
DC1 DC1 Iub> 3U Io>>>--> Start 2 DI4
DC pos. open I<->O IND1 UL1_U12
3DI> Iub> DI5
UL2_U23 3Ith> DI6
DC2 DC2 UL3_U31 DI7
DC pos. close BS1 CBFP
3I>> BSOUT DI8
BS2 START f
3I>>> Alarm LED5
ES1 GROUP TRIP DI1
ES1 I<->O IND2
ES pos. open RESET CBFP DI2
PQE I<->0 CB1 open DI3
3Ith> Alarm 1
I<->0 CB1 close DI4
ES2 ES2 3
ES pos. close 3Ith> DI5

J> CB wear1 DI6
OPEN ALARM MCS 3I I<->0 CB1 open
Cab DI7
BINOPEN TCS1 I<->0 CB1 close Alarm 2
Logic input 1 CBFP DI8
BINCLOSE PQ 3Inf har 3Ith>
BLOCK START
GROUP TRIP
PQ 3Inf cum MCS 3I MEAS HI ALARM Alarm LED6
Logic input 2 TCS1
Interlock- RESET CBFP CB wear1 TCS1 DI2
TCSSTATE
ing CU_ALARM BS ALARM MCS 3U PQ 3Inf har SHOT1 DI3
Logic input 3 scheme CLOSEENA
PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Inf cum SHOT2 DI4
Interlocking_A I<->O CB1 O-->I MCS 3I PQ 3Unf cum SHOT3 DI5
& AR1
CB wear1
Interlocking_B ROPEN ALARM SHOT4 DI6
MCS 3U
Interlocking_C AR2 RCLOSE DI7
MCS 3U PQ 3Unf har SHOT5
Interlocking_D AR3 DEFTRIP Interlocking
AR4 ALARM PQ 3Unf cum TRDUE
Interlocking_E LOCKOUT
ARINH TDDUE O-->I Active MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
CBOPEN PQ 3Inf ACTIVE MEAS HI ALARM
Lockout Working CBCLOSE TRIGG HAR_HIGH DI3
ON RESET CUM_HIGH DI4
AR1TRIP O-->I Alarm 1
DOUBLE 3I>> RESET DI5
3I2f START PQ 3Unf AR2TRIP
DOUBLE 3I>>> AR3TRIP DI6
SYNC TRIGG HAR_HIGH DI7
COMMAND RESET CUM_HIGH AR4TRIP
AR1TRIP Lockout
3I2f START BS1 3I> GROUP CBFAIL
DEFTRIP AR2TRIP
BS1 3I>> BLOCK SC_OK CB wear1 Alarm LED8
BS2 3I> LOCKOUT AR3TRIP
BS1 3I>>> TCS1
BS2 3I>> SHOT_ALARM AR4TRIP
BS1 Io>--> MCS 3I
BS1 Io>>--> BS2 3I>>> CBFAIL O-->I Alarm 2
MCS 3U
BS1 Io>>>--> BS2 Io>--> DEFTRIP DI5
BS1 Iub> BS2 Io>>--> LOCKOUT DI6
BS SYNC1 BS2 Io>>>--> SHOT_ALARM DI7
BS2 Iub>
DI8
3I2f START BS 3Ith>
3I2f START
*) NOTE! The trip and start signals from the protection function blocks **) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
are routed directly to the auto-recloser (O->I) via the input switchgroups if Open is selected by any multiplexers for
of the auto-recloser and are not shown in the diagram. PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
45
A051940
REX 521
4.3.4.1. Features
• Three-phase directional overcurrent protection with one stage
• Non-directional earth-fault protection with three stages1
• Interlocking
1. The function blocks I0>, I0>>, I0>>> are fixedly configured to the I0 (1/5A)
channel.
46
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
3I> 67 TCS1
CBCM 0 I
I0 > 67N
3I~harm R
I0 > 50N/51N
3U~harm
f</f> 81U/81O
3I2f> 68
I> 46
3 49F 3I I P
0
0 I 79
3U U0 Q
CBFP */62
LO 86 f pf E
REX 521 H04
A051941
protection, non-directional time-overcurrent protection, directional and non-
directional earth-fault protection and automatic reclosing.
application example of the standard configuration H04 in Section 12.4. Outgoing
feeder, High H04.
47
48
inputs SWGRP Open LOGIC **)
Master Trip
O/C REX 521
Ropen
dir E/F 3I> 3I> HSPO1
3I>
Iub> O/C (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
3I>> Trip 1
3Ith> dir E/F >1 >1
Reset 1 BS1 CBFP 3I>>>
PQ 3Inf Iub> CBFP
BS2 START BACTRL START Io>--> Lockout
O-->I 3Ith> 3I>
Selector GROUP TRIP BS1 TRIP Io>>--> S
PQ 3Unf PQ 3Inf 3I>> Q HSPO1
RESET CBFP BS2 CBFP Io>>>-->
E/F O-->I 3I>>> Lockout reset R Lockout Working
GROUP Iub>
f1 PQ 3Unf 3I>> Io>--> 3Ith>
REX 521
Reset 2 RESET
E/F 3I> Io>>--> Io> 1 Lockout
Terminal O/C f1 BS1 CBFP I<->O CB1 3I>> Io>>>--> Io>>
connection E/F BS2 BSOUT OPEN 3I>>> Iub> Io>>>
Group GROUP START Io>--> 3Ith> 3I>-->
Iub> BS1 3I> OPENENA OOPEN
X4.2.5/6 DI1 DOUBLE TRIP Io>>--> Io> f1 Trip 1 PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
3Ith> BS1 3I>> CLOSE OCLOSE
X4.2.6/7 DI2 BS2 3I> RESET CBFP Io>>>--> Io>>
f1 BS1 3I>>> CLOSEENA AOPEN f1 Trip 2
X4.2.8/9 DI3 Blocking 1 BS2 3I>> Iub> Io>>>
BS1 Io>--> 3I>>> BINOPEN ACLOSE PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
X4.2.9/10 DI4 BS2 3I>>> 3Ith> 3I>--> Trip 2
BS1 Io>>--> BINCLOSE
X4.2.11/12 BS2 Io>--> Io> f1 Trip 1
DI5 BS1 Io>>>--> PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
X4.2.13/14 BS2 Io>>--> BS1 CBFP I<->O IND1 Io>> f1 Trip 2
DI6 BS1 Iub>
X4.2.15/16 BS2 Io>>>--> BS2 BSOUT BINOPEN Io>>>
DI7 BS1 Io> Trip 3 SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
X4.2.17/18 BS2 Iub> GROUP START BINCLOSE 3I>-->
DI8 BS1 Io>>
X3.1.1/2 BS 3Ith> DOUBLE TRIP f1 Trip 1
DI9 BS1 Io>>> I<->O IND2
BS2 Io> RESET CBFP f1 Trip 2 SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
BS1 3I>--> BINOPEN
BS2 Io>> External trip
BS1 f1 Io> BINCLOSE
Blocking 2 BS2 Io>>>
BS2 3I>--> I<->O POS 3I> Trip 4
BS2 f1 3I>>
BINLOCAL Alarm LED1
DREC trig CBFP 3I>>> 3I> Start
BINREMOTE
BACTR 3I> Trip
PQ 3Inf trig Io>--> 3I>
LBS1 START 3I Trip 5 3I>> Start
Io>>--> 3I>>
PQ 3Unf trig BS2 TRIP IL1 3I>> Trip
Io>>>--> 3I>>>
GROUP CBFP IL2 Iub> 3I>>> Start
O-->I INH Io>-->
RESET IL3 3Ith> 3I>>> Trip
O-->I ON Io>>-->
Io>> Io Io> Io>>>--> 3i>--> Start
O-->I Io Io>> Iub> 3I> 3I>--> Trip
O-->I Ext. start AR1 Io>>> 3Ith> 3I>>
Uo Alarm LED2
CBFP 3I>--> Io> 3I>>> Io>--> Start
O-->I Ext. trip AR2 Uo
BACTRL START f1 Trip 1 Io>> Io>--> Io>--> Trip
AR3 *)
BS1 TRIP f1 Trip 2 Io>>> Io>>--> Io>>--> Start
AR4 IL1
DREC
Io>--> BS2 CBFP 3I>--> Io>>>--> Io>>--> Trip
BACTRL IL2 Iub> Io>>>--> Start
Io>>--> GROUP f1 Trip 1
Master trip IL3 f1 Trip 2 3Ith> Io>>>--> Trip
Master trip Io>>>--> RESET
Io Io>
External trip Io>>> Iob CBFP
External trip Io>>
Lockout reset Uo Io>>>
Lockout reset U12 3I>--> Alarm LED3
Remote CBFP Io> Start
U23 RCLOSE
BACTRL START Close Io> Trip
Close enable U31 1
BS1 TRIP CLOSE Io>> Start
Open BI1 Start 3I>
I<->O CB1 BS2 CBFP Open Io>> Trip
Protection Relay
BI2 Start 3I>>

GROUP Open Io>>> Start
Close SWGRP BI3 Start 3I>>>
RESET Io>>> Trip
BI4 Start Io>-->
CBO CBO TCS BS BI5 Start Io>>-->
CB pos. open 3I2f>
3I2f /I1f > BI6 Start Io>>>--> 3I> Start 1
BI7 Start Io> 3I>> f1 Start 1 Alarm LED4
CB pos. close 3dI/dt> 3I>>>
GROUP START BI8 Start Io>> f1 Trip 1
BI9 Start Io>>> Io>--> f1 Start 2
3I>
DC1 DC1 Iub> BI10 Start Iub> Io>>--> Start 2 f1 Trip 2
I<->O IND1 3I>>
DC pos. open 3DI> BI11 Start 3Ith> Io>>>--> Iub> Start
3I>>>
BI12 Start 3I>--> Iub> Iub> Trip
Io>-->
DC2 BI13 Start 1 f1 3Ith> 3Ith> Start
DC2 Io>>-->
DC pos. close BS1 CBFP BI14 Start 2 f1 Io> 3Ith> Trip
Io>>>-->
BS2 START BI15 Trip1 Io>>
Iub>
GROUP TRIP BI16 Trip2 Io>>> Lockout O->I OPEN Alarm LED5
ES1 ES1 I<->O IND2 3Ith>
RESET CBFP EXT_TRG 3I>--> O->I ACTIVE
ES pos. open Io>
f1 Start 1 O->I ALAR1
3Ith> Io>>
f1 Start 2 O->I ALAR2
ES2 ES2 3 Io>>>
3U 3I>--> DI1
ES pos. close J> UL1_U12 f1 Start 1 DI2

Cab UL2_U23 f1 Start 2 DI3
Logic input 1 CBFP UL3_U31 DI4
BLOCK START 3I>> BSOUT
Logic input 2 GROUP TRIP f 3I>>> MEAS HI ALARM Alarm LED6
Interlocking
RESET CBFP DI2
scheme I<->0 CB1 open DI3
Logic input 3 CLOSEENA CU_ALARM PQE I<->0 CB1 close Alarm 1 DI4
I<->O CB1 Io> 3Ith>
Interlocking_A DI5
& MCS 3I
Interlocking_B DI6
CB wear1 TCS1 I<->0 CB1 open DI7
Interlocking_C BS1 CBFP OPEN ALARM Alarm 2
BS2 START PQ 3Inf har I<->0 CB1 close Interlocking
Interlocking_D BINOPEN
GROUP TRIP PQ 3Inf cum 3Ith>
Interlocking_E BINCLOSE
RESET CBFP CB wear1 MCS 3I MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
TCS1 MCS 3U TCS1 MEAS HI ALARM
Lockout Working Io>> TCSSTATE PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Inf har DI3
SHOT1
BS ALARM PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Inf cum DI4
SHOT2
BS1 CBFP CB wear1 SHOT3 DI5
DOUBLE 3I>> MCS 3I
BS2 START MCS 3U DI6
3I2f START DOUBLE 3I>>> ALARM SHOT4
GROUP TRIP PQ 3Unf har DI7
DOUBLE 3I>-> SHOT5
RESET CBFP PQ 3Unf cum Lockout
MCS 3U TRDUE
3I2f START Io>>> ALARM TDDUE O-->I Active CB wear1 Alarm LED8
BS1 3I>
ACTIVE TCS1
BS1 3I>> BS2 3I> PQ 3Inf
BS1 3I>>> BS1 CBFP TRIGG HAR_HIGH MCS 3I
BS2 3I>>
BS1 Io>--> BS2 START RESET CUM_HIGH AR1TRIP O-->I Alarm 1 MCS 3U
BS2 3I>>>
BS1 Io>>--> GROUP TRIP AR2TRIP DI5
BS2 Io>-->
BS1 Io>>>--> RESET CBFP PQ 3Unf AR3TRIP DI6
BS2 Io>>-->
BS1 Iub> AR4TRIP DI7
BS2 Io>>>--> TRIGG HAR_HIGH
BS1 Io> f1 AR1TRIP DI8
BS2 Iub> RESET CUM_HIGH CBFAIL
BS1 Io>> f< AR2TRIP
BS 3Ith> DEFTRIP
BS1 Io>>> f> O-->I AR3TRIP
BS2 Io> LOCKOUT
BS1 3I>--> BS2 Io>> AR1 ROPEN AR4TRIP
AR2
SHOT_ALARM
BS1 f1 BS2 Io>>> df/dt< RCLOSE CBFAIL O-->I Alarm 2
BS2 3I>--> df/dt> AR3 DEFTRIP DEFTRIP
3I2f START
BS2 f1 AR4 LOCKOUT LOCKOUT
ARINH
BS1 START1 SHOT_ALARM
CBOPEN
*) NOTE! The trip and start signals from the protection function blocks BS2 TRIP1 **) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
CBCLOSE
are routed directly to the auto-recloser (O->I) via the input switchgroups GROUP START2 if Open is selected by any multiplexers for
ON 3I2f START
RESET TRIP2
of the auto-recloser and are not shown in the diagram. RESET PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
1MRS751802-MUM
A051942
4.3.5.1. Features
• Three-phase overvoltage protection with two stages
• Three-phase undervoltage protection with two stages
• Residual overvoltage protection with three stages
• Three-phase thermal overload protection for devices
• Interlocking
49
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
TCS
I 0> 50N/51N
CBCM 0 I
3I2f 68
3I~harm R
U 0> 59N
3U~harm
3U> 59
3I I0 P
3U< 27
CBFP */62
3U U0 Q
LO 86
3 49 f pf E
A051943
protection, non-directional time-overcurrent protection, non-directional earth-fault
protection, overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection and residual overvoltage
protection.
example of the standard configuration H05 in Section 12.5. Incoming feeder, High
H05/H50.
50
inputs
SWGRP Master Trip Open LOGIC *)
REX 521 HSPO1
O/C (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
3I> I<->O CB1 Trip 1
E/F 3I> >1 >1
O/V OPEN
3I>>
Reset 1 O/C OPENENA OOPEN 3I>
Lockout
U/V BS1 CBFP 3I>>> S
E/F CLOSE OCLOSE 3I>> HSPO1
PQ 3Inf BS2 START Io> Q
Selector O/V CLOSEENA AOPEN 3I>>> Lockout Working
RO/V GROUP TRIP Io>> Lockout reset R
U/V BINOPEN ACLOSE Io>
PQ 3Unf RESET CBFP Io>>>
PQ 3Inf BINCLOSE 3I> Io>>
3Ithdev> 3U> 1 Lockout
Reset 2 RO/V 3I>> 3I>> Io>>> 3U>>
PQ 3Unf I<->O IND1
3I>>> 3U> 3U<
3Ithdev> BINOPEN Io> 3U>> 3U<<
Terminal O/C CBFP
BS1 BINCLOSE Io>> 3U< Uo>
connection Group E/F PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
BS1 3I> BS2 BSOUT Io>>> 3U<< Uo>>
X4.2.5/6 DI1 O/V I<->O IND2
BS1 3I>> GROUP START 3U> Uo> Uo>>>
X4.2.6/7 DI2 U/V BS2 3I> DOUBLE TRIP BINOPEN
1MRS751802-MUM
BS1 3I>>> BS2 3I>> 3U>> Uo>> 3Ithdev> PO2 (X4.1.14/15)

X4.2.8/9 DI3 RO/V RESET CBFP BINCLOSE
Blocking 1 BS1 Io> BS2 3I>>> 3U< Uo>>>
X4.2.9/10 DI4 Trip 2 PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
BS1 Io>> BS2 Io> I<->O POS 3U<< 3Ithdev>
X4.2.11/12 DI5 3I>>>
BS1 Io>>> BS2 Io>> BINLOCAL Uo> Trip 3
X4.2.13/14
DI6 BS1 3U> BS2 Io>>> BINREMOTE Uo>> SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
X4.2.15/16
DI7 BS1 3U>> BS2 3U> BS1 CBFP Uo>>>
X4.2.17/18
DI8 BS1 3U< BS2 3U>> BS2 BSOUT 3I 3Ithdev> SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
X3.1.1/2 IL1 External trip
DI9 BS1 3U<< BS2 3U< GROUP START
BS1 Uo> BS2 3U<< IL2
DOUBLE TRIP
BS1 Uo>> BS2 Uo> RESET CBFP
IL3 3I> Trip 4
BS1 Uo>>> BS2 Uo>> 3I>> Alarm LED1
Io 3I> Start
Blocking 2 BS2 Uo>>> Io> 3I>>>
Io 3I> Trip
BS 3Ithdev> Io> 3I>
DREC trig 3I>> Start
Io>> 3I>> Trip 5
BS1 CBFP Uo 3I>> Trip
PQ 3Inf trig Io>>> 3I>>> 3I>>> Start
BS2 START Uo
3U> Io> 3I>>> Trip
PQ 3Unf trig GROUP TRIP Io>>
DREC 3U>>
RESET CBFP IL1 Io>>>
3U<
IL2 3U<< 3U>
Io>> Alarm LED2
IL3 Uo> 3U>> Io> Start
Io Uo>> 3U< Io> Trip
BS1 CBFP Iob Uo>>> 3U<< Io>> Start
BS2 START Uo 3Ithdev> Uo> Io>> Trip
GROUP TRIP U12 Uo>> 3I> Io>>> Start
RESET CBFP U23 Uo>>> 3I>> Io>>> Trip
U31 Start 3I> 3Ithdev> 3I>>> 3Ithdev> Start
Io>>> BI1 Start 3I>> Io>
Master trip Start 3I>>>
3Ithdev> Trip
Master trip BI2 Io>> CBFP
BS1 CBFP BI3 Start Io> Io>>> 3U> Start Alarm LED3
External trip Start Io>>
External trip BS2 START BI4 3Ithdev> 3U> Trip
Lockout reset BI5 Start Io>>> 3U>> Start
Lockout reset GROUP TRIP Close
BI6 Start 3U> 3U>> Trip
Remote RESET CBFP
BI7 Start 3U>> 3U< Start
Close enable BI8 Start 3U< Open
3I2f> 3U< Trip
Open 3I2f /I1f > BI9 Start 3U<< Open 3U<< Start
I<->O CB1
Protection Relay
BI10 Start Uo> 3U<< Trip

Close SWGRP 3dI/dt> Start Uo>>
GROUP START BI11
CBO TCS BS BI12 Start Uo>>> 3I> Start 1 Alarm LED4
CBO Uo> Start
CB pos. open 3U> BI13 Trip1 3I>>
Trip2 Uo> Trip
BI14 3I>>>
Trip3 Uo>> Start
CB pos. close BS1 BI15 Io> 3I> Uo>> Trip
BS2 BI16 Io>> 3I>> Start 2
Uo>>> Start
GROUP START EXT_TRG Io>>> 3I>>>
DC1 Uo>>> Trip
DC1 I<->O IND1 RESET TRIP 3U>
DC pos. open Io> DI1
3U 3U>> Io>> DI2
3U>> UL1_U12 3U< Io>>>
DC2 DC2 UL2_U23 3U<< Alarm LED5
3U> DI1
DC pos. close BS1 Uo> Lockout
UL3_U31 3U>> DI2
BS2 Uo>> 3U<
Uo>>> DI3
ES1 ES1 I<->O IND2 GROUP START f 3U<< DI4
ES pos. open RESET TRIP 3Ithdev> Uo> DI5
Uo>> DI6
ES2 ES2 3U< PQE Uo>>> DI7
ES pos. close BS1 3Ithdev> DI8

BS2 3I>> BSOUT
GROUP START CB wear1 MEAS HI ALARM Alarm LED6
Logic input 1 3I>>>
RESET TRIP OPEN ALARM DI2
BINOPEN DI3
Logic input 2 I<->0 CB1 open
Interlocking 3U<< BINCLOSE DI4
I<->0 CB1 close Alarm 1
scheme DI5
Logic input 3 CLOSEENA BS1 MCS 3I
TCS1 DI6
BS2 TCS1
I<->O CB1 TCSSTATE DI7
Interlocking_A GROUP START PQ 3Inf har I<->0 CB1 open Alarm 2
& BS ALARM Interlocking
Interlocking_B RESET TRIP PQ 3Inf cum I<->0 CB1 close
Interlocking_C MCS 3I CB wear1 MCS 3I MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
Interlocking_D MCS 3U TCS1 MEAS HI ALARM
Uo> ALARM
Interlocking_E PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Inf har DI3
BS1 PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Inf cum DI4
BS2 MCS 3U CB wear1
Lockout Working ALARM DI5
GROUP START MCS 3U DI6
RESET TRIP PQ 3Unf har DI7
PQ 3Inf PQ 3Unf cum
DOUBLE 3I>> Lockout
3I2f START Uo>> TRIGG HAR_HIGH
DOUBLE 3I>>>
RESET CUM_HIGH CB wear1 Alarm LED8
BS1
BS2 3I2f START TCS1
3I2f START BS1 3I> PQ 3Unf
START MCS 3I
BS1 3I>> GROUP TRIGG HAR_HIGH
BS2 3I> MCS 3U
BS1 3I>>> RESET TRIP RESET CUM_HIGH
BS2 3I>> DI5
BS1 Io>
DI6
BS1 Io>> BS2 3I>>> Uo>>>
3Ithdev> DI7
BS1 Io>>> BS2 Io>
BS1 DI8
BS1 3U> BS2 Io>> 3
BS1 3U>> BS2 Io>>> BS2 J>
BS1 3U< BS2 3U> GROUP START Dev
BS1 3U<< RESET TRIP CBFP *) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
BS2 3U>> if Open is selected by any multiplexers for
BS1 Uo>
BS2 3U< BLOCK START
BS1 Uo>> PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
BS1 Uo>>> BS2 3U<< TRIP
BS2 Uo> RESET CBFP
3I2f START
BS2 Uo>>
BS2 Uo>>>
BS 3Ithdev>
51
A051944
REX 521
4.3.6.1. Features
• Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection with two stages
• Underfrequency or overfrequency protection with two stages
• Interlocking
52
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
TCS
U 0> 59N
CBCM 0 I
3U> 59
3I~harm R
3U< 27
3U~harm
f</f> 81U/81O
3I I0 P
CBFP 62
LO 86 U0
3U Q
f pf E
REX 521 H06
A051945
protection, non-directional time-overcurrent protection, overvoltage protection,
undervoltage protection, residual overvoltage protection, underfrequency protection
and overfrequency protection.
application example of the standard configuration H06 in Section 12.6.
Measurement cubicle, High H06.
53
54
inputs REX 521
SWGRP 3I> I<->O CB1
O/C OPEN Master Trip Open LOGIC *) HSPO1
O/V OPENENA OOPEN (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
BS1 CBFP Trip 1
Reset 1 U/V CLOSE OCLOSE
BS2 START 3I> >1 >1
RO/V O/C CLOSEENA AOPEN
Selector GROUP TRIP 3I>> Lockout
Freq O/V BINOPEN ACLOSE
RESET CBFP 3U> HSPO1
PQ 3Inf U/V BINCLOSE S
3I> 3U>> Q
PQ 3Unf RO/V 3I>>
I<->O IND1 3I>> 3U< Lockout reset R Lockout Working
Freq
REX 521
Reset 2 3U> 3U<<

PQ 3Inf BINOPEN
Terminal CBFP 3I> 3U>> Uo> 1 Lockout
PQ 3Unf BS1 BINCLOSE
connection 3I>> 3U< Uo>>
BS2 BSOUT
O/C I<->O IND2 3U> 3U<< Uo>>>
GROUP START
X4.2.5/6 DI1 O/V BINOPEN 3U>> Uo> f1 Trip1
Group DOUBLE TRIP
X4.2.6/7 DI2 U/V BINCLOSE 3U< Uo>> f1 Trip2
RESET CBFP
X4.2.8/9 DI3 RO/V 3U<< Uo>>> f2 Trip1
X4.2.9/10 DI4 Freq BS1 3I> I<->O POS Uo> f1 Trip1 f2 Trip2
3U> BINLOCAL Uo>> f1 Trip2
X4.2.11/12 DI5 BS1 3I>> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
X4.2.13/14 Blocking 1 BS1 3U> BINREMOTE Uo>>> f2 Trip1 Trip 2
DI6 BS1
X4.2.15/16 BS1 3U>> f1 Trip1 f2 Trip2
DI7 BS2 3I PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
X4.2.17/18 BS1 3U< IL1 f1 Trip2 Trip 3
DI8 GROUP START
X3.1.1/2 BS1 3U<< IL2 f2 Trip1
DI9 RESET TRIP PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
BS1 Uo> IL3 f2 Trip2
BS1 Uo>> BS2 3I> 3U>> External trip SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
BS1 Uo>>> BS2 3I>> Io
BS1 f1 BS2 3U> Io
BS1 f2 BS1 SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
BS2 3U>> 3I> Trip 4
Blocking 2 BS2 Uo
BS2 3U< 3I>>
GROUP START
BS2 3U<< Uo 3U>
RESET TRIP 3I>
BS2 Uo> 3U>>
DREC 3U< 3I>> Trip 5 Alarm LED1
BS2 Uo>> 3U< IL1 3U> Start
BS2 Uo>>> 3U<< 3U>
BS1 IL2 3U>> 3U> Trip
BS2 f1 Uo>
BS2 IL3 3U< 3U>> Start
BS2 f2 Uo>>
GROUP Io 3U<< 3U>> Trip
START Uo>>>
RESET Iob Uo> 3U< Start
TRIP f1 Trip1
Uo Uo>> 3U< Trip
f1 Trip2
DREC trig U12 Uo>>> 3U<< Start
3U<< f2 Trip1
PQ 3Inf trig U23 f1 Trip1 3U<< Trip
f2 Trip2
BS1 U31 f1 Trip2
PQ 3Unf trig Alarm LED2
BS2 BI1 Start 3I> Uo> Start
f2 Trip1
GROUP START BI2 Start 3I>> Uo> Trip
Master trip f2 Trip2
Master trip RESET TRIP BI3 Start U> Uo>> Start
External trip BI4 Start U>> Uo>> Trip
External trip BI5 Start U< Uo>>> Start
Uo> 3I> CBFP
Lockout reset BI6 Start U<< Uo>>> Trip
Lockout reset BS1 3I>>
Remote BI7 Start Uo>
BS2 BI8 Start Uo>>
Close enable GROUP START BI9 Start Uo>>> Close
Open RESET TRIP Alarm LED3
I<->O CB1 BI10 Start1 f1 f1 Start1
Protection Relay
BI11 Start2 f1 Open f1 Trip1

Close SWGRP Uo>> BI12 Start1 f2 Open f1 Start2
CBO CBO TCS BS BI13 Start2 f2 f1 Trip2
CB pos. open BS1
BI14 Trip1 f2 Start1
BS2
BI15 Trip2 3I> f2 Trip1
CB pos. close GROUP START Start 1
BI16 Trip3 3I>> f2 Start2
RESET TRIP
EXT_TRG 3U> f2 Trip2
DC1 DC1 Uo>>> 3U>> 3I>
I<->O IND1 3I> Start Alarm LED4
DC pos. open 3U< Start 2
3U 3I>>
BS1 3U<< 3I> Trip
UL1_U12 3U>
DC2 BS2 Uo> 3I>> Start
DC2 UL2_U23 3U>>
DC pos. close GROUP START Uo>> 3I>> Trip
UL3_U31 3U<
RESET TRIP Uo>>> DI1
3U<<
f1 Start1 DI2
ES1 ES1 f Uo>
I<->O IND2 f1 f1 Start2 Lockout DI3
ES pos. open Uo>>
f< f2 Start1 DI4
Uo>>>
f> f2 Start2
ES2 ES2 f1 Start1 Alarm LED5
PQE DI1
ES pos. close f1 Start2
df/dt< DI2
f2 Start1
df/dt> DI3
f2 Start2
Logic input 1 DI4
CB wear1
OPEN ALARM DI5
BS1 START1 BSOUT DI6
Logic input 2 Interlock- BS2 TRIP1 BINOPEN 3I>>
BINCLOSE DI7
ing GROUP START2 DI8
Logic input 3 scheme CLOSEENA RESET TRIP2
TCS1 I<->0 CB1 open
I<->O CB1 I<->0 CB1 close Alarm 1 MEAS HI ALARM Alarm LED6
Interlocking_A f2 TCSSTATE
& MCS 3I DI2
Interlocking_B f< BS ALARM
f> TCS1 DI3
Interlocking_C
PQ 3Inf har I<->0 CB1 open DI4
Interlocking_D MCS 3I Alarm 2
PQ 3Inf cum I<->0 CB1 close DI5
Interlocking_E df/dt< ALARM CB wear1 MCS 3I DI6
df/dt> DI7
MCS 3U TCS1
Lockout Working MCS 3U PQ 3Unf har Interlocking
PQ 3Inf har
BS1 START1 ALARM PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Inf cum
BS2 TRIP1 MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
CB wear1
GROUP START2 PQ 3Inf MEAS HI ALARM
MCS 3U
RESET TRIP2 TRIGG HAR_HIGH DI3
PQ 3Unf har
RESET CUM_HIGH DI4
PQ 3Unf cum
DI5
DI6
PQ 3Unf
DI7
TRIGG HAR_HIGH
Lockout
RESET CUM_HIGH
CB wear1 Alarm LED8
TCS1
*) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1 MCS 3I
MCS 3U
if Open is selected by any multiplexers for DI5
DI7
DI8
1MRS751802-MUM
A051946
4.3.7.1. Features
• Non-directional earth-fault protection with two stages
• Directional earth-fault protection with two stages
• Negative phase sequence (NPS) protection with two stages
• Three-phase motor start-up supervision
• Phase reversal protection
• Phase sequence voltage protection
• Fuse failure protection
• Three-phase non-directional undercurrent protection with one stage
• Three-phase voltage measurements
• Delayed trip output for the circuit breaker failure protection (CBFP) function
• Operation time counter
• Interlocking
55
3I> 50/51 MCS 000
TCS
I0> 67N
CBCM 0 I
I0> 50N/51N
3I~harm R
3U> 59
3U~harm
3U< 27
3I I0 P
f</f> 81U/81O
Is2t,n< 48,14,66
3U U0 Q
3I
3I 46R
I2> 46 f pf E
3I< 37
F
60
3 49
U1<
U2> 27,47,59
U1>
CBFP */62
LO 86
A051947
The H07 standard configuration for REX 521 is designed for protection of large or
medium-size three-phase AC motors in circuit breaker controlled motor drives. Due
to large number of protective functions integrated, the relay provides a complete
protection against motor damage caused by electrical faults.
The H07 configuration can also be applied to other objects needing thermal overload
protection (such as power transformers) and it can also be used in applications
requiring overcurrent protection, under/overvoltage protection and/or directional or
non-directional earth-fault protection.
For more information about the H07 standard configuration, refer to application
example in Section 12.7. Motor protection, High H07/H51.
56
inputs REX 521
3I> I<->O CB1 3I>
OPEN 3I>>
BS1 CBFP OPENENA OOPEN 3I>>>
BS2 CLOSE OCLOSE Io>--> Master Trip Open LOGIC *)
START
GROUP CLOSEENA AOPEN Io>>-->
SWGRP TRIP HSPO1
RESET BINOPEN ACLOSE 3Ithdev>
O/C CBFP (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
BINCLOSE Io> Trip 1
dE/F Io>> >1 >1
3I>> I<->O IND1
3Ithdev> O/C 3I<
BINOPEN 3I> Lockout
PQ 3Inf dE/F 3U> S
3Ithdev> BS1 CBFP BINCLOSE 3I>> Q HSPO1
PQ 3Unf 3U>>
Reset 1 PQ 3Inf BS2 BSOUT 3I>>> Lockout reset R
E/F I<->O IND2 3U< Lockout Working
PQ 3Unf GROUP START BINOPEN Io>-->
Selector Voltage 3U<<
E/F DOUBLE TRIP BINCLOSE 3I> Io>>-->
f1 I2> 1 Lockout
Voltage RESET CBFP 3I>> 3Ithdev>
U/C I<->O IND3 I2>>
f1 3I>>> Io>
Current BINOPEN Is2t n<
U/C 3I>>> Io>--> Io>>
Is2t n<>
1MRS751802-MUM
Reset 2 BINCLOSE Io>>--> 3I< 3I()

Current U1U2<>_1
Terminal BS1 CBFP I<->O POS 3Ithdev> 3U> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
Is2t n<> f1 Trip1
connection Group O/C BS2 BSOUT BINLOCAL Io> 3U>>
E/F BINREMOTE Io>> 3U< f1 Trip2
X4.2.5/6 DI1 GROUP START PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
BS1 3I> 3I< 3U<< Trip 2
X4.2.6/7 DI2 Volt DOUBLE TRIP 3I
BS1 3I>> IL1 3U> I2>
X4.2.8/9 DI3 f1 RESET CBFP PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
BS1 3I>>> IL2 3U>> I2>>
X4.2.9/10 DI4 UC BS1 Io>--> BS2 3I> Io> IL3 3U< Is2t n<
X4.2.11/12 DI5 BS1 Io>>--> BS2 3I>> SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
Io 3U<< 3I()
X4.2.13/14 BS1 Io> BS2 3I>>> Io
DI6 I2> U1U2<>_1
X4.2.15/16 BS1 Io>> BS2 Io>--> SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
DI7 Blocking 1 CBFP Uo I2>> f1 Trip1
X4.2.17/18 BS1 3U> BS2 Io>>--> Uo
DI8 BACTR Is2t n< f1 Trip2
X3.1.1/2 BS1 3U>> BS2 Io> Trip 3
DI9 LBS1 START AI1 3I()
BS1 3U< BS2 Io>> TRIP U1U2<>_1
BS2 LOW ALARM
BS1 3U<< BS2 3U> f1 Trip1
GROUP CBFP HIGH ALARM
BS1 f1 BS2 3U>> f1 Trip2
DREC External trip
BS I2> BS2 3U<
Io>> IL1
BS I2>> BS2 3U<<
IL2 3I>
BS2 f1 Trip 4
Blocking 2 IL3 3I>> Alarm LED1
BS 3Ithdev> 3I> Start
CBFP Io 3I>>>
BS 3I< Iob 3I> Trip
BACTRL START Io>--> 3I> 3I>> Start
BS 3I() Uo
BS1 TRIP Io>>--> 3I>> Trip 5 3I>> Trip
BS U1U2<>_1 U12
DREC trig BS2 CBFP 3Ithdev> 3I>>> 3I>>> Start
U23 Io> Io>-->
PQ 3Inf trig GROUP U31 3I>>> Trip
RESET Io>> Io>>-->
BI1 Start 3I> 3Ithdev>
PQ 3Unf trig 3I<
BI2 Start 3I>> Io>
Io> 3U>
BI3 Start 3I>>> Io>> Alarm LED2
3U>>
BI4 Start Io>--> Io>-> Start
3U< 3I<
BS1 CBFP BI5 Start Io>>--> Io>-> Trip
3U<< 3U>
BACTRL Io>--> BS2 START BI6 Start Io> Io>>-> Start
I2> 3U>>
Io>>--> GROUP TRIP BI7 Start Io>> Io>>-> Trip
I2>> 3U< 3I>
RESET CBFP BI8 Start 3Ithdev> Io> Start
Master trip Is2t n< 3U<< 3I>>
Master trip BI9 Start I2>/I2>> Io> Trip
External trip 3I() I2> 3I>>>
BI10 Start Is2t, n< Io>> Start
External trip Io>> U1U2<>_1 I2>> Io>-->
Lockout reset BI11 Start 3I< Io>> Trip
Lockout reset BI12Start 3U>/3U>> f1 Trip1 Is2t n< Io>>-->
Protection Relay
Remote BS1 CBFP BI13Start 3U</3U<< f1 Trip2 3I() 3Ithdev> Alarm LED3
U1U2<>_1 3U> Start
Close enable BS2 START BI14 Start1/2 f1 Io>
f1 Trip1 3U> Trip
GROUP TRIP BI15 Trip1 Io>>
Open f1 Trip2 3U>> Start
I<->O CB1 RESET CBFP BI16 Trip2 3I<
CBFP 3U>> Trip
EXT_TRG I2>
Close SWGRP 3U< Start
3U> 3U I2>>
3U< Trip
CBO CBO TCS BS UL1_U12 Close 3U<< Start
CB pos. open
BS1 UL2_U23 3U<< Trip
BS2 UL3_U31 Open
CB pos. close DC1 Alarm LED4
I<->O IND1 GROUP START Open I2> Start
RESET TRIP f I2>> Start
DC1 3I> 3Ithdev> Start
DC pos. open DC2 3U>> PQE 3I>> Is2t n< Start
Start 1
3I>>> 3I< Start
DC2 BS1 Io>--> 3I() Start
ES1 I<->O IND2 CB wear1 Io>>--> 3I> f1 Start1/2
DC pos. close BS2 OPEN ALARM
GROUP START 3Ithdev> 3I>> FUSEF
BINOPEN
RESET TRIP Io> 3I>>>
ES1 BINCLOSE Alarm LED5
ES pos. open ES2 Io>> Io>--> Lockout I2> Trip
3U< TCS1 3I< Io>>--> I2>> Trip

TCSSTATE 3U> 3Ithdev> 3Ithdev> Trip
ES2 BS1 ALARM
Motor status Stop I<->O IND3 BS 3U>> Io> Is2t n< Trip
ES pos. close BS2
3U< Io>> 3I< Trip
GROUP START TIME1
3U<< 3I< 3I() Trip
Runs RESET TRIP ALARM
Logic input 1 I2> 3U> f1 Trip1/2
MCS 3I I2>> 3U>> U1<U1U2> Trip
3U<<
Logic input 2 ALARM Is2t n< 3U<
Interlocking U1<U1U2> Start Alarm LED6
BS1 3I() 3U<<
scheme MCS 3U U1U2<>_1 I2> Restart Disabled
CLOSEENA BS2
Logic input 3 ALARM f1 Start1 I2>> MEAS HI ALARM
GROUP START
I<->O CB1
Interlocking_A RESET TRIP f1 Start2 Is2t n< DI1
& PQ 3Inf
Interlocking_B 3I() DI2
TRIGG HAR_HIGH U1U2<>_1 DI3
Interlocking_C 3Ithdev> RESET CUM_HIGH
Start 2
3 f1 Start1 DI4
Interlocking_D
f1 Start2 Interlocking
Interlocking_E J> PQ 3Unf
3I>> BSOUT
Dev TRIGG HAR_HIGH MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
Lockout Working CBFP RESET CUM_HIGH 3I>>>
MEAS HI ALARM
BLOCK START I<->0 CB1 open Alarm 1 DI3
Restart inhibit Restart enable TRIP FUSEF I<->0 CB1 close DI4
RESET CBFP MCB BSOUT MCS 3I DI5
STALL (speed switch) TCS1
EN_RESTART I2> I<->0 CB1 open DI6
MCB State PQ 3Inf har I<->0 CB1 close DI7
f1 Alarm 2
PQ 3Inf cum MCS 3I Lockout
f< BLOCK START CB wear1
DOUBLE 3I>> TCS1
Is2t, n< START f> GROUP TRIP MCS 3U
DOUBLE 3I>>> PQ 3Inf har CB wear1 Alarm LED8
RESET CBFP PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Inf cum TCS1
df/dt< BLOCK_OU PQ 3Unf cum CB wear1 MCS 3I
BS1 3I> T
df/dt> TIME1 MCS 3U MCS 3U
Is2t, n< START BS1 3I>> I2>>
FUSEF PQ 3Unf har TIME1
BS1 3I>>>
BS1 Io>--> BS1 START1 PQ 3Unf cum Motor Runs
BS2 3I> BLOCK START
FUSEF BSOUT BS1 Io>>--> BS2 TRIP1 TIME1 DI7
BS2 3I>> GROUP TRIP
BS1 Io> GROUP START2 FUSEF DI8
BS2 3I>>> RESET CBFP 3Ithdev>
BS1 Io>> BS2 Io>--> RESET TRIP2 BLOCK_OU I2> Block Restart enable
BS1 3U> BS2 Io>>--> T
3I< I2>> Block
BS1 3U>> BS2 Io> Is2t n<
Restart Inhibit
BS1 3U< BS2 Io>> Restart enable
GROUP START Is2t n<
BS1 3U<< BS2 3U> TRIP
STALL_I BLOCK START U1U2<>_1 Start
BS1 f1 BS2 3U>> STALL *) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
ND GROUP TRIP
BS I2> BS2 3U< RESTAR
BS I2>> RESET CBFP if Open is selected by any multiplexers for
BS2 3U<< T
BS2 f1 U1U2<>_1 3I() FUSEF BSOUT PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
Is2t, n< START BS 3Ithdev>
BS 3I< Is2t n< START
BS 3I() BLOCK BLOCK START
FUSEF BSOUT
BS U1U2<>_1 GROUP START GROUP TRIP
RESET TRIP RESET CBFP
57
A051948
REX 521
4.3.8. Standard configuration H08 (No sensors)
4.3.8.1. Features
• Interlocking
VTs are used to measure phase-to-earth voltages.
58
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
TCS
I 0> 50N/51N
CBCM 0 I
3I2f 68
3I~harm R
U 0> 59N
3U~harm
3U> 59
3I I0 P
3U< 27
CBFP */62
3U U0 3U_B
LO 86
Q f pf
3 49
A051949
protection, overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection and residual overvoltage
protection.
H08/H09.
59
60
inputs
SWGRP
REX 521
O/C
3I> I<->O CB1
E/F
O/V OPEN
Reset 1 O/C OPENENA OOPEN Master Trip Open LOGIC *)
U/V BS1 CBFP HSPO1
E/F CLOSE OCLOSE
PQ 3Inf BS2 START (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
Selector O/V CLOSEENA AOPEN Trip 1
RO/V GROUP TRIP 3I> >1
U/V BINOPEN ACLOSE >1
PQ 3Unf RESET CBFP 3I>>
PQ 3Inf BINCLOSE Lockout
3Ithdev> 3I>>>
Reset 2 RO/V 3I>> 3I> S HSPO1
Io>
REX 521
PQ 3Unf I<->O IND1 Q

3I>> Io>> Lockout reset R Lockout Working
Terminal O/C 3Ithdev> CBFP
BINOPEN 3I>>> Io>>>
BS1 BINCLOSE Io>
connection Group E/F 3U>
BS1 3I> BS2 BSOUT 3I> Io>> 1 Lockout
X4.2.5/6 DI1 O/V I<->O IND2 3U>>
BS1 3I>> GROUP START 3I>> Io>>>
X4.2.6/7 DI2 U/V BS2 3I> BINOPEN 3U<
BS1 3I>>> DOUBLE TRIP 3I>>> 3U>
X4.2.8/9 RO/V BS2 3I>> BINCLOSE 3U<<
DI3 BS1 Io> RESET CBFP Io> 3U>>
X4.2.9/10
Blocking 1 BS2 3I>>> Uo>
DI4 BS1 Io>> Io>> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
BS2 Io> I<->O POS 3U< Uo>>
X4.2.11/12 DI5 BS1 Io>>> 3I>>> Io>>>
BS1 3U> BS2 Io>> BINLOCAL 3U<< Uo>>>
X4.2.13/14 3U>
DI6 BS1 3U>> BS2 Io>>> BINREMOTE Uo> 3Ithdev> PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
X4.2.15/16 BS2 3U> 3U>>
DI7 BS1 3U< BS1 CBFP Uo>>
X4.2.17/18 BS2 3U>> 3U<
DI8 BS1 3U<< BS2 BSOUT 3I Uo>>> PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
X3.1.1/2 BS2 3U< IL1 3U<< Trip 2
DI9 BS1 Uo> GROUP START 3Ithdev>
BS1 Uo>> BS2 3U<< IL2 Uo>
BS2 Uo> DOUBLE TRIP SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
BS1 Uo>>> RESET CBFP
IL3 Uo>>
Blocking 2 BS2 Uo>>
Uo>>> Trip 3
BS2 Uo>>> Io SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
BS 3Ithdev> Io> 3Ithdev>
DREC trig Io
PQ 3Inf trig Uo
BS1 CBFP Alarm LED1
PQ 3Unf trig BS2 START Uo 3I> 3I> Start
GROUP TRIP 3I>> 3I> Trip
RESET CBFP DREC 3I>>> External trip 3I>> Start
IL1
Io> 3I>> Trip
IL2
Io>> Io>> 3I>>> Start
IL3 Trip 4
Io>>> 3I>>> Trip
Io
BS1 CBFP 3U>
Iob
BS2 START 3U>>
Uo 3I>
GROUP TRIP 3U< Trip 5
U1 3I>> Alarm LED2
3U<< Io> Start
RESET CBFP U2 3I>>>
Start 3I> Uo> Io> Trip
U3 Io>
Io>>> Start 3I>> Uo>> Io>> Start
BI1 Io>>
Master trip Start 3I>>> Uo>>> Io>> Trip
Master trip BI2 Io>>>
Start Io> 3Ithdev> Io>>> Start
External trip BS1 CBFP BI3 3U>
Start Io>> Io>>> Trip
External trip BS2 START BI4 3U>>
BI5 Start Io>>> 3Ithdev> Start
Lockout reset GROUP TRIP 3U<
Lockout reset BI6 Start 3U> 3Ithdev> Trip
Remote RESET CBFP 3U<<
BI7 Start 3U>> Uo> 3I>
Close enable 3U> Start Alarm LED3
3I2f> BI8 Start 3U< Uo>> 3I>>
Open Start 3U<< 3U> Trip
I<->O CB1 3I2f /I1f > BI9 Uo>>> 3I>>> 3U>> Start
Protection Relay
BI10 Start Uo>

Close SWGRP 3dI/dt> 3Ithdev> Io> 3U>> Trip
BI11 Start Uo>>
GROUP START Io>> 3U< Start
CBO CBO TCS BS BI12 Start Uo>>> CBFP
Trip1 Io>>> 3U< Trip
CB pos. open 3U> BI13
Trip2 3Ithdev> 3U<< Start
BI14
Trip3 3U<< Trip
CB pos. close BS1 BI15
Close
BS2 BI16 Alarm LED4
GROUP EXT_TRG Uo> Start
START Open
DC1 DC1 RESET Uo> Trip
I<->O IND1 TRIP
DC pos. open Open Uo>> Start
3U
UL1_U12 Uo>> Trip
3U>>
DC2 DC2 3I> Uo>>> Start
UL2_U23
DC pos. close 3I>> Start 1 Uo>>> Trip
BS1 UL3_U31
3I>>> DI1
BS2
ES1 ES1 f Io> DI2
I<->O IND2 GROUP START
ES pos. open RESET TRIP Io>> 3I>
DI1 Alarm LED5
Io>>> 3I>>
3U< 3U> 3I>>> DI2
ES2 ES2 PQE
ES pos. close 3U>> Io> DI3
BS1 DI4
3U< Io>>
BS2 DI5
3U<< Io>>>
Logic input 1 GROUP START CB wear1 DI6
Uo> 3U> Lockout
RESET TRIP OPEN ALARM DI7
Uo>> 3U>>
BINOPEN DI8
Logic input 2 Uo>>> 3U<
Interlock- 3U<< BINCLOSE
3Ithdev> 3U<<
ing MEAS HI ALARM Alarm LED6
Logic input 3 CLOSEENA BS1 Uo>
scheme TCS1 DI2
BS2 TCSSTATE Uo>> Start 2
Interlocking_A I<->O CB1 DI3
& GROUP START BS ALARM Uo>>>
Interlocking_B DI4
RESET TRIP 3Ithdev>
DI5
Interlocking_C MCS 3I DI6
Interlocking_D Uo> ALARM 3I>> BSOUT
DI7
Interlocking_E 3I>>> Interlocking
BS1
BS2 MCS 3U
Lockout Working ALARM I<->0 CB1 open MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
GROUP START
I<->0 CB1 close MEAS HI ALARM
RESET TRIP
PQ 3Inf MCS 3I DI3
DOUBLE 3I>> Alarm 1 DI4
3I2f START Uo>> TRIGG HAR_HIGH TCS1
DOUBLE 3I>>> DI5
RESET CUM_HIGH PQ 3Inf har
BS1 DI6
BS2 PQ 3Inf cum DI7
3I2f START BS1 3I> PQ 3Unf
BS1 3I>> GROUP START CB wear1 I<->0 CB1 open Lockout
TRIGG HAR_HIGH MCS 3U
BS1 3I>>> BS2 3I> RESET TRIP I<->0 CB1 close
RESET CUM_HIGH Alarm LED8
BS1 Io> BS2 3I>> PQ 3Unf har MCS 3I CB wear1
BS1 Io>> BS2 3I>>> Uo>>> PQ 3Unf cum TCS1 TCS1
BS1 Io>>> BS2 Io> 3U_B PQ 3Inf har MCS 3I
BS1 Alarm 2 MCS 3U
BS1 3U> BS2 Io>> UL1_U12 PQ 3Inf cum
BS1 3U>> BS2 DI5
BS2 Io>>> UL2_U23 CB wear1
BS1 3U< GROUP START DI6
BS2 3U> UL3_U31 MCS 3U
BS1 3U<< RESET TRIP DI7
BS2 3U>> PQ 3Unf har DI8
BS1 Uo>
BS2 3U< 3Ithdev> PQ 3Unf cum
BS1 Uo>>
BS1 Uo>>> BS2 3U<< 3
BS2 Uo> J> *) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
3I2f START
BS2 Uo>> Dev 3I2f START
BS2 Uo>>>
CBFP PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
BS 3Ithdev>
BLOCK START
TRIP
RESET CBFP
1MRS751802-MUM
A051950
4.3.9.1. Features
• Interlocking
VTs are used to measure phase-to-earth voltages.
61
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
TCS
I 0> 50N/51N
CBCM 0 I
3I2f 68
3I~harm R
U 0> 59N
3U~harm
3U> 59
3I I0 P
3U< 27
CBFP */62
3U U0 3U_B
LO 86
f</f> 81U/81O Q f pf
0 I 79
E
A051951
protection, overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection, residual overvoltage
protection, underfrequency protection, overfrequency protection and automatic
reclosing.
H08/H09.
62
inputs SWGRP Open LOGIC **)
O/C REX 521
E/F I<->O CB1 Master Trip Ropen HSPO1
3I>
O/V O/C OPEN (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
E/F Trip 1
U/V OPENENA OOPEN 3I> >1 >1
Reset 1 O/V BS1 CBFP 3I>>
RO/V CLOSE OCLOSE
U/V BS2 START Lockout
Selector PQ 3Inf CLOSEENA AOPEN 3I>>> S
GROUP TRIP 3I> HSPO1
PQ 3Unf RO/V BINOPEN ACLOSE Io> Q
RESET CBFP 3I>> Lockout Working
I-->O PQ 3Inf BINCLOSE Io>> Lockout reset R
3I>>>
Reset 2 FREQ PQ 3Unf 3I>> Io>>>
I<->O IND1 3I> Io>
I-->O 3U> 1 Lockout
O/C 3I>> Io>>
Terminal FREQ CBFP
BINOPEN 3U>>
E/F BS1 3I>>> Io>>>
connection BINCLOSE 3U<
Group O/V BS2 BSOUT Io> 3U>
BS1 3I> I<->O IND2 3U<<
X4.2.5/6 DI1 U/V GROUP START Io>> 3U>>
BS1 3I>> BS2 3I> Uo> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
X4.2.6/7 DI2 RO/V DOUBLE TRIP BINOPEN Io>>> 3U<
BS1 3I>>> BINCLOSE
Uo>>
X4.2.8/9 DI3 FREQ BS2 3I>> RESET CBFP 3U> 3U<<
Blocking 1 BS1 Io> Uo>>> PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
X4.2.9/10 DI4 BS2 3I>>> 3U>> Uo>
1MRS751802-MUM
BS1 Io>> I<->O POS f1 Trip1

X4.2.11/12 DI5 BS2 Io> 3I>>> 3U< Uo>>
X4.2.13/14 BS1 Io>>> BINLOCAL f1 Trip2 PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
DI6 BS2 Io>> 3U<< Uo>>>
X4.2.15/16 BINREMOTE f2 Trip1
DI7 BS1 3U> BS2 Io>>> Uo> f1 Trip1
X4.2.17/18 BS1 CBFP f2 Trip2 SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
DI8 BS1 3U>> BS2 3U> 3I Uo>> f1 Trip2
X3.1.1/2 BS2 BSOUT IL1
DI9 BS1 3U< BS2 3U>> GROUP START Uo>>> f2 Trip1 Trip 2
BS1 3U<< BS2 3U< IL2 f1 Trip1 f2 Trip2 SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
DOUBLE TRIP
BS1 Uo> BS2 3U<< RESET CBFP
IL3 f1 Trip2 Trip 3
BS1 Uo>> BS2 Uo> f2 Trip1
Io
BS1 Uo>>> BS2 Uo>> Io> Io f2 Trip2 Alarm LED1
3I> Start
BS1 f1 BS2 Uo>>> 3I> Trip
BS1 f2 BS2 f1 BS1 CBFP Uo
Blocking 2 3I> External trip 3I>> Start
BS2 f2 BS2 START Uo 3I>> Trip
DREC trig 3I>>
GROUP TRIP 3I>>> Start
DREC 3I>>> Trip 4
RESET CBFP IL1 3I>>> Trip
PQ 3Inf trig Io>
IL2 Io>>
PQ 3Unf trig Io>> 3I>
IL3 Io>>>
Io 3I>> Trip 5 Alarm LED2
O-->I 3U> Io> Start
BS1 CBFP Iob 3I>>>
3U>> Io> Trip
O-->I Ext. start AR1 BS2 START Uo Io>
GROUP
3U< Io>> Start
O-->I Ext. trip AR2 TRIP U1 Io>>
RESET CBFP 3U<< Io>> Trip
U2 Io>>>
AR3 *)
U3 Start 3I> Uo> Io>>> Start
AR4 Uo>> 3U>
Io>>> BI1 Start 3I>> Io>>> Trip
Master trip Uo>>> 3U>>
Master trip BI2 Start 3I>>>
f1 Trip1 3U<
BS1 CBFP BI3 Start Io>
External trip f1 Trip2 3U<<
External trip BS2 START BI4 Start Io>>
Start Io>>> f2 Trip1 Uo> 3U> Start Alarm LED3
Lockout reset GROUP TRIP BI5
Lockout reset Start 3U> f2 Trip2 Uo>> 3U> Trip
Remote RESET CBFP BI6
Start 3U>> Uo>>> 3U>> Start
BI7
Close enable Start 3U< f1 Trip1 3U>> Trip
3I2f> BI8 3I>
Open BI9 Start 3U<< f1 Trip2 3U< Start
I<->O CB1 3I2f /I1f >
f2 Trip1 3I>> 3U< Trip
BI10 Start Uo>
Close SWGRP 3dI/dt> f2 Trip2 3I>>> 3U<< Start
BI11 Start Uo>>
GROUP START Io> 3U<< Trip
CBO CBO TCS BS BI12 Start Uo>>> CBFP
f1 Start1/2 Io>>
CB pos. open 3U> BI13
f2 Start1/2 Io>>> Uo> Start Alarm LED4
BI14
Trip1 RCLOSE Uo> Trip
CB pos. close BS1 BI15 Close
Protection Relay
BS2 BI16 1 Uo>> Start

CLOSE
GROUP START EXT_TRG Open Uo>> Trip
DC1 DC1 I<->O IND1 RESET TRIP Uo>>> Start
DC pos. open Open
3U Uo>>> Trip
3U>> UL1_U12 3I> f1 Start1/2
DC2 DC2 UL2_U23 DI2
3I>>
DC pos. close BS1 UL3_U31 3I>>> Alarm LED5
BS2 Io> DI1
ES1 ES1 GROUP START f Start 1 DI2
I<->O IND2 Io>>
ES pos. open RESET TRIP DI3
Io>>>
DI4
3U> 3I>
ES2 ES2 3U< PQE DI5
3U>> 3I>> DI6
ES pos. close BS1 3U< Lockout
3I>>> f1 Trip1/2
BS2 3U<< Io> DI8
Logic input 1 GROUP START CB wear1 Uo> Io>>
RESET TRIP OPEN ALARM Uo>> Io>>> Alarm LED6
MEAS HI ALARM
BINOPEN Uo>>>
Logic input 2 3U> Start 2 DI2
Interlocking 3U<< BINCLOSE f1 Start1 3U>> f2 Start1/2
scheme CLOSEENA f1 Start2 3U< DI4
Logic input 3 BS1 TCS1
f2 Start1 3U<< DI5

I<->O CB1 BS2 TCSSTATE
Interlocking_A f2 Start2 Uo> DI6
& GROUP START BS ALARM
Interlocking_B Uo>> DI7
RESET TRIP
Interlocking_C Uo>>> Interlocking
MCS 3I
Interlocking_D Uo> ALARM f1 Start1 Alarm LED7
MEAS LO ALARM
Interlocking_E f1 Start2
BS1 MEAS HI ALARM
MCS 3U f2 Start1
BS2 f2 Trip1/2
Lockout Working ALARM f2 Start2 DI4
GROUP START
TRIP 3I>> BSOUT DI5
RESET
PQ 3Inf 3I>>> DI6
DOUBLE 3I>> TRIGG HAR_HIGH DI7
3I2f START Uo>>
DOUBLE 3I>>> I<->0 CB1 open
RESET CUM_HIGH Lockout
BS1 I<->0 CB1 close
BS1 3I> BS2 MCS 3I CB wear1 Alarm LED8
3I2f START PQ 3Unf
BS1 3I>> GROUP START TRIGG HAR_HIGH TCS1 TCS1
TRIP Alarm 1 MCS 3I
BS1 3I>>> RESET RESET CUM_HIGH PQ 3Inf har
BS1 Io> PQ 3Inf cum MCS 3U
Uo>>> O->I OPEN
BS1 Io>> CB wear1
3U_B I<->0 CB1 open O->I ACTIVE
BS1 Io>>> BS1 MCS 3U O->I ALARM1
BS2 3I> UL1_U12 I<->0 CB1 close
BS1 3U> BS2 PQ 3Unf har O->I ALARM2
BS2 3I>> UL2_U23 MCS 3I
BS1 3U>> GROUP START PQ 3Unf cum
BS2 3I>>> UL3_U31 TCS1
BS1 3U< RESET TRIP
BS2 Io> PQ 3Inf har
BS1 3U<< Alarm 2
BS2 Io>> f1 O-->I PQ 3Inf cum
BS1 Uo>
BS2 Io>>> f< AR1 ROPEN CB wear1
BS1 Uo>>
BS2 3U> f> AR2 RCLOSE MCS 3U
BS1 Uo>>> SHOT1
BS2 3U>> AR3 DEFTRIP PQ 3Unf har
BS1 f1 AR4 LOCKOUT
SHOT2
BS2 3U< df/dt< PQ 3Unf cum
BS1 f2 ARINH SHOT3
BS2 3U<< df/dt> O-->I Active
CBOPEN SHOT4
BS2 Uo> CBCLOSE SHOT5
3I2f START
BS2 Uo>> BS1 START1 ON TRDUE
BS2 Uo>>> BS2 TRIP1 RESET AR1TRIP TDDUE
BS2 f1 GROUP START2 AR2TRIP ACTIVE
BS2 f2 RESET TRIP2 AR3TRIP O-->I Alarm 1
AR4TRIP
f2
f< CBFAIL
*) NOTE! The trip and start signals from the protection function blocks **) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
f> DEFTRIP AR1TRIP
are routed directly to the auto-recloser (O->I) via the input switchgroups LOCKOUT if Open is selected by any multiplexers for
AR2TRIP
of the auto-recloser and are not shown in the diagram. SHOT_ALARM AR3TRIP
PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
df/dt<
df/dt> AR4TRIP
CBFAIL O-->I Alarm 2
BS1 START1 DEFTRIP
BS2 TRIP1 LOCKOUT
GROUP START2 SHOT_ALARM
RESET TRIP2
3I2f START
63
A051952
REX 521
4.3.10.1. Features
• Residual overvoltage protection with two stages
• Phase-sequence voltage protection
• Interlocking
64
3I> 50/51 MCS 000
I0> 50N/51N TCS
CBCM 0 I
3I2f 68
3I~harm R
U0> 59N
3U~harm
3U> 59
3U< 27 3I I P
0
CBFP */62
3U U Q
0
LO 86
3I> 67 f pf E
U1<
U2> 27,47,59
U1>
I0 > 67N
f</f> 81U/81O
O I 79
A060006
systems by using one circuit breaker for selective non-directional short-circuit
protection, directional and non-directional time-overcurrent protection, directional
and/or non-directional earth-fault protection, overvoltage protection, undervoltage
protection, residual overvoltage protection, underfrequency protection,
overfrequency protection and automatic reclosing.
H05/H50.
65
Digital inputs Input signals Input SWGRPs Function blocks Ouput SWGRPs Output signals
Output relays
66
REX 521 3I>
3I>>
3I> I<->O CB1 3I>>> Ropen
SWGRP 3I>
OPEN Io>
O/C OPENA 3I>>
CBFP Io>> Master Trip Open LOGIC***)
E/F BS1 CLOSE OPEN 3I>>> HSPO1
BS2 Io>-->
O/V START CLOSENA OCLOSE Io> Trip 1 (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
O/C GROUP TRIP BINOPEN AOPEN 3I> Io>>-->
U/V E/F RESET 3I>> Io>> >1
Reset 1 CBFP BINCLOSE ACLOSE 3I>--> >1
PQ 3Inf O/V 3I>>> Io>-->
Selector 3I>>-->
RO/V U/V 3I>> I<->O IND1 Io> Io>>--> Lockout
3U> S
PQ 3Unf PQ 3Inf BINOPEN Io>> 3I>--> HSPO1
3U>> Q
O-->I RO/V BINCLOSE Io>--> 3I>>-->
CBFP 3U< Lockout reset R Lockout Working
REX 521
FREQ BS1 3U>

PQ 3Unf BS2 Io>>--> 3U<<
U1U2<>_1 BSOUT I<->O IND2
Reset 2 O-->I GROUP START 3I>--> 3U>> Uo>
FREQ DOUBLE TRIP BINOPEN 3I>>--> 3U< 1 Lockout
BINCLOSE Uo>>
O/C U1U2<>_1 RESET CBFP 3U> 3U<< U1U2<>_1
E/F I<->O POS 3U>> Uo> f prot.
Group O/V 3I>>> Uo>>
BINLOCAL 3U< f1 Trip1
X4.2.5/6 DI1 U/V BS1 3I>
BINREMOTE 3U<< U1U2<>_1 f1 Trip2
X4.2.6/7 DI2 RO/V BS1 3I>> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
BS1 CBFP Uo> f prot. f2 Trip1
X4.2.8/9 FREQ BS1 3I>>> BS2 3I> 3I
DI3 BS2 BSOUT Uo>> f1 Trip1 f2 Trip2
X4.2.9/10 U1U2<>_1 BS1 3I>--> BS2 3I>> PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
DI4 GROUP START IL1 U1U2<>_1 f1 Trip2 Trip 2
BS1 3I>>--> BS2 3I>>> DOUBLE TRIP IL2
X4.2.11/12 DI5 Blocking 1 f prot. f2 Trip1
BS1 Io>--> BS2 3I>--> RESET CBFP IL3 PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
X4.2.13/14 f1 Trip1 f2 Trip2
DI6 BS1 Io>>--> BS2 3I>>-->
X4.2.15/16 Io> Io f1 Trip2 Trip 3
DI7 BS1 Io> BS2 Io>-->
X4.2.17/18 f2 Trip1 SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
DI8 BS1 Io>> BS2 Io>>--> Io
X3.1.1/2 f2 Trip2
BS1 3U> BS2 Io> CBFP
DI9 BS1 Uo
BS1 3U>> BS2 Io>>
External trip SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
BS2 START
BS1 3U< GROUP Uo
BS2 3U> TRIP 3I> Trip 4
BS1 3U<< BS2 3U>> RESET CBFP DREC 3I>>
BS1 Uo> BS2 3U< IL1
BS1 Uo>> Io>> 3I>>>
BS2 3U<< IL2 3I> Trip 5
BS1 f1 Io>
BS2 Uo> IL3 Io>> 3I>> Alarm LED1
BS1 f2 3I> Start
BS2 Uo>> BS1 CBFP Io 3I>>>
BS U1U2<>_1 Io>--> 3I> Trip
BS2 f1 BS2 START Iob Io>>--> Io> 3I>> Start
Blocking 2 BS2 f2 GROUP TRIP Uo Io>>
RESET 3I>--> 3I>> Trip
CBFP Io>-->
DREC trig U12 3I>>--> 3I>>> Start
3I2f > U23 3U> Io>>--> 3I>>> Trip
PQ 3Inf trig 3I>-->
3I 2 f /I1 f > U31 3U>>
PQ 3Unf trig 3 d I / dt > BI1 Start 3I> 3U< 3I>>-->
3U<< 3U>
O- ->I INH GROUP START BI2 Start 3I>>
Uo> 3U>>
BI3 Start 3I>>> Alarm LED2
O- ->I ON 3U> Uo>> 3U< Io> Start
BI4 Start Io>
U1U2<>_1 3U<< Io> Trip
O- ->I Ext. start BI5 Start Io>> Uo> Io>> Start
O - ->I CBO AR1-4 conf f prot.
BS1 BI6 Start Io>-->/Io>>--> Uo>> Io>> Trip
O- ->I Ext. trip f1 Trip1
CBC BS2 START BI7 Start 3I>-->/3I>>--> U1U2<>_1 Io>--> Start
AR1 CB position act. f1 Trip2 3I>
Master trip GROUP TRIP BI8 Start 3U>/3U>> f prot. Io>--> Trip
AR2 Fast final trip RESET f2 Trip1 3I>>
Master trip TRDUE BI9 Start 3U</3U<< f1 Trip1 Io>>--> Start
AR3 *) Standard **) f2 Trip2 3I>>>
External trip AR4 BI10 Start 1/2 f1 f1 Trip2 Io>>--> Trip
External trip 3U>> Io>
BI11 Start 1/2 f2 f2 Trip1 Io>>
Lockout reset BI12 Start Uo> f2 Trip2
Lockout reset Io>-->
Remote BS1 BI13 Start Uo>> CBFP 3U> Start Alarm LED3
Io>>-->
BS2 START BI14 Start U1U2<>_1 3U> Trip
Close enable GROUP 3I>-->
TRIP 3U>> Start
Open RESET BI15 f prot. 3I>>-->
3U>> Trip
I<->O CB1 BI16 Trip1 RCLOSE Close 3U< Start
Close SWGRP 3U< EXT_TRG 3U< Trip
Protection Relay
CLOSE ³1 3U<< Start

CBO CBO TCS B S 3U 3U<< Trip
CB pos. open BS1
BS2 START UL1_U12 Open
CBC GROUP TRIP UL2_U23
CB pos. close RESET UL3_U31 Uo> Start Alarm LED4
Open Uo> Tri p
f 3I>
3U<< Start 1 Uo>> Start
3I>>
DC1 DC1 I<->O IND1 Uo>> Trip
DC pos. open PQE 3I>>>
Io> 3I>--> Start
BS1 CB wear1
BS2 Io>> 3I> Start 2 3I>--> Trip
START
DC2 DC2 GROUP TRIP OPEN ALARM 3I>> 3I>>--> Start
Io>-->
DC pos. close RESET BINOPEN 3I>>> 3I>>--> Trip
BINCLOSE Io>>-->
3I>--> Io>
Uo> Io>>
ES1 ES1 TCS1 3I>>-->
I<->O IND2 Io>--> f1 Start1/2 Alarm LED5
ES pos. open TCSSTATE 3U>
BS ALARM 3U>> Io>>--> f1 Trip1/2
BS1 Lockout
BS2 START 3U< 3I>--> f2 Start1/2
ES2 ES2 GROUP TRIP MCS3I 3I>>--> f2 Trip1/2
3U<<
ES pos. close RESET 3U> f prot.
ALARM Uo>
CLOSEENA 3U>> U1U2<>_1 Trip
Uo>> Uo>>
MCS3U U1U2<>_1 3U<
Logic input 1 I<->O CB1
Interlocking_A 3U<<
& ALARM f1 Start1 U1U2<>_1 Start

Uo> Alarm LED6
Interlocking_B BS1 f1 Start2 MEAS HI ALARM
Logic input 2 BS2 PQ3Inf Uo>>
Interlocking_C START f2 Start1 D1
GROUP TRIP TRIGG HAR_HIGH f2 Start2 U1U2<>_1
Interlocking_D RESET D2
RESET CUM_HIGH f1 Start1
Logic input 3 Interlocking_E D3
f1 f1 Start2 D4
PQ3Unf
f< f2 Start1 D5
Lockout Working f> TRIGG HAR_HIGH f2 Start2 BSOUT
RESET CUM_HIGH 3I>> Interlocking
BACTRL Io>-> 3I>>>
df/dt< O-->I
Io>>-> df/dt> 3I>>-->
Alarm 1 MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
AR1 ROPEN I<->O CB1 open
MEAS HI ALARM
AR2 RCLOSE I<->O CB1 close
BS1 START1 AR3 DEFTRIP DI4
f prot. delay MCS 3I
BS2 TRIP1 AR4 LOCKOUT DI5
f1 Start2 f1 Trip1 f prot GROUP START2 ARINH TCS1 I<->O CB1 open Alarm 2
& DI6
No delay RESET TRIP2 CBOPEN PQ 3Inf har I<->O CB1 close DI7
>1 50 ms CBCLOSE PQ 3Inf cum MCS 3I
f2 ON DI8
f2 Start2 100 ms CB wear1 TCS1
DOUBLE 3I>> f< RESET Lockout
150 ms f> MCS 3U PQ 3Inf har
DOUBLE 3I>>> SHOT1
200 ms 3I2f START PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Inf cum
DOUBLE 3I>--> 3I>--> SHOT2
250 ms df/dt< PQ 3Unf cum CB wear1 CB wear1 Alarm LED8
DOUBLE 3I>>--> SHOT3
300 ms df/dt> MCS 3U TCS1
SHOT4
350 ms PQ 3Unf har MCS 3I
BS1 3I> SHOT5 MCS 3U
400 ms 3I2f START PQ 3Unf cum
BS1 3I>> BS1 START1 CBFP TRDUE O-->I OPEN
500 ms BS2 3I> BS2 TRIP1 O-->I Active
BS1 3I>>> BACTRL START TDDUE O-->I ACTIVE
600 ms BS2 3I>> GROUP START2
BS1 3I>--> RESET TRIP2 BS1 TRIP ACTIVE O-->I ALAR1
700 ms BS2 3I>>> BS2 CBFP
BS1 3I>>--> O-->I Alarm1 O-->I ALAR2
800 ms BS2 3I>--> GROUP
BS1 Io>--> Io>--> AR1TRIP
900 ms BS2 3I>>--> RESET
BS1 Io>>--> AR2TRIP
1000 ms BS2 Io>-->
BS1 Io> 3I>>--> AR3TRIP O-->I Alarm2
1500 ms BS2 Io>>--> AR1TRIP
BS1 Io>> AR4TRIP
BS2 Io> AR2TRIP
BS1 3U> CBFP CBFAIL
BS2 Io>> AR3TRIP
U1U2<>_1 BS1 3I> BS1 3U>> DEFTRIP
BS2 3U> BACTRL START AR4TRIP
BS1 3I>> BS1 3U< BS1 TRIP CBFP LOCKOUT
BS1 3I>>> BS2 3U>> CBFAIL
>1 3I2f STA RT BS1 3U<< BS2 CBFP BACTRL BSOUT SHOT_ALARM
BS1 3I>- - > BS2 3U< GROUP DEFTRIP
3U< Start2 BS1 Uo> BS1 START
BS1 3I>>- -> BS2 3U<< LOCKOUT
BS1 Uo>> BS2 TRIP
BS2 Uo> Io>>--> GROUP CBFP SHOT_ALARM *) The trip and start signals from the protection function blocks are
BS1 f1
BS1 f2 BS2 Uo>> DOUBLE routed directly to the AR1-4 conf selector via the input switchgroups
BS2 3I> BS2 f1 RESET of the auto-recloser and are not shown in the diagram.
BS2 3I>> BS U1U2<>_1 U1U2<>_1
BS2 3I>>> BS2 f2
U1U2<>_1
BS2 3I>- - > CBFP 3U< Start **) The starting of auto reclose sequence is:
BS2 3I>>- -> BACTRL START - Standard - Trip and Start signals start auto-recloser.
BS1 TRIP BLOCK - Fast final trip - After first close AR5func goes to final Trip.
BS2 CBFP GROUP START
TRDUE - CB Position act. - The binary input from CB starts auto recloser sequence.
GROUP RESET TRIP
RESET
3I2f START ***) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1 if Open is selected
by any multiplexers for PO1, PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
f1 Trip1
f2 Start2
f1 Start2
1MRS751802-MUM
A060007
4.3.11.1. Features
• Three-phase directional overcurrent protection with one stage
• Three-phase overvoltage protection with one stage
• Three-phase undervoltage protection with one stage
• Negative phase-sequence (NPS) protection with one stage
• Three-phase motor start-up supervision
• Residual overvoltage protection with one stage
• Phase-sequence voltage protection
• Fuse-failure protection
• Three-phase non-directional undercurrent protection with one stage
• Three-phase voltage measurements
• Delayed trip output for the circuit breaker failure protection (CBFP) function
• Operation time counter
• Interlocking
67
3I> 50/51 MCS 000
I0 > 67N TCS
CBCM 0 I
I0> 50N/51N
3I~harm R
3U> 59
3U~harm
3U< 27
f</f> 81U/81O 3I I P
0
Is2t,n< 48,14,66
3U U Q
0
3I
3I 46R
I2> 46 f pf E
U0> 59N
F
60
3 49
U1<
U2> 27,47,59
U1>
CBFP */62
LO 86
3I> 67
A060005
The H51 standard configuration for REX 521 is designed for protection of large or
medium-size three-phase AC motors in circuit breaker controlled motor drives. Due
to the large number of protective functions integrated, the relay provides a complete
protection against motor damage caused by electrical faults.
The H51 configuration can be applied to other objects that need thermal overload
protection (such as power transformers). It can also be used in applications requiring
overcurrent protection, directional overcurrent protection, under/overvoltage
protection, directional or non-directional earth-fault protection, underfrequency
protection and/or overfrequency protection.
For more information about the H51 standard configuration, refer to the application
example in Section 12.7. Motor protection, High H07/H51.
68
Digital inputs Input signals Input SWGRPs Funtion blocks Ouput SWGRPs Output signals Output relays
SWGRP 3I>
REX 521
O/C 3I>> Master Trip
3I> I<->O CB1 O p en LOGIC *)
DE/F OPEN 3I>>> HSPO1
3Ithdev> O/C OPENENA OOPEN Io> (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
PQ 3Inf DE/F BS1 CBFP 3I> Io>> Trip 1
BS2 CLOSE OCLOSE >1 >1
PQ 3Unf 3Ithdev> START 3I>> Io>-->
Reset 1 CLOSEENA AOPEN
E/F PQ 3Inf GROUP TRIP 3I>>> Io>>--> Lockout
RESET BINOPEN ACLOSE S
Vo PQ 3Unf CBFP 3I> Io> 3I>>-->
BINCLOSE Q HSPO1
FREQ E/F 3I>> Io>> 3U<
3I>> Lockout reset R Lockout Working
Curr Vo I<->O IND1 3I>>> Io>--> 3U>
Motstart FREQ BINOPEN Io> Io>>--> Uo>
Curr BS1 CBFP BINCLOSE Io>> 3I>>--> Is2t n< 1 Lockout
Reset 2 Motstart BS2 3U< 3I()
BSOUT I<->O IND2 Io>-->
GROUP START Io>>--> 3U> I2>
O/C BINOPEN
Group DOUBLE TRIP 3I>>--> Uo> 3Ithdev>
BINCLOSE
E/F RESET CBFP 3U< Is2t n< U1U2<>_1
X4.2.5/6 DI1 BS1 3I> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
Volt I<->O IND3 3U> 3I() f prot.
X4.2.6/7 DI2 Freq BS1 3I>> BINOPEN
3I>>> Uo> I2> f1 Trip1
X4.2.8/9 DI3 BS1 3I>>> BINCLOSE PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
Is2t n< 3Ithdev> f1 Trip2
1MRS751802-MUM
X4.2.9/10 DI4 BS1 3I>>-> BS2 3I> I<->O POS 3I() U1U2<>_1 f2 Trip1
X4.2.11/12 BS1 Io>--> BS2 3I>> BS1 CBFP
DI5 BINLOCAL I2> f prot. f2 Trip2 PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
X4.2.13/14 BS1 Io>>--> BS2 3I>>> BS2 BSOUT
DI6 BINREMOTE 3Ithdev> f1 Trip1 Trip 2
X4.2.15/16 BS1 Io> BS2 3I>>-> GROUP START
DI7 Blocking 1 U1U2<>_1 f1 Trip2 SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
X4.2.17/18 BS1 Io>> BS2 Io>--> DOUBLE TRIP 3I
DI8 f prot. f2 Trip1
X3.1.1/2 BS1 3U> BS2 Io>>--> RESET CBFP IL1
DI9 IL2 f1 Trip1 f2 Trip2
BS1 3U< BS2 Io> Trip 3 SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
Io> IL3 f1 Trip2
BS1 Uo> BS2 Io>> f2 Trip1
BS1 f1 BS2 3U> Io
Io f2 Trip2
BS1 f2 BS2 3U<
BS I2> BS2 Uo> CBFP Uo
BS2 f1 BACTR Uo Trip 4
3I>
Blocking 2 BS2 f2 LBS1 START AI1 3I>>
BS 3I() BS2 TRIP LOW ALARM 3I>>>
BS 3Ithdev> GROUP CBFP HIGH ALARM 3I> Trip 5
Io> Alarm LED1
BS U1U2<>_1 3I>> 3I> Start
DREC Io>>
DREC trig Io>> IL1 3I>>> 3I> Trip
Io>-->
IL2 Io> 3I>> Start
PQ 3Inf trig Io>>-->
IL3 Io>> 3I>> Trip
3I>>-->
PQ 3Unf trig CBFP Io Io>--> 3I>>> Start
3U<
Iob Io>>--> 3I>>> Trip
BACTRL START 3U>
Uo Uo> 3I>>-->
BS1 TRIP 3U<
U12 Is2t n< External trip
BS2 CBFP 3U>
U23 3I()
BACTRL Io>--> GROUP Uo> Alarm LED2
U31 I2> Io>-> Start
Io>>--> RESET BI1 Start 3I> 3Ithdev> Is2t n< Io>-> Trip
Master trip BI2 Start 3I>> U1U2<>_1 3I()
Io> Io>>-> Start
Master trip BI3 Start 3I>>> I2> 3I>
External trip f prot. Io>>-> Trip
External trip BI4 Start Io>--> f1 Trip1 3Ithdev> 3I>> Io> Start
Lockout reset BI5 Start Io>>--> f1 Trip2 U1U2<>_1 3I>>>
Lockout reset BS1 CBFP Io> Trip
BI6 Start Io>/Io>> f2 Trip1 f prot. Io>-->
Remote BS2 START Io>> Start
BI7 Start 3U</3U> f2 Trip2 f1 Trip1 Io>>-->
GROUP TRIP Io>> Trip
Close enable BI8 Start 3Ithdev> f1 Trip2 3Ithdev>
RESET CBFP
Open BI9 Start I2> f2 Trip1 Io> Alarm LED3
I<->O CB1 f2 Trip2 3U> Start
BI10 Start Is2t, n< Io>>
Io>> Start 1/2 f1 CBFP 3U> Trip
Close SWGRP BI11 I2>
Start 1/2 f2 3U< Start
BI12 3I>>-->
CBO CBO TCS BS BS1 CBFP Start 3I>>--> 3U< Trip
BI13
CB pos. open BS2 Start Uo> 3I>>--> Start
START BI14 Close
GROUP TRIP f prot. 3I>>--> Trip
BI15
Protection Relay
CB pos. close DC1 Trip1 Uo> Start

I<->O IND1 RESET CBFP BI16
Open Uo> Trip
EXT_TRG
DC1 3U> 3U I2> Start Alarm LED4
DC2 UL1_U12 Open 3Ithdev> Start
DC pos. open
BS1 UL2_U23 Ist2, n< Start
DC2 BS2 UL3_U31 Start 1 3() Start
ES1 I<->O IND2 GROUP START 3I> FUSEF
DC pos. close
RESET TRIP f 3I>> f1 Start1/2
3I>>> f2 Start1/2
ES1 3U< 3I> Io>
ES pos. open ES2 PQE 3I>>
BS1 Io>>
3I>>> Io>-->
BS2 Io> I2> Trip Alarm LED5
ES2 Motor status Stop I<->O IND3 CB wear1 Io>>--> 3Ithdev> Trip
ES pos. close GROUP START Io>>
OPEN ALARM 3I>>--> Is2t n< Trip
RESET TRIP Io>-->
BINOPEN 3U< 3I() Trip
Io>>--> 3U>
Logic input 1 Runs 3Ithdev> BINCLOSE U1U2<>_1 Trip
3I>>--> Uo>
3 f1 Trip1 3U< f2 Start1/2
TCS1 Is2t n<
3U> f2 Trip1/2
Logic input 2 J> TCSSTATE 3I()
ALARM f1 Start2 Uo>
Dev BS I2>
CLOSEENA CBFP Is2t n< 3Ithdev>
Logic input 3
TIME1 f2 Start2 3I()

BLOCK START ALARM U1U2<>_1 U1U2< >_1 Start Alarm LED6
Interlocking_A I<->O CB1 I2>
& TRIP f1 Start1 Restart Disabled
Interlocking_B MCS 3I 3Ithdev> f1 Start2
RESET CBFP MEAS HI ALARM
U1U2<>_1 f2 Start1
Interlocking_C EN_RESTART ALARM DI1
f1 Start1 f2 Start2
Interlocking_D DI2
MCS 3U f1 Start2
Interlocking_E f1 DI3
f2 Start1 Start 2
BS1 3I> f< ALARM DI4
BS1 3I>> f2 Start2
Lockout Working BS1 3I>>> f> Interlocking
PQ 3Inf
BS1 3I>>- ->
TRIGG HAR_HIGH Lockout
Restart enable df/dt< MEAS LO ALARM Alarm LED7
RESET CUM_HIGH
df/dt> BSOUT MEAS HI ALARM
3I>>
BS2 3I> f prot.
U1U2<>_1 Start PQ 3Unf 3I>>>
BS2 3I>> DI5
>1 BS2 3I>>> BS1 START1 TRIGG HAR_HIGH 3I>>-->
BS2 3I>>- -> RESET CUM_HIGH DI6
3U< Start2 BS2 TRIP1 DI7
Alarm 1
GROUP START2 I<->0 CB1 open DI8
RESET TRIP2 FUSEF
MCB State I<->0 CB1 close Lockout
MCB BSOUT
MCS 3I
Restart inhibit Is2t n< I<->0 CB1 open Alarm 2
I2> TCS1 CB wear 1 Alarm LED8
GROUP START PQ 3Inf har I<->0 CB1 close TCS1
STALL (speed switch) MCS 3I
STALL_I TRIP BLOCK START PQ 3Inf cum MCS 3I
ND STALL GROUP TRIP CB wear 1 TCS1 MCS 3U
RESTART RESET CBFP MCS 3U PQ 3Inf har TIME1
f prot. delay BLOCK_OU PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Inf cum Motor Runs
f prot U1U2<>_1 PQ 3Unf cum CB wear 1 DI7
f1 Start2 f1 Trip1
No delay & f2 TIME1 MCS 3U DI8
50 ms f< PQ 3Unf har
>1 f> FUSEF
100 ms BLOCK PQ 3Unf cum
f2 Start2 GROUP START
150 ms TIME1
DOUBLE 3I>> RESET TRIP df/dt<
200 ms DOUBLE 3I>>> df/dt> FUSEF
Is2t, n< START
250 ms
DOUBLE 3I>>--> 3I()
300 ms START1
BS1 FUSEF BSOUT
350 ms BS1 3I> BS2 TRIP1
400 ms BS1 3I>> GROUP START2
Is2t, n< START BLOCK START RESET TRIP2 Is2t n< START 3Ithdev>
500 ms BS1 3I>>>
BS1 3I>>-> GROUP TRIP I2> Block
600 ms BS2 3I> 3I>> ->
RESET CBFP Restart Inhibit
700 ms FUSEF BSOUT BS1 Io>--> BS2 3I>>
800 ms BS1 Io>>--> Is2t n< Restart enable
BS2 3I>>> Uo> U1U2<>_1 Start
900 ms BS1 Io> BS2 3I>>->
1000 ms BS1 Io>> CBFP *) This logic disables the Open signal to HSPO1
BS2 Io>--> if Open is selected by any multiplexers for PO1,
1500 ms BS1 3U> BS1 START BACTRL BSOUT
BS2 Io>>--> BS2 TRIP BS1 START U1U2<>_1 Start PO2, PO3, SO1, SO2.
BS1 3U< BS2 Io> GROUP BS2 TRIP
BS1 Uo> RESET GROUP CBFP
BS2 Io>> DOUBLE 3U< Start
BS1 f1 BS2 3U> RESET
BS1 f2 BS2 3U<
BS I2> BS2 Uo>
BS2 f1
Is2t, n< START BS2 f2
BS2 3I()
BS 3Ithdev>
FUSEF BSOUT BS U1U2<>_1
69
A060008
REX 521
70
5. Reading of the overview diagrams of the signal

routings
The signals in a standard configuration can be programmed to perform various
functions. Digital inputs can be connected to the different input signals (for example
Blocking 1) by using selectors. Input signals can be routed to output relays (for
example HSPO1) directly or they can be connected via the input switchgroups to
inputs of the function block in order to perform different kinds of functions. This is
done by setting the value of the input switchgroups.
Output signals of the function blocks can be connected to the output relays by first
selecting the needed output signals from the function blocks, for example, Trip 1
(3I>, 3I>> and so on) by the output switchgroups and then connecting the selected
group of signals to the dedicated output relays by setting the Output signal
selector.
Analogue signals are connected to the corresponding protection and measurement
function blocks. Analogue signals are not presented in the overview diagrams of the
signal routings.
Selectors
Digital PREDELAY Input Output
inputs Signals relays
HSPO 1
Master trip
DI1 External trip

PO1
.
Reset 1 Selectors PO2
.
INVERSION Reset 2 .
. Input Function Output
Group
Output .
DI9
Blocking 1 SWGRP block SWGRP signals etc.
.
. Blocking 1 3I> Trip 1 Trip 1
HSPO1
etc.
BS1 3I> 3I> Trip 2
BS1 3I>> CBFP 3I>> PO1
BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I>>> PO2
BS1 Io>->
BS2 START Io>--> PO3
GROUP TRIP Io>>--> .
BS1 Io>>-> RESET CBFP Io>>>-->
BS1 Io>>>>-> .
Iub> .
BS1 Iub 3I>> 3Ith>
etc.
Blocking 2 Trip 2
CBFP
etc. etc. etc.
A051953
Fig. 5.-1 Main principle of the overview diagrams of the signal routings
5.1. Digital inputs

Digital inputs (DI1...DI9) can be connected to the inputs of the function block in
order to obtain different functionalities. For example, digital inputs are used for
performing blocking of protection, external triggering of disturbance recorder and
local control.
Any of the digital inputs (DI1...DI9) can be programmed from menu selection to
invert the signal and to set the predelay (filtering). For more information, refer to
section “Digital inputs” in Technical Reference Manual, General
(see Section 1.3. Related documents).
71
The routings between the digital inputs and different functionalities are set with
selectors and switchgroups (SWGRP) for each functionality respectively. Settings
are done with the Human-Machine Interface (HMI) or with the Relay Setting Tool.
Input selectors Switchgroups Function blocks

SWGRP
I>
DI1 Selector I>>
I>>>
SWGRP
Reset OC
Reset EF Io>
Selector Io>>
Io>>>
Reset Iub
SWGRP
Selector Iub
etc.
DI2 Selector Master trip
Selector Lockout reset
Selector Open
etc.
A051954
Fig. 5.1.-1 Digital input signals are routed via selectors and switchgroups to the
function blocks (DI1 in the figure) or to the different functions (DI2 in
the figure)
5.1.1. Input selectors

Each digital input (DI1...DI9) can be routed to a specified input signal by the settings
in the input signal menu (Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals).
Only one digital input per input signal can be selected. Refer to Chapter 6.
Parametrization of the digital inputs.
72
Selector DI1
.
. Selector Reset 1
.
DI9
Reset 2
Selector
Blocking 1
Selector
Selector Blocking 2
etc.
A051955
Fig. 5.1.1.-1 Use of input selectors
5.1.2. Input switchgroups (SWGRP)

Switchgroups are used for connecting input signals to the inputs of the function
blocks. Switchgroups allow the connection of one input signal to several function
block inputs. Refer to Fig. 5.1.3.-1 for all the signals available for each input
switchgroup. The settings can be found in
Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP.
SWGRP
RESET OC
RESET EF
Reset 1
RESET Iub
etc.
A051956
Fig. 5.1.2.-1 The input signal is routed with the switchgroup to one or several
function block input(s)
Note that the symbol O/C (overcurrent) includes overcurrent function blocks I>, I>>
and I>>>. The E/F (earth fault) symbol includes all three earth-fault function blocks
Io>, Io>> and Io>>>, for example the Reset 1 signal resets all the three stages.
The symbols O/C and E/F are used in the overview diagrams of the signal routings
and in the HMI menus.
73
5.1.3. Input signals

The figure below shows a part of the overview diagram focusing on input signals.
Input signals
SWGRP
Selector Reset 1 O/C
E/F
Iub> O/C
3Ith> E/F
PQ 3Inf Iub>
Reset 2 3Ith>
PQ 3Inf
O/C
DI1 Group E/F
DI2 Iub> Input switchgroups
DI3 3Ith>
DI4 Blocking 1
Digital BS1 3I>
inputs DI5 BS2 3I> BS1 3I>>
DI6 BS2 3I>> BS1 3I>>>
DI7 BS2 3I>>> BS1 Io>-->
DI8 Blocking 2 BS2 Io>--> BS1 Io>>-->
DI9 BS2 Io>>--> BS1 Io>>>-->
BS2 Io>>>--> BS1 Iub>
BS2 Iub>
BS 3lth>
DREC trig - Disturbance recorder trigger
PQ 3Inf trig - Power quality trigger
Io>-->
BACTRL Io>>--> Input switchgroup
Io>>>-->
Master trip
Master trip
External trip - Master trip
External trip - External trip
Lockout reset - Lockout reset
Lockout reset
Remote Local/remote selection
Close enable
Open
I<->O CB1
Close
Control operations
to the circuit breaker SWGRP
CB pos. open CBO
CBO TCS BS Trip circuit supervision
CB pos. close
DC pos. open DC1 DC1 I<->O IND1

- The control of the CB
- Object indication DC2 DC2 The object status
- Interlocking DC pos. close
indications for
SCADA systems
ES1 ES1 I<->O IND2
ES pos. open
ES2 ES2
ES pos. close
Logic input 1
Logic input 2
Logic input 3
Interlocking
scheme
Interlocking_A CLOSEENA I<->O CB1

&
Interlocking_B
Interlocking Interlocking_C
options Interlocking_D
Interlocking_E
Lockout working
A051957
Fig. 5.1.3.-1 Description of the input signal routing diagram

Object status indications to SCADA systems
Function blocks 1<->0 IND1 and 1<->0 IND2 are used for generating events from
the disconnector DC pos. open/close and earthswitch ES pos. open/close to the
substation control system via the communication port.
74
5.2. Function blocks in the overview diagrams of the signal routings

All the function blocks used in each standard configuration are presented in the
overview diagrams of the signal routings as follows (see Fig. 5.2.-1).
3I> I<->O CB1

OOPEN
OPEN OCLOSE
BS1
CBFP
OPENENA AOPEN
CLOSE
Control
BS2 START ACLOSE
GROUP TRIP CLOSEENA
BINOPEN
function block
RESET CBFP
BINCLOSE
3I>>
I<->O IND1
BINOPEN
BS1 CBFP BINCLOSE
BS2
GROUP
BSOUT I<->O IND function
START I<->O IND2
DOUBLE
RESET
TRIP
CBFP
BINOPEN blocks for object indication
BINCLOSE
3I>>> I<->O POS
BINLOCAL Remote/local
CBFP BINREMOTE
BS1
BS2 BSOUT
function block
Io
GROUP START
DOUBLE TRIP Io
RESET CBFP
3I
Io>
IL1
IL2
CBFP IL3
BS1
BS2 START
GROUP TRIP IL1 DREC
RESET CBFP
IL2
IL3
Io>>
Io
Protection CBFP
Uo
BI1 Measurement
BS1
function blocks BS2 START
BI2
BI3
GROUP TRIP
RESET CBFP BI4
BI5
Io>>> BI6
BI7
CBFP BI8
BS1 BI9
BS2 START BI10
GROUP TRIP BI11
RESET CBFP BI12
BI13
3I2f> BI14
3I2f/I1f> BI15
3dI/dt> BI16
GROUP START EXT_TRG
Iub> CB wear
OPEN ALARM
3∆I> BINOPEN
BINCLOSE
CBFP
BS1
TCS1
BS2 START
GROUP
RESET
TRIP
CBFP
TCSSTATE Condition
BS ALARM
3Ith> MCS 3I
monitoring
3 ALARM
J>
Cab
CBFP PQ 3Inf
BLOCK (BS)
GROUP START TRIGG HAR_HIGH
RESET TRIP RESET CUM_HIGH
CBFP
CU_ALARM
A051958
Fig. 5.2.-1 Function blocks in the overview diagrams of the signal routings
5.2.1. Function blocks

Each function block in the overview diagram represents the input and outputs used
in a particular standard configuration. It also includes the type of protection function
and the basic information of the time characteristics and other characteristics, for
example CBFP, available in the function. For further information, refer to the CD-
ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions (see Section 1.3. Related documents).
See also Chapter 3. Introduction for differences between the REX 521 and the RED
500 platform in the function block descriptions of the CD-ROM.
75
Time characteristics Protection function name
3I>>>
CBFP
BS1
BS2 BSOUT
Inputs GROUP START Outputs
DOUBLE TRIP
RESET CBFP
CBFP = circuit breaker failure protection

A051959
Fig. 5.2.1.-1 Description of function block symbols

More information concerning function blocks in this manual, refer to Chapter 8.
Function block descriptions.
5.3. Output switchgroups (SWGRP)

The outputs from the function blocks (for example start, trip and alarm signals) are
routed to the output signals by using the output switchgroups, for example Trip 2,
see Fig. 5.3.-1 below.
Io> SWGRP
Trip Selector PO1
Start
I> PO2
Selector
Trip Trip 2
Start
Iub Selector PO3

Trip
Start
Selector SO1
etc.
Selector SO2
SWGRP
Start 1
etc.
A051960
Fig. 5.3.-1 Output switchgroups
5.3.1. Output selectors

Output signals (for example Start 1, Trip 1) are routed to the output relays (for
example PO1, HSPO1, SO1) by using output selectors.
76
5.4. Other functions described in signal overview diagrams
5.4.1. Lockout function

The lockout function is used for increasing the safety when performing control
operations. The lockout function can be reset by using the input selector to connect
one of the digital inputs (DI1...DI9) to the Lockout reset signal.
Note that the trip indication LED cannot be cleared with push buttons [C] or [C] +
[E] until lockout reset occurs.
3I>
3I>> Master Trip HSPO1
3I>>> (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
Io>--> Trip 1
1 1
Io>>-->
Io>>>--> Lockout
Iub> S HSPO1
Q
3Ith> Lockout reset R Lockout Working
1 Lockout
A051961
Fig. 5.4.1.-1 Lockout function in the block diagrams of the standard

configurations
In the figure above (Fig. 5.4.1.-1) the Lockout working signal is connected
internally to the CLOSEENA input of the COCB function block in order to activate
the interlocking. This means that it is not allowed to perform control operations in
case the lockout function is active.
The lockout function can be used in two different ways:
The first option is to use the HSPO1 output to perform the lockout function. The
Lockout HSPO1 selector is used for activating the forced latching. The latched
output relay can only be reset via a digital input. The idea is to have an external
switch which needs to be reset before the CB close operation is allowed. For
example, a motor feeder has tripped and it is necessary to avoid the re-energizing of
the motor before its temperature has cooled down to an acceptable level.
Trip HSPO1
>1
signal (trip relay)
Lockout
S HSPO1
Q
Lockout reset R Lockout Working Connected to COCB
(Close enable)
to prevent
Selector close operation
A051962
Fig. 5.4.1.-2 HSPO1 output performing the lockout function

Another option (see Fig. 5.4.1.-3) is to use the lockout function to connect the CB
close control wiring in series with one of the power output relays by selecting
lockout signal as an option for the desired output relay, for example PO1. This is
done by selecting lockout for the corresponding output signal selector.
77
+
Trip signal S
Q 1 Lockout
Lockout reset R
Lockout
(Normally closed)
Close command
A051963
Fig. 5.4.1.-3 Lockout function via power output relay

Note that when the lockout function is in use and an auxiliary power failure occurs,
the output relays return to off-state. The same happens in a situation where external
lockout is used with the output relays PO1, PO2, PO3, SO11 and SO21 and the
auxiliary power failure occurs. When the protection relay has been powered up
again, the output relay states are restored to the state before the power failure and the
output relay used for the lockout function is energized. If the lockout function is used
with the HSPO1 relay, the control of the breaker could be possible when the
auxiliary power of the protection relay is not connected.
To ensure maximum safety when using the lockout function, it is recommended to
use a battery unit as an auxiliary power. Then the fault in the protected object does
not effect the auxiliary supply of the protection relay and the state of the lockout
function is safely stored in the protection relay’s memory.
1. Change-over contact
78
High speed
tripping contact
HSP01 Open logic
3I> HSPO1
3I>> Master trip Open Logic (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
3I>>>
Io>--> Trip 1
>1 >1
Io>>-->
Io>>>-->
Iub> S Lockout
3Ith> HSPO1
Lockout reset R Q Lockout working
3I> 1 Lockout
3I>>
3I>>>
Io>--> Trip 2
Io>>-->
Io>>>-->
Iub>
3Ith>
Lockout function
3I>
3I>>
3I>>> Trip 3
Io>-->
Io>>-->
Io>>>-->
Iub>
3Ith>
3I>
3I>>
3I>>> Trip 4
Io>-->
Io>>-->
Io>>>-->
Iub> PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
3Ith>
PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
3I>
3I>> PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
3I>>> Trip 5
Io>-->
Output Io>>-->
SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
switchgroups Io>>>-->
Iub> SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
3Ith>
External trip
3I>
3I>>
3I>>>
Io>--> CBFP
Io>>-->
Io>>>-->
Iub> Output relays
3Ith>
Close
Open
Open
3I>
3I>>
3I>>> Start 1
Io>-->
Io>>-->
Io>>>-->
Iub>
3Ith>
3I>
3I>>
3I>>> Output signals
Io>--> Start 2
Io>>-->
Io>>>-->
Iub>
3Ith>
Lockout
3I>> BSOUT
3I>>>
I<->0 CB1 open

I<->0 CB1 close
3lth>
3I MCS Trip 5
TCS
PQ 3Inf har
PQ 3Inf cum
CB wear
I<->0 CB1 open

I<->0 CB1 close
3lth> Trip 5
3I MCS
TCS
PQ 3Inf har
PQ 3Inf cum
CB wear1
A051964
Fig. 5.4.1.-4 Description of the output signal routing diagram
79
5.4.2. HSPO1 Open logic

The Open signal can be configured to any output relay, as in Fig. 5.4.2.-1. When this
is done, the logic automatically prevents the Open signal from passing through to
HSPO1, as in Fig. 5.4.2.-2. If the Open signal is not connected to an output relay, it
passes through the logic to HSPO1. This is the case by default.
PO1 (X4.1.12/13)
PO2 (X4.1.14/15)
PO3 (X4.1.17/18)
Close
SO1 (X4.1.8/7/6)
Open
SO2 (X4.1.10/11/9)
Open
Output relays
A060004
Fig. 5.4.2.-1 Open signal connected to output relays in the block diagrams of the
standard configurations
High speed
tripping contact
HSP01 Open logic
HSPO1
Open Logic (X4.2.3/4/1/2)
>1 >1
S Lockout
HSPO1
Lockout reset R Q Lockout working
1 Lockout
A060003
Fig. 5.4.2.-2 HSPO1 Open logic in the block diagrams of the standard
configurations
5.4.3. Frequency protection logic, H50 and H51

The frequency protection logic is used to avoid unnecessary trips when the system
transitory oscillates. Oscillation appears when a heavy load is connected to a system.
The oscillation depends on the quality of the power transmission and the type of
system load.
80
The df/dt function detects the oscillation. Basically, the frequency protection signal
is activated when the frequency is stable and the set frequency limit has been
exceeded. Here stable means that df/dt has not detected any oscillation during a
certain period of time. The period of time is set in Configuration/Special
settings/f prot. delay.
5.4.3.1. Functional description

If either of the two Start2 signals is high, the frequency protection signal is low
regardless of the f1 Trip1 signal status. The delay time starts when both the f1 Start2
and f2 Start2 signals are low. The f prot. signal is activated when the delay time has
elapsed, assuming that the f1 Trip1 is high. If either of the f1 Start2 or f2 Start2
signals are activated during the delay time, the delay time is reset, see Fig. 5.4.3.1.-1.
f prot. delay
f1 Start2 f1 Trip1 f prot
No delay &
>1 50 ms
f2 Start2 100 ms
150 ms
200 ms
250 ms
300 ms
350 ms
400 ms
500 ms
600 ms
700 ms
800 ms
900 ms
1000 ms
1500 ms
A060137
Fig. 5.4.3.1.-1 Frequency protection signal generation

Both Start2 signals have to be low for a longer time than the defined frequency
protection delay time in order to activate the f prot. signal. Furthermore, the f1Trip
signal also has to be high.
f1 Trip1
underfrequency
protection
f1 Start2
df/dt>
f2 Start2
df/dt<
f prot.
f prot. delay
A060138
Fig. 5.4.3.1.-2 Example signal diagram for frequency protection signal explaining
the df/dt blocking function
81
f1 Trip1
underfrequency
protection
f1 Start2
df/dt>
f2 Start2
df/dt<
f prot.
f prot. delay
A060139
Fig. 5.4.3.1.-3 Example signal diagram for frequency protection signal explaining
the activated frequency protection function
5.4.3.2. Example of usage

The following example describes how to configure the frequency protection blocks
f1 and f2 to activate the f prot. signal.
The frequency protection signal is activated if df/dt has not detected any oscillation
for a certain time and the operate time1 for f1 Trip1 has elapsed.
The signals f1 Trip2 and f2 Trip2 should be routed to the trip relay (as they are by
default). This means that the relay will trip if a fast continuous rise or fall of the
frequency occurs. The desired operating time can be set by the parameter Operate
time2 in f1 and f2.
Table 5.4.3.2-1 Example setting of the frequency protection signal usage

Settings
f1 Operating mode = f1</f> and df/dt>
f2 Operating mode = f1</f> and df/dt<
f1 Operate time 1 = 0.2 s
f1 and f2 Set start frequency = 48.5 Hz
f1 and f2 df/dt =10 Hz/s
Configuration/special settings/f prot.delay = 100 ms
Rated frequency = 50 Hz
Signal status
Frequency df/dt f. prot
> 48.5Hz No influence Low
< 48.5Hz < 10 Hz/s for < 100 ms Low
< 48.5Hz > 10 Hz/s Low
< 48.5Hz < 10 Hz/s for > 100 ms High
The f. prot signal is not routed to any output relay by default. To enable this signal
it must be routed to any of the outputs.
82
5.4.4. Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection, H50 and H51

The voltage-dependent overcurrent protection logic can be taken into use when the
actual fault current is smaller than the normal load current. It is possible to use the
normal voltage level to block the overcurrent protection, abnormal voltage level
unblocks overcurrent protection.
BS1 3I>
BS1 3I>>
BS1 3I>>>
BS1 3I>>-->
U1U2<>_1 Start BS2 3I>

BS2 3I>>
>1 BS2 3I>>>
BS2 3I>>-->
3U< Start2
A060157
Fig. 5.4.4.-1 Example of voltage-dependent overcurrent protection logic in the

standard blocking diagrams
Voltage
Overvoltage limit Start
Undervoltage limit Start
Enabled
Overcurrent
protection Blocked
A060140
Fig. 5.4.4.-2 Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection

The voltage-dependent overcurrent protection logic is activated in
Configuration/Input SWGRP/U1<U1...3U< ->BS1 and
Configuration/Input SWGRP/U1<U1...3U< ->BS2. The selected
overcurrent protection blocks are unblocked when the start signal of either
U1U2<>_1 or 3U< is active.
83
84
6. Parametrization of the digital inputs

Digital inputs can be used for performing different functions like resetting the
desired function block by programming the selectors and switchgroups accordingly.
Selectors
Input Output
Signals relays
Reset 1 HSPO 1
Reset 2 PO1
Group PO2
Digital PREDELAY
Blocking 1 .
inputs Blocking 2 .
DREC trig .
DI1 PQ 3Inf trig etc.
. BACTRL
. Master trip
. External trip
DI9 INVERSION Lockout reset
Remote Input
Close enable SWGRP
Open
Close Reset 1
CB pos. open O/C
CB pos. close E/F
DC pos. open Iub>
DC pos. close 3Ith>
PQ 3Inf
ES pos. open
O-->I
ES pos. close
Logic input 1 Reset 2
Logic input 2
Logic input 3
etc.
A051965
Fig. 6.-1 Overview of the selector options
6.1. Selectors
6.1.1. Reset
Selectors Reset 1 and Reset 2 can be programmed to connect any of the inputs
DI1...DI9 to reset the latched trip signal and the recorded data of the functions (for
example O/C, E/F, Iub>, 3Ith>, PQ 3Inf 1).
6.1.2. Group
Group is used for switching between the setting groups 1 and 2 of the protection
functions.
6.1.3. Blocking
Selectors BS1 and BS2 can be programmed to block the operation of the functions
(for example 3I>, 3I>>, 3I>>> etc.1).
6.1.4. Disturbance recorder trigger

Any of the inputs DI1...DI9 can be used to start the disturbance recorder to record
measurements.
1. Standard configuration specific.
85
6.1.5. Power quality trigger

Any of the inputs DI1...DI9 can be used to start the power quality recording
measurements.
6.1.6. Master trip

An external trip signal can be routed to the heavy duty tripping contact via
DI1...DI9. (The Master trip function bypasses the interlocking sequence.)
Master trip can be utilized by using the input selector Master trip to connect one of
the digital inputs (DI1...DI9) to the high speed tripping relay (HSPO1).
6.1.7. External trip

An additional external trip signal can be routed to the output relays PO1...PO3 and
SO1...SO2 (The external trip function bypasses the blocking sequence).
6.1.8. Lockout reset

Any DI1...DI9 can be programmed to reset the Lockout function.
6.1.9. Local/Remote
Any of the digital inputs can be used for activating the local mode of the relay if the
Local/Remote selection is set to “external input”. In local position, the circuit
breaker can be controlled via the binary inputs and the HMI but not through a
communication port. In remote position, the circuit breaker can be controlled only
through a communication port.
6.1.10. Close enable

DI1...DI9 can be used for giving the permission to close the circuit breaker. For
example, SF6 gas low indication signal can be used to block the close operation of
the CB (The Close command can be activated either via the digital inputs, the HMI
or through the communication port).
6.1.11. Direct control (Open/Close)

DI...DI9 can be used for controlling the circuit breaker.
When using digital inputs to control the circuit breaker, the inputs
must be activated with a pulse. Otherwise, if the input remains
activated, a position change from remote to local can cause an
immediate opening or closing of the circuit breaker
6.1.12. Object indication

Object indication is used to collect object status indications to MicroSCADA. The
interlocking logic also uses the logical states of the digital inputs (according to the
selected interlocking option).
The transferring of object status indication data to MicroSCADA is achieved by
using the I<->O IND1 and I<->O IND2 function blocks.
86
6.1.13. Time synchronization

Digital input 9 can be used as a GPS time synchronization input.
6.1.14. AR inhibit, AR on input, start AR

The autoreclose function O-->I can be started, inhibited or turned on via DI1...DI9.1
6.1.15. BACTRL (Basic angle control)

The basic angle of the directional earth-fault protection depends on the earthing
principle of the network. Basic angle can be changed via control signal BACTRL. 1
6.1.16. Logic input 1...3

The logical inputs 1...3 are part of the interlocking options for close enabling of the
breaker. These signals can be connected to any of the digital inputs DI1...DI9 and
they can get indication from such signals as SF6 gas alarm, spring charge etc. (see
Fig. 6.2.1.-5).
6.2. Interlocking
Closing the circuit breaker (CB) is permitted by the CLOSEENA input of the
I<->O CB1 function block. Different kinds of logics for permitting close operations
can be built by using the interlocking logic described in Fig. 6.2.-1 and
Fig. 6.2.1.-4.
The logic states of an earth switch (ES), a disconnector (DC), and general digital
inputs (DI1...DI9) can be used together with the interlocking logic in Fig. 6.2.-1.
CB pos. open
CB pos. close
Close enable
DI
1<-->0 CB
Selector
CB
DI1
DI2 CLOSEENA
Selector ES pos. open
ES pos. close
Interlocking_A
Interlocking_B
&
... DC pos. open Interlocking_C Lockout working
DC pos. close Interlocking_D

Logic input 1 Interlocking_E
DI9 Logic input 2
Logic input 3
A051966
Fig. 6.2.-1 Interlocking
6.2.1. Interlocking options

The interlocking options include only the closing of the circuit breaker. The opening
of the circuit breaker is always allowed. The settings are made via the HMI or the
Relay Setting Tool in a menu (Main menu\Configuration\Input
Signals\Close enable) where it is possible to manually set the interlocking
to TRUE or to Not connected (FALSE).
1. Standard configuration specific.
87
Using a digital input directly

One of the digital inputs (DI1...DI9) can be selected directly to permit close
operations. Use the selector named Close enable in the relay menu or the Relay
Setting Tool to select the input. Furthermore, an input activation delay and inversion
can be selected from the general digital input settings menu. Observe that the logical
state 1 enables and the logical state 0 disables closing of the circuit breaker.
Using earth-switch state (disconnector state not available)
If the status indication signals of the earth switch are connected to the digital inputs
and routed to ES pos. open and ES pos. close, these indications can be included in
the interlocking scheme. The signal marked “Interlocking_A” will be logical 0 when
the earth switch is closed and logical 1 when the earth switch is open. Use this signal
to enable close operations by selecting “Interlocking_A” in the Close enable
selector.
ES pos. open
ES pos. close
& Interlocking_A
A051967
Fig. 6.2.1.-1 Interlocking using earth-switch state

Using disconnector state (earth-switch state not available)
If the status indication signals of the disconnector are connected to the digital inputs
and routed to DC pos. open and DC pos. close, these indications can be included in
the interlocking scheme. The signal marked “Interlocking_A” will be logical 1 when
the disconnector is closed and logical 0 when the disconnector is open. Use this
signal to enable close operations by selecting “Interlocking_A” in the Close
enable selector.
DC pos. open
DC pos. close
& Interlocking_A
A051968
Fig. 6.2.1.-2 Interlocking using disconnector state

Using disconnector and/or earth-switch state
If both the disconnector and the earth-switch indications are available and routed to
DC pos. open, DC pos. close, ES pos. open and ES pos. close, these indications can
be included in the interlocking scheme. The signal marked “Interlocking_A” will be
logical 1 when the disconnector is closed or the earth switch is open. The signal
marked “Interlocking_B” will be logical 1 when the disconnector is closed and the
earth switch is open. Use any of these two signals to enable close operations by
selecting either “Interlocking_A” or “Interlocking_B” in the Close enable
selector.
88
DC pos. open
DC pos. close
& 1 Interlocking_A
ES pos. open
ES pos. close
& & Interlocking_B
A051969
Fig. 6.2.1.-3 Interlocking using disconnector and/or earth-switch state

Using disconnector, earth-switch and logical inputs
In the cases mentioned above, additional signals, such as SF6 gas low, may be used
to block close operations. Then, these signals should be connected to the
interlocking template using the logic inputs 1...3 (Logic_inpX) selectors. By
selecting “Interlocking_C”, “Interlocking_D” or “Interlocking_E” in the Close
enable selector, different AND/ OR conditions can be created.
Examples:
• DC or ES and “Logic_inpX” = “Interlocking_C”
• DC and ES and “Logic_inpX” = “Interlocking_D”
• “Logic_inp1” and “Logic_inp2” and “Logic_inp3” = “Interlocking_E”
In addition to the ones mentioned here, many different kinds of interlocking schemes
can be built by using the selectors to connect digital inputs, inversion to create AND/
OR logic and selecting different interlocking outputs (A...E). See Fig. 6.2.1.-4 for a
complete block diagram.
DC pos. open
DC pos. close
& 1 Interlocking_A
ES pos. open
ES pos. close
& & Interlocking_B
Logic input 1 & Interlocking_C
Logic input 2 &

Logic input 3
& Interlocking_D
Interlocking_E
A051970
Fig. 6.2.1.-4 Interlocking using disconnector, earth-switch and logical inputs
89
Example of customized interlocking

DC pos. close =
station L/R-switch
in remote
ES pos. open = &
Earth switch open
& Interlocking_D
= Close enable
Logic input 1 = SF6 gas alarm
Logic input 2 = Spring not charged
Logic input 3 = Manual stop &
A051971
Fig. 6.2.1.-5 Example of interlocking

The AND gate becomes an OR function by inverting the digital inputs in the general
digital input settings menu. Thus any of the connected fault signals can disable
closing of the circuit breaker.
90
7. Default settings
These settings can be found in Main menu\Configuration\.
Table 7.-1 Input signals

Standard
B01 B02 M01 M02 H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06 H07 H08 H09 H50 H51
configuration
Input Signals Digital inputs connected
Reset 1 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Reset 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Group NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Blocking 1 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Blocking 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
DREC trig NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
PQ 3Inf trig NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
PQ 3Unf trig - - - - NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
O-->I INH - DI8 - DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 - - - - DI8 DI8 -
O-->I ON - NC - NC NC NC NC NC - - - - NC NC -
O-->I Ext. start - NC - NC NC NC NC NC - - - - NC NC -
O-->I Ext. trip - NC - NC NC NC NC NC - - - - NC NC -
BACTRL - - NC NC NC NC NC NC - - NC - NC NC -
Master trip DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8
External trip NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Lockout reset NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Remote DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9 DI9
Close enable DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
Open NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Close NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
CB pos. open DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1
CB pos. close DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2
DC pos. open NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
DC pos. close NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
ES pos. open NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
ES pos. close NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Logic input 1 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Stall - - - - - - - - - - NC - - - NC
Restart inhibit - - - - - - - - - - NC - - - NC
MCB state - - - - - - - - - - NC - - - NC
91
Table 7.-2 Input SWGRP (Basic and Medium)

HW versions Basic Medium
Standard configuration B01 B02 M01 M02
Input Signals Input SWGRP
3I2f>-->Double NC NC NC NC
Reset 1 OC OC OC OC
Reset 2 EF EF EF EF
Group OC OC OC OC
EF EF EF EF
Iub> Iub> Iub> Iub>
3Ith> 3Ith> 3Ith> 3Ith>
Blocking 1 BS1 3I> BS1 3I> BS1 3I> BS1 3I>
BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>>
BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I>>>
3I2f>-->BS1 NC NC NC NC
Blocking 2 BS2 Io> BS2 Io> BS2 Io>--> BS2 Io>-->
BS2 Io>> BS2 Io>> BS2 Io>>--> BS2 Io>>-->
BS2 Io>>> BS2 Io>>> BS2 Io>>>--> BS2 Io>>>-->
3I2f>-->BS2 NC NC NC NC
O-->I/3I> - NC - NC
O-->I/3I>> - NC - NC
O-->I/3I>>> - NC - NC
O-->I/Io> - NC - -
O-->I/Io>> - NC - -
O-->I/Io>>> - NC - -
O-->I/Io>--> - - - NC
O-->I/Io>>--> - - - NC
O-->I/Io>>>--> - - - NC
O-->I/External - NC - NC
TCS1 Blocking NC NC NC NC
Reset indication - NC - NC
BACTRL - - NC NC
92
Table 7.-3 Input SWGRP (High/Sensor)

HW versions High/Sensor
Standard configuration H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06 H07
3I2f>-->Double NC NC NC NC NC - -
Reset 1 OC OC OC OC OC OC OC
Reset 2 EF EF EF DEF EF OV DEF
Group OC OC OC OC OC OC OC
EF EF EF EF EF OV EF
Iub> Iub> Iub> Iub> OV UV Voltage
3Ith> 3Ith> 3Ith> 3Ith> UV ROV f1
Freq
Blocking 1 BS1 3I>--> BS1 3I>--> BS1 3I> BS1 3I> BS1 3I> BS1 3I> BS1 3I>
BS1 3I>>--> BS1 3I>>--> BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>>
BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I> BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I>>>
BS1 3I>>
3I2f>--> BS1 NC NC NC NC NC - -
Is2t n<->BS1 - - - - - - NC
FUSEF -> BS1 - - - - - - NC
Is2t n< --> Double - - - - - - NC
Blocking 2 BS2 Io>--> BS2 Io>--> BS2 Io>--> BS2 Io>--> BS2 Io> BS2 3U>> BS2 Io>-->
BS2 Io>>--> BS2 Io>>--> BS2 Io>>--> BS2 Io>>--> BS2 Io>> BS2 3U< BS2 Io>>-->
BS2 Io>>>--> BS2 Io>>>--> BS2 Io>>>--> BS2 Io>>>--> BS2 Io>>> BS2 3U<< BS2 Io>
BS2 Io>>
3I2f>--> BS2 NC NC NC NC NC - -
Is2t n<->BS2 - - - - - - NC
FUSEF -> BS2 - - - - - - NC
O-->I/3I> - NC NC NC - - -
O-->I/3I>> - NC NC NC - - -
O-->I/3I>>> NC - NC NC - - -
O-->I/3I>--> NC NC - NC - - -
O-->I/3I>>--> NC NC - - - - -
O-->I/Io> - - - NC - - -
O-->I/Io>> - - - NC - - -
O-->I/Io>>> - - - NC - - -
O-->I/Io>--> NC NC NC NC - - -
O-->I/Io>>--> NC NC NC NC - - -
O-->I/Io>>>--> NC NC NC NC - - -
O-->I/f1-1 - NC - NC - - -
O-->I/f1-2 - NC - NC - - -
O-->I/External NC NC NC NC - - -
TCS1 Blocking NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Reset indication NC NC NC NC - - -
BACTRL NC NC NC NC - - NC
Motor Status - - - - - - NC
Restart Enable - - - - - - NC
93
Table 7.-4 Input SWGRP (High)

HW versions High
Standard
H08 H09 H50 H51
configuration
3I2f>-->Double NC NC NC -
Reset 1 OC OC OC OC
Reset 2 EF EF EF DEF
Group OC OV OC OV OC OV OC Voltage
EF UV EF UV EF UV EF FREQ
Blocking 1 BS1 3I> BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I> BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I> BS1 3I>>> BS1 3I> BS1 3I>>>
BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>> BS1 3I>>
3I2f>--> BS1 NC NC NC -
Is2t n<->BS1 - - - NC
FUSEF -> BS1 - - - NC
U1<U1...U3<->BS1 - - NC NC
Is2t n< --> Double - - - NC
Blocking 2 BS2 Io> BS2 Io>>> BS2 Io> BS2 Io>>> BS2 Io> BS2 Io> BS2 Io>-->
BS2 Io>> BS2 Io>> BS2 Io>> BS2 Io>> BS2 Io>>-->
3I2f>--> BS2 NC NC NC -
Is2t n<->BS2 - - - NC
FUSEF -> BS2 - - - NC
U1<U1...U3<->BS2 - - NC NC
O-->I/3I> - NC NC -
O-->I/3I>> - NC NC -
O-->I/3I>>> - NC NC -
O-->I/3I>--> - - NC -
O-->I/3I>>--> - - NC -
O-->I/Io> - NC NC -
O-->I/Io>> - NC NC -
O-->I/Io>>> - NC - -
O-->I/Io>--> - - NC -
O-->I/Io>>--> - - NC -
O-->I/3U> - NC NC -
O-->I/3U>> - NC NC -
O-->I/3U< - NC NC -
O-->I/3U<< - NC NC -
O-->I/Uo> - NC NC -
O-->I/Uo>> - NC NC -
O-->I/Uo>>> - NC - -
O-->I/U1U2<>_1 - - NC -
O-->I/f prot. - - NC -
O-->I/f1-1 - NC NC -
O-->I/f1-2 - NC NC -
O-->I/f2-1 - NC NC -
O-->I/f2-2 - NC NC -
O-->I/External - NC NC -
TCS1 Blocking NC NC NC -
Reset indication - - NC -
BACTRL - - NC NC
Motor Status - - - NC
Restart Enable - - - NC
94
Table 7.-5 Output SWGRP (Basic and Medium)

HW versions Basic Medium
Standard
B01 B02 M01 M02
configuration
Output SWGRP Output Signals
Trip 1 3I> Io>> 3I> Io>> 3I> Io>>--> 3I> Io>>-->
3I>> Io>>> 3I>> Io>>> 3I>> Io>>>--> 3I>> Io>>>-->
3I>>> Iub> 3I>>> Iub> 3I>>> Iub> 3I>>> Iub>
Io> 3Ith> Io> 3Ith> Io>--> 3Ith> Io>--> 3Ith>
Trip 2 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1
Trip 3 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1
Trip 4 NC NC NC NC
Trip 5 NC NC NC NC
CBFP See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1
Start 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1
Start 2 NC NC NC NC
BSOUT 3I>> 3I>> 3I>> 3I>>
3I>>> 3I>>> 3I>>> 3I>>>
Alarm 1 O<->I CB1 open O<->I CB1 open O<->I CB1 open O<->I CB1 open
O<->I CB1 close O<->I CB1 close O<->I CB1 close O<->I CB1 close
3Ith> 3Ith> 3Ith> 3Ith>
MCS 3I MCS 3I MCS 3I MCS 3I
TCS1 TCS1 TCS1 TCS1
PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har
PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum
CB wear1 CB wear1 CB wear1 CB wear1
Alarm 2 NC NC NC NC
O-->I Active - NC - NC
O-->I Alarm 1 - NC - NC
O-->I Alarm 2 - NC - NC
HSPO1 Lockout NC NC NC NC
95
Table 7.-6 Output SWGRP (High/Sensor)

HW
High/Sensor
versions
SC H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06 H07
Output
Output Signals
SWGRP
Trip 1 3I>--> Iub> 3I>--> Iub> 3I> Iub> 3I> Iub> 3I> 3U> 3I> Uo> -
3I>>--> 3Ith> 3I>>--> 3Ith> 3I>> 3Ith> 3I>> 3Ith> 3I>> 3U>> 3I>> Uo>>
3I>>> 3I> f1 Trip1 3I>>> 3I>>> 3I>--> 3I>>> 3U< 3U> Uo>>>
Io>--> 3I>> f1 Trip2 Io>--> Io>--> f1 Trip1 Io> 3U<< 3U>> f1 Trip1
Io>>--> Io>--> Io>>--> Io>>--> f1 Trip2 Io>> Uo> 3U< f2 Trip1
Io>>>--> Io>>--> Io>>>--> Io>>>--> Io>>> Uo>> 3U<< f1 Trip2
Io>>>--> 3Ihtdev> Uo>>> f2 Trip2
Trip 1a - - - - - - 3I> 3I<
3I>> 3U>
3I>>> 3U>>
Io>--> 3U<
Io>>--> 3U<<
3Ithdev> I2>
Io> I2>>
Io>> Is2t n<
Trip 1b - - - - - - 3I()
U1U2<>_1
f1 Trip1
f1 Trip2
Trip 2 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 -
Trip 2a - - - - - - See Trip 1a
Trip 2b - - - - - - See Trip 1b
Trip 3 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 See Trip 1 -
Trip 3a - - - - - - See Trip 1a
Trip 3b - - - - - - See Trip 1b
Trip 4 NC NC NC NC NC NC -
Trip 4a - - - - - - NC
Trip 4b - - - - - - NC
Trip 5 NC NC NC NC NC NC -
Trip 5a - - - - - - NC
Trip 5b - - - - - - NC
CBFP 3I>--> Iub> 3I>--> Iub> 3I> Iub> 3I> Iub> 3I> 3I> 3I> Io>
3I>>--> 3Ith> 3I>>--> 3Ith> 3I>> 3Ith> 3I>> 3Ith> 3I>> 3I>> 3I>> Io>>
3I>>> 3I> 3I>>> 3I>>> 3I>--> 3I>>> 3I>>> 3I<
Io>--> 3I>> Io>--> Io>--> Io> Io>--> I2>
Io>>--> Io>--> Io>>--> Io>>--> Io>> Io>>--> I2>>
Io>>>--> Io>>--> Io>>>--> Io>>>--> Io>>> 3Ithdev>
Io>>>--> 3Ihtdev>
Start 1 3I>--> Iub> 3I>--> 3I> 3I> Iub> Io>--> 3I> 3I> 3U> 3I> 3U> -
3I>>--> 3Ith> 3I>>--> 3I>> 3I>> 3Ith> Io>>--> 3I>> 3I>> 3U>> 3I>> 3U>>
3I>>> Io>--> Iub> 3I>>> Io>>>--> 3I>>> 3I>>> 3U< f1 Start1 3U<
Io>--> Io>>--> 3Ith> Io>--> f1 Start1 Iub> Io> 3U<< f2 Start1 3U<<
Io>>--> Io>>>--> Io>>--> f1 Start2 3Ith> Io>> Uo> f1 Start2 Uo>
Io>>>--> f1 Start1 Io>>>--> 3I>--> Io>>> Uo>> f2 Start2 Uo>>
f1 Start2 3Ihtdev> Uo>>> Uo>>>
96
Table 7.-6 Output SWGRP (High/Sensor) (Continued)

HW
High/Sensor
versions
SC H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06 H07
Output
Output Signals
SWGRP
Start 1a - - - - - - 3I> 3I<
3I>> 3U>
3I>>> 3U>>
Io>--> 3U<
Io>>--> 3U<<
3Ithdev> I2>
Io> I2>>
Io>> Is2t n<
Start 1b - - - - - - 3I()
U1U2<>_1
f1 Start1
f1 Start2
Start 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC -
Start 2a - - - - - - NC
Start 2b - - - - - - NC
BSOUT 3I>>--> 3I>>--> 3I>> 3I>> 3I>> 3I>> 3I>>
3I>> 3I>>> 3I>>> 3I>>> 3I>>> 3I>>>
Alarm 1 I<->O CB1 open I<->O CB1 open I<->O CB1 open I<->O CB1 open I<->O CB1 open I<->O CB1 open I<->O CB1 open
I<->O CB1 close I<->O CB1 close I<->O CB1 close I<->O CB1 close I<->O CB1 close I<->O CB1 close I<->O CB1 close
3Ith> 3Ith> 3Ith> 3Ith> MCS 3I MCS 3I MCS 3I
MCS 3I MCS 3I MCS 3I MCS 3I TCS1 TCS1 TCS1
TCS1 TCS1 TCS1 TCS1 PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har
PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum
PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum CB wear1 CB wear1 CB wear1
CB wear1 CB wear1 CB wear1 CB wear1 MCS 3U MCS 3U MCS 3U
MCS 3U MCS 3U MCS 3U MCS 3U PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Unf har
PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Unf cum PQ3Unf cum
PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Unf cum TIME1
FUSEF
Alarm 2 NC See Alarm 1 See Alarm 1 See Alarm 1 NC NC See Alarm 1
O-->I Active NC NC NC NC - - -
O-->I Alarm1 NC NC NC NC - - -
O-->I Alarm2 NC NC NC NC - - -
HSPO1 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
Lockout
Restart - - - - - - NC
Enable
97
Table 7.-7 Output SWGRP (High)

HW versions High
Standard conf. H08 H09 H50 H51
Trip 1 3I> 3U>> - - -
3I>> 3U<
3I>>> 3U<<
Io> Uo>
Io>> Uo>>
Io>>> Uo>>>
3U> 3Ihtdev>
Trip 1a - 3I> 3U< 3I> Io>>--> 3I> 3U>
3I>> 3U<< 3I>> 3U> 3I>> 3U>>
3I>>> Uo> 3I>>> 3U>> 3I>>> Uo>
Io> Uo>> 3I>--> 3U< 3I>>--> Is2t n<
Io>> Uo>>> 3I>>--> 3U<< Io> 3I()
Io>>> f1 Trip1 Io> Uo> Io>> I2>
3U> f1 Trip2 Io>> Uo>> Io>--> 3Ihtdev>
3U>> f2 Trip1 Io>--> U1U2<>_1 Io>>--> U1U2<>_1
Trip 1b - f2 Trip2 f1 Trip1 f2 Trip1 f1 Trip1 f2 Trip1
f1 Trip2 f2 Trip2 f1 Trip2 f2 Trip2
Trip 2 See Trip 1 - - -
Trip 2a - See Trip 1a See Trip 1a See Trip 1a
Trip 3 See Trip 1 - - -
Trip 3a - See Trip 1a See Trip 1a See Trip 1a
Trip 4 NC - - -
Trip 4a - NC NC NC
Trip 4b - NC NC NC
Trip 5 NC - - -
Trip 5a - NC NC NC
Trip 5b - NC NC NC
CBFP 3I> Io>> 3I> Io> 3I> Io> 3I> Io>>
3I>> Io>>> 3I>> Io>> 3I>> Io>> 3I>> Io>-->
3I>>> 3Ihtdev> 3I>>> Io>>> 3I>>> Io>--> 3I>>> Io>>-->
Io> 3I>--> Io>>--> 3I>>--> 3Ihtdev>
3I>>--> Io>
Start 1 3I> 3U>> - - -
3I>> 3U<
3I>>> 3U<<
Io> Uo>
Io>> Uo>>
Io>>> Uo>>>
3U> 3Ihtdev>
Start 1a - 3I> 3U< 3I> Io>>--> 3I> 3U>
3I>> 3U<< 3I>> 3U> 3I>> 3U>>
3I>>> Uo> 3I>>> 3U>> 3I>>> Uo>
Io> Uo>> 3I>--> 3U< 3I>>--> Is2t n<
Io>> Uo>>> 3I>>--> 3U<< Io> 3I()
Io>>> f1 Start1 Io> Uo> Io>> I2>
3U> f1 Start2 Io>> Uo>> Io>--> 3Ihtdev>
3U>> f2 Start1 Io>--> U1U2<>_1 Io>>--> U1U2<>_1
Start 1b - f2 Start2 NC f1 Start1 f2 Start1
f1 Start2 f2 Start2
98
Table 7.-7 Output SWGRP (High) (Continued)

HW versions High
Standard conf. H08 H09 H50 H51
Start 2 NC - - -
Start 2a - NC NC NC
Start 2b - NC NC NC
BSOUT 3I>> 3I>> 3I>> 3I>>--> 3I>> 3I>>-->
3I>>> 3I>>> 3I>>> 3I>>>
Alarm 1 I<->O CB1 open I<->O CB1 open I<->O CB1 open I<->O CB1 open
I<->O CB1 close I<->O CB1 close I<->O CB1 close I<->O CB1 close
MCS 3I MCS 3I MCS 3I MCS 3I
TCS1 TCS1 TCS1 TCS1
PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har PQ 3Inf har
PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum PQ 3Inf cum
CB wear1 CB wear1 CB wear1 CB wear1
MCS 3U MCS 3U MCS 3U MCS 3U
PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Unf har PQ 3Unf har
PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Unf cum PQ 3Unf cum
TIME1
FUSEF
Alarm 2 NC NC NC See Alarm 1
O-->I Active - NC NC -
O-->I Alarm 1 - NC NC -
O-->I Alarm 2 - NC NC -
HSPO1 Lockout NC NC NC NC
Restart Enable - - - - NC
99
Table 7.-8 Output signals

HW versions Basic, Medium, High and Sensor
Standard B01, B02, M01, M02, H01, H02, H03, H04, H05, H06, H07, H08,
configuration H09, H50, H51
Output relays Output signals
PO1 Trip 2
PO2 CBFP
PO3 Close
SO1 Start 1
SO2 Alarm 1
Table 7.-9 Special settings

HW versions High
Standard
H50 H51
configuration
f. prot delay No delay No delay
AR1 conf Standard -
AR2 conf Standard -
AR3 conf Standard -
AR4 conf Standard -
100
8. Function block descriptions

The information in this chapter is adapted from the function block descriptions in
the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions (Section 1.3. Related
documents). See also Chapter 3. Introduction for differences between the REX 521
and the RED 500 platform in the function block descriptions of the CD-ROM.
In this chapter, the function blocks are called by their IEC names. The corresponding
ABB names for the function blocks can be found in Table 3.-1.
Note that in the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions there are more
signals presented than in this manual.
8.1. Protection
8.1.1. 3I>, 3I>> and 3I>>>

The three-phase non-directional overcurrent function blocks are designed for non-
directional two-phase and three-phase overcurrent and short-circuit protection
whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns 3I>, the IDMT (Inverse Definite
Minimum Time) characteristic is appropriate. Suppression of harmonics is possible.
3I> 3I>> 3I>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP

BS1 START BS1 BSOUT BS1 BSOUT
BS2 TRIP BS2 START BS2 START
GROUP CBFP GROUP TRIP GROUP TRIP
RESET DOUBLE CBFP DOUBLE CBFP
RESET RESET
A051972
Fig. 8.1.1.-1 Function block symbols of 3I>, 3I>> and 3I>>
101
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, low-set stage, 3I> (51-1)

Start current 0.10…5.00 x In
Operate time in DT mode 0.05…300.00 s
Time multiplier in IDMT mode 0.05…1.00
IEEE time dial in IDMT mode 0.5...15.0
Operation mode Not in use IEEE Extremely inverse
Definite time IEEE Very inverse
Extremely inverse IEEE Inverse
Very inverse IEEE Short time inverse
Normal inverse IEEE Short time extr. inv.
Long time inverse IEEE Long time extr. inv.
RI-type inverse IEEE Long time very inv.
RD-type inverse IEEE Long time inverse
Measuring mode Peak-to-peak
Fundamental frequency
Drop-off time of the operate time counter 0...1000 ms
Note! The values below apply when f/fn = 0.95...1.05
Operation accuracy ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x In
Operate time Injected currents > 2.0 x start current:
internal time < 32 ms
total time < 40 ms
Reset time 40...1000 ms (depends on the minimum pulse width set
for the trip output)
Reset ratio, typically 0.95
Retardation time < 45 ms
Operate time accuracy in DT mode ±2% of set value or ±20 ms
Accuracy class index E in IDMT mode Class index E = 5.0 or ±20 ms
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, 3I>> (51-2) and instantaneous

stage, 3I>>> (51-3)
Operate time 0.05…300.00 s
Operation mode Not in use
Definite time
Instantaneous
Operation accuracy 0.1...10 x In: ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x In
10...40 x In: ±5.0% of set value
Start time Injected currents > 2.0 x start current:
total time < 40 ms
8.1.2. Io>, Io>> and Io>>>

The non-directional earth-fault protection function blocks are designed for non-
directional earth-fault protection whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns I0>,
the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) characteristic is appropriate.
Suppression of harmonics is possible.
102
Io> Io>> Io>>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP

BS1 START BS1 START BS1 START
BS2 TRIP BS2 TRIP BS2 TRIP
GROUP CBFP GROUP CBFP GROUP CBFP
RESET RESET RESET
A051973
Fig. 8.1.2.-1 Function block symbols of Io>, Io>> and Io>>>

Non-directional earth-fault protection, low-set stage, Io> (51N-1)
Start current 1.0…500.0% of In
IEEE time dial in IDMT mode 0.5...15.0
Operation mode Not in use IEEE Extremely inverse
Definite time IEEE Very inverse
Extremely inverse IEEE Short time inverse
Very inverse IEEE Short time extr. inv.
Normal inverse IEEE Long time extr. inv.
Long time inverse IEEE Long time very inv.
RI-type inverse IEEE Long time inverse
RD-type inverse
Operation accuracy ±2.5% of set value + 0.0005 x In
total time < 40 ms
Non-directional earth-fault protection, high-set stage, Io>> (51N-2), and

instantaneous stage, Io>>> (51N-3)
Operation mode Not in use Instantaneous
Definite time
Operation accuracy ±2.5% of set value or + 0.01 x In
Operate time Injected currents > 2.0 x start current:
total time < 40 ms
103
8.1.3. Io>-->, Io>>--> and Io>>>-->

The directional earth-fault protection function blocks Io>-->, Io>>--> and Io>>>-->
are designed to be used for directional or non-directional earth-fault protection
whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns Io>-->, the IDMT (Inverse Definite
Io> Io>> Io>>>
CBFP CBFP CBFP

BACTRL START BACTRL START BACTRL START
BS2 CBFP BS2 CBFP BS2 CBFP
GROUP GROUP GROUP
RESET RESET RESET
A051974
Fig. 8.1.3.-1 Function block symbols of Io>-->, Io>>--> and Io>>>-->
Directional earth-fault protection, low-set stage, Io>--> (67N-1)

Start voltage 2.0…100.0% of Un
Operation mode Not in use Very inverse
Definite time Normal inverse
Extremely inverse Long time inverse
Operation criteria Basic angle & Uo IoSin/Cos
Basic angle Non-directional Io
IoSin/Cos & Uo Non-directional Uo
Operation direction Forward
Reverse
Basic angle ϕb -90°... 60°
Operation characteristic IoSin(ϕ)
IoCos(ϕ)
Intermittent E/F Not active
Active
±2.5% of set value or + 0.01 x Un
Phase angle ±2°
Start time Injected neutral current > 2.0 x start current and
residual voltage > 2.0 x start voltage:
total time < 80 ms
104
Directional earth-fault protection, high-set stage, Io>>--> (67N-2) and instantaneous

stage, Io>>>--> (67N-3)
Start voltage 2.0…100.0% of Un
Operation mode Not in use Instantaneous
Definite time
Operation criteria Basic angle & Uo IoSin/Cos
Basic angle Non-directional Io
IoSin/Cos & Uo Non-directional Uo
Operation direction Forward
Reverse
Basic angle ϕb -90°...60°
Operation characteristic IoSin(ϕ)
IoCos(ϕ)
Intermittent E/F Not active
Active
±2.5% of set value or + 0.01 x Un
Phase angle ±2°
Start time Injected neutral current > 2.0 x start current
and residual voltage > 2.0 x start voltage:
total time < 80 ms
105
8.1.4. 3I>--> and 3I>>-->

The directional overcurrent function blocks are designed for directional single-
phase, two-phase and three-phase overcurrent and short-circuit protection whenever
the DT characteristic or, as concerns 3I>-->, the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum
Time) characteristic is appropriate. Suppression of harmonics is possible.
3I> 3I>>
CBFP CBFP
BACTRL START BACTRL START
BS1 TRIP BS1 TRIP
BS2 CBFP BS2 CBFP
GROUP GROUP
RESET DOUBLE
RESET
A051975
Fig. 8.1.4.-1 Function block symbols of 3I>--> and 3I>>-->
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, low-set stage, 3I>--> (67-1)

Operation mode Not in use Normal inverse
Definite time Long-time inv.
Extremely inv RI-type inverse
Very inverse RD-type inverse
Time multiplier 0.05...1.00
Basic angle ϕb 0°...90°
Oper. Direction Forward
Reverse
earth-fault pr. Disabled
Enabled
Measuring mode Mode1 (Phase-to-phase voltages/Peak-to-peak currents)
Mode2 (Phase-to-phase voltages/Fund. freq. Currents)
Mode3 (Phase-to-earth voltages/Peak-to-peak currents)
Mode4 (Phase-to-earth voltages/Fund. freq. Currents)
Operation accuracy Current:
0.1...10 x In: ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x In
Voltage:
±2.5% of measured value or ±0.01 x Un
Phase angle: ±2°
total time < 50 ms
Accuracy class index E at IDMT mode Class index E = 5.0 or ±20 ms
106
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, high-set stage, 3I>>--> (67-2)

Definite time
Instantaneous
Basic angle ϕb 0°...90°
Oper. Direction Forward
Reverse
earth-fault pr. Disabled
Enabled
Nondir. operat. Disabled
Enabled
Measuring mode Mode1 (Phase-to-phase voltages/Peak-to-peak currents)
Mode2 (Phase-to-phase voltages/Fund. freq. Currents)
Mode3 (Phase-to-earth voltages/Peak-to-peak currents)
Mode4 (Phase-to-earth voltages/Fund. freq. Currents)
Operation accuracy Current:
0.1...10 x In: ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x In
Voltage:
±2.5% of measured value or ±0.01 x Un
Phase angle: ±2°
total time < 50 ms
8.1.5. 3U> and 3U>>

Abnormal busbar voltages can be caused by faults in the network or a faulty tap
changer or voltage regulator of a power transformer. The function blocks are
designed for the single-phase, two-phase and three-phase overvoltage protection
whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns 3U>, the IDMT (Inverse Definite
3U> 3U>>
BS1 START BS1 START

BS2 TRIP BS2 TRIP
GROUP GROUP
RESET RESET
A051976
Fig. 8.1.5.-1 Function block symbols of 3U> and 3U>>
107
Three-phase overvoltage protection, low-set stage, 3U> (59-1)

Start voltage 0.10...1.60 x Un
Operate time 0.05...300.00 s
Definite time
A curve
B curve
Measuring mode Mode 1 (Phase-to-phase voltages / Peak-to-peak meas.)
Mode 2 (Phase-to-phase voltages / Fundam.freq.)
Mode 3 (Phase-to-earth voltages / Fundam.freq.)
Operation hysteresis 1.0...5.0%
Operation accuracy ±2.5% of the set value with Measuring Mode 3
±1,0% of the set value with Measuring Modes 1 and 2
Start time Injected voltages > 1.1 x start voltage:
total time < 50 ms
Reset ratio, typically Default 0.96 (range 0.95...0.99)
(Depends on the value of the Oper. hysteresis parameter,
refer to the manual of the Three-phase Overvoltage
protection function, 1MRS752322-MUM, chapters 2.3.1.
and 3.2.4.)
Accuracy class index E in inverse-time mode ± 20 ms or the accuracy appearing when the measured
voltage varies ±2.5%
Three-phase overvoltage protection, high-set stage, 3U>> (59-2)

Definite time
±1.0% of the set value with Measuring Modes 1 and 2
total time < 50 ms
Reset ratio, typically Default 0.96 (range 0.95...0.99)
(Depends on the value of the Oper. hysteresis parameter,
refer to the manual of the Three-phase Overvoltage
protection function, 1MRS752322-MUM, chapters 2.3.1.
and 3.2.4.)
108
8.1.6. 3U< and 3U<<

Abnormal busbar voltages can be caused by faults in the network or a faulty tap
changer or voltage regulator of a power transformer. The function blocks are
designed for the single-phase, two-phase and three-phase undervoltage protection
whenever the DT characteristic or, as concerns 3U<, the IDMT (Inverse Definite
3U< 3U<<
BS1 START BS1 START

BS2 TRIP BS2 TRIP
GROUP GROUP
RESET RESET
A051976
Fig. 8.1.6.-1 Function block symbols of 3U< and 3U<<
Three-phase undervoltage protection, low-set stage, 3U< (27-1)

Definite time
C curve
Start time Injected voltages < 0.5 x start voltage:
total time < 40 ms
Reset ratio, typically 1.04 (range 1.01...1.05)
(depends on the value of the Oper. hysteresis parameter,
refer to the manual of the Three-phase Undervoltage
Protection function, 1MRS752333-MUM, chapters 2.3.1.
and 3.2.4.)
Operate time accuracy in DT mode ±2,5% of set value
Accuracy class index E in inverse-time mode ± 35 ms or the accuracy appearing when the measured
voltage varies ±2.5%
109
Three-phase undervoltage protection, high-set stage, 3U<< (27-2)

Definite time
C curve
Operation accuracy ±2,5% of the set value with Measuring Mode 3
Start time Injected voltages < 0.5 x start voltage:
total time < 40 ms
Reset ratio, typically 1.04 (range 1.01...1.05)
(depends on the value of the Oper. hysteresis parameter,
refer to the manual of the Three-phase Undervoltage
Protection function, 1MRS752333-MUM, chapters 2.3.1.
and 3.2.4.)
Operate time accuracy in DT mode ±2,5% of set value
8.1.7. 3I2f>
The function block 3I2f> can be used for doubling the set start current of overcurrent
protection in a transformer magnetizing inrush situation, or at motor start-up, or for
blocking (stabilizing) overcurrent protection in a transformer magnetizing inrush
situation.
3I2f>
3I2f/I1f>
3dI/dt>
GROUP RESET
A051978
Fig. 8.1.7.-1 Function block symbol of 3I2f>
Three-phase transformer inrush and motor start-up current detector 3I2f> (68)
Ratio I 2f/I 1f 5...50%
Start current 0.10...5.00 x ln
Inrush mode
Start-up mode
Operation accuracy Current meas.: ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x ln
Ratio I2f/I1f measurement: ±5.0% of set value
Start time Internal time <32 ms
Total time <40 ms
8.1.8. Iub>
The phase discontinuity protection function block Iub> is designed to be used for
protection against broken phase conductors in distribution networks. Definite-time
(DT) characteristic is always used.
110
Iub>
3∆I>
CBFP
BS1 START
BS2 TRIP
GROUP CBFP
RESET
A051979
Fig. 8.1.8.-1 Function block symbol of Iub>
Phase discontinuity protection, Iub> (46)

Start unbalance 10.0…95.0%
Definite time
Operation accuracy ±2.5% of set value or ±1% unit
Start time internal time < 95 ms
total time < 100 ms
Reset time 40...1000 ms (depends on the minimum pulse width set for
the trip output)
Retardation time Total time for blocking: < 25 ms
Total time when current drops below start value: < 50 ms
8.1.9. 3Ith>
The three-phase thermal overload protection function block 3Ith> is designed for the
thermal protection of three-phase power cables and overhead lines.
3Ith>
3
J>
Dev
CBFP
BLOCK START
RESET TRIP
CBFP
EN_RESTART
A051980
Fig. 8.1.9.-1 Function block symbol of 3Ith>
Three-phase thermal overload protection for cables, 3Ith> (49F)

Time constant for the cable 1…999 min
Maximum load current for the cable 1.0…5000.0 A
Maximum temperature of conductor 40.0…150.0°C
Reference temperature -50.0…100.0°C
Trip temperature 80.0…120.0%
Prior alarm temperature 40.0…100.0%
Reclose temperature 40.0…100.0%
Ambient temperature -50.0…100.0°C
Operation mode (principle of ambient Not in use
temperature compensation) No sensors; the set ambient temperature
1 sensor used
2 sensors used
Operation accuracy ±1.0%, I = 0.1...10.0 x In
Reset ratio Trip: (Calculated temp. rise - 0.1) / Trip temperature
Start: (Calculated temp. rise - 0.1) / Prior alarm temperature
111
8.1.10. O-->I
The majority (about 80...85%) of MV overhead line faults are transient and are
automatically cleared by momentarily de-energizing the line, whereas the rest of the
faults (15...20%) can be cleared by longer interruptions. The de-energization of the
fault place for a desired period of time is implemented by autoreclose (AR) relays
or functions. The autoreclosers are capable of clearing most of the faults. At a
permanent fault, the autoreclosing is followed by final tripping. A permanent fault
has to be located and cleared before the fault location can be re-energized.
The autoreclose function O-->I can be used for autoreclosing together with any
circuit breaker that has the characteristics required for autoreclosing. The function
block provides five programmable AR shots which can perform one to five
successive autoreclosures of desired type and duration, such as one high-speed and
one delayed autoreclosure. When the reclosing is initiated by the start of a protection
function, the AR function is capable of executing the final trip of the circuit breaker
in a short operate time in case the fault still persists when the last reclosure selected
has been carried out.
O I
AR1 ROPEN
AR2 RCLOSE
AR3 SHOT1
AR4 SHOT2
ARINH SHOT3
CBOPEN SHOT4
CBCLOSE SHOT5
ON AR1TRIP
RESET AR2TRIP
AR3TRIP
AR4TRIP
CB FAIL
DEFTRIP
LOCKOUT
TRDUE
TDDUE
ACTIVE
SHOT_ALARM
A051981
Fig. 8.1.10.-1 Function block symbol of O-->I
Autoreclose function, O-->I (79)

Number of reclosures 0…5
Initiation mode Trip
Start
AR1, AR2, AR3, AR4 starting line operation No operation
mode AR shot initiated
Initiation of AR shot blocked
AR1 AR2, AR3, AR4 start delay 0…10.00 s
Dead time 0.20…300.00 s
Synchro-check Not in use; ARSYNC in use
Discriminating time td 0…30.00 s
Operation accuracy ±1% of setting value or ±30 ms
The AR function is initiated internally from the protection functions or externally

with the digital inputs. The initiation signals are selected in the input SWGRP.
Activation and alarm signals can be routed to the output relays via the output
SWGRP selection.
112
The re-open (ROPEN) signal is connected directly to the HSPO1. The reclose signal
is routed to the close signal which can be connected to the output relays. The reclose
signal is depended on the interlocking scheme chosen for the control (COCB)
function. (See Fig. 8.1.10.-2.) Note that the open and the trip signal always overrides
the reclose and the close signal.
Sometimes it can be useful to get indications on the display cleared after a successful
autoreclosing. This can be done by selecting O-->I in input SWGRP Reset
indication. By default this option is disabled.
CB open and CB close via the AR function are disabled in REX 521.
Input SWGRP Output SWGRP
O-->1 Active
SHOT1
O-->I 3I> Start SHOT2
O-->I 3I>> Start SHOT3
O-->I 3I>>> Start SHOT4
. SHOT5
. TRDUE
.
Initiation signals TDDUE
DI1...DI9 O-->I
Ext. start AR1 ACTIVE
AR2 ROPEN
AR3 RCLOSE
AR4 SHOT1 O-->1 Alarm 1
DI1...DI9 ARINH SHOT2
DI1...DI9 ARON SHOT3
AR1TRIP
SHOT4
CB pos. open AR2TRIP
CBOPEN SHOT5 AR3TRIP
CB pos. close CBCLOSE AR1TRIP AR4TRIP
AR2TRIP CBFAIL
Reset AR3TRIP
RESET DEFTRIP
AR4TRIP LOCKOUT
CB FAIL SHOT_ALARM
O-->I Trip 3I> DEFTRIP
O-->I Trip 3I>> LOCKOUT
O-->I Trip 3I>>> TRDUE
. TDDUE O-->1 Alarm 2
. ACTIVE
. SHOT_ALARM
DI1...DI9 Ext. trip
AR1TRIP
AR2TRIP
AR3TRIP
AR4TRIP
CBFAIL
DEFTRIP
LOCKOUT
SHOT_ALARM
A051982
Fig. 8.1.10.-2 Input and output signal overview for the autoreclose function
113
8.1.10.1. Autoreclose in H50
Output SWGRP
Input SWGRP Autoreclose O-->I Active

configuration
SHOT1
O-->I 3I> Start SHOT2
O-->I 3I>> Start CB position act. SHOT3
O-->I 3I>>> Start SHOT4
CB pos. open
-
- CB pos. close Initiate SHOT5
TRDUE
- Initiation TDDUE
DI1...DI9 Ext. start O-->I
BLOCK signals *) AR1 ROPEN ACTIVE
AR2 RCLOSE
AR3 SHOT1
AR4 SHOT2 O-->I Alarm 1
Standard SHOT3
DI1...DI9 ARINH SHOT4
AR1TRIP
DI1...DI9 ARON SHOT5
AR2TRIP
AR1TRIP
CB pos. open AR3TRIP
CBOPEN AR2TRIP
CB pos. close AR4TRIP
CBCLOSE AR3TRIP
CBFAIL
AR4TRIP
Fast final trip Reset RESET CB FAIL
DEFTRIP
LOCKOUT
DEFTRIP SHOT_ALARM
O-->I Trip 3I> & LOCKOUT
TRDUE
O-->I Trip 3I>>
O-->I Trip 3I>>> TDDUE
- ACTIVE O-->I Alarm 2
- SHOT_ALARM
-
DI1...DI9 Ext. trip
AR1TRIP
AR2TRIP
AR3TRIP
TRDUE AR4TRIP
CBFAIL
DEFTRIP
*) NOTE! The 4 AR initiation signals can be set to any combination LOCKOUT
SHOT_ALARM
of CB position act., Standard and Fast final trip.
A060141
Fig. 8.1.10.-3 Input and output signal overview for the AR function in H50
Table 8.1.10-1 Settings of the autoreclose configuration in H50

Settings of the
autoreclose Functional description
configuration
CB position act. CB position OPEN activates the reclose sequence.
Input SWGRP determines which start or trip signal blocks O-->I.
Fast final trip After the first reclose or manual close, the Trip is carried out by a Start
signal, ignoring the operate time set within the protection block. The
input SWGRP determines which function blocks use this feature.
Standard Input SWGRP determines which start or trip signal activates O-->I.
The autoreclose configuration settings are found in Configuration/Input

SWGRP/Special settings/AR1 conf ... /AR4 conf.
These features requires correct settings inside the AR function block.
CB position act.
Opening a CB manually does not start the O-->I sequence. The selected signals in
the Input SWGRP are used to block the initiation of the O-->I sequence.
In order to allow the Master trip input signal to initiate the O-->I sequence,
O-->I INH must have a different DI selected than the Master trip input
signal. Both signals are found in Configuration/Input signals/. Both the
Master trip and the O-->I INH signals are by default configured to DI8.
114
Fast final trip

Fast final trip is used when a specific start signal is used to open the breaker faster
if an error still exists after an autoreclose or a manual close. After the first reclose or
manual close, the TRDUE signal is set to TRUE. If a start signal triggers the AR
during the time the TRDUE signal is TRUE (called reclaime time), the circuit
breaker is opened by the AR function. In this way the operate time of the protection
block is bypassed. The input SWGRP sets the start signals of the function blocks
which initiate this functionality.
Standard
The input SWGRP determines the initiate signals that activates the O-->I sequence.
AR works like in other configurations where it is used.
8.1.11. Uo>, Uo>> and Uo>>>

The residual overvoltage protection function blocks are designed for sensitive earth-
fault protection whenever the DT characteristic is appropriate. Suppression of
harmonics is possible.
Uo> Uo>> Uo>>>
BS1 START BS1 START BS1 START

GROUP GROUP GROUP
RESET RESET RESET
A051983
Fig. 8.1.11.-1 Function block symbol of Uo>, Uo>> and Uo>>>
Residual overvoltage protection, low-set stage, Uo> (59N-1), high-set stage, Uo>>
(59N-2) and instantaneous stage, Uo>>> (59N-3)
Start voltage 2.0...100.0% Un
Definite time
Operation accurcy ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x Un
total time < 40 ms
Reset time 40...1000 ms (Depends on the minimum pulse width set
Retardation time Total time for blocking: < 25 ms
Total time when voltage drops below start value: < 50 ms
115
8.1.12. f1 and f2
The frequency function blocks operate as either underfrequency or overfrequency
protection depending on whether the set operate value is above or below the rated
frequency of the relay. The operation is insensitive to harmonics and the DC
component.
f1 f2
f< f<
f> f>
df/dt< df/dt<
df/dt> df/dt>
BS1 START1 BS1 START1

BS2 TRIP1 BS2 TRIP1
GROUP START2 GROUP START2
RESET TRIP2 RESET TRIP2
A051984
Fig. 8.1.12.-1 Function block symbol of f1 and f2
System frequency protection, f1 (81-1) and f2 (81-2)

Undervoltage limit for blocking 0.30...0.90 x Un
Start value for under-/overfrequency prot. 25.00...75.00 Hz
Operate time for under-/overfrequency prot. 0.10...300.00 s
Start value for df/dt protection 0.2...10.0 Hz/s
Operate time for df/dt protection 0.12...300.00 s
Operation mode Not in use f</f> AND df/dt>
f</f> 1 timer f</f> OR df/dt<
f</f> 2 timers f</f> AND df/dt<
f</f> OR df/dt>
Accuracy for the f</f> function is defined in the setting
range 25...75 Hz.
Operation accuracy Frequency function (f</f>): ± 10 mHz
Frequency rate of change function (df/dt):
real df/dt < ± 5 Hz/s: accuracy ±100 mHz/s
real df/dt < ± 15 Hz/s: accuracy ±2.0% of the real df/dt
Undervoltage blocking: ±1.0% of set value
Start time Total start times at rated freq. fn = 50 Hz:
Frequency measurement: < 100 ms
df/dt measurement: < 120 ms
Note! The operate times and start times are specified for
the set rated frequencies 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Reset time 140...1000 ms (Depends on the minimum pulse width set
Operate time accuracy ±2.0% of set value or ±30 ms
8.1.13. SYNC1
The function block is designed to be used for checking the conditions for circuit-
breaker closing. The function can be used for closing ring mains, interconnecting
busbars and connecting generators to the network. The harmonics are suppressed.
In sensor standard configurations (H01S and H03S) the parameter

Control settings\Voltage combine must be enabled and
in transformer standard configuration (H03) it must be disabled. The
parameter is by default in the correct mode.
116
SYNC
Command SC OK
A051985
Fig. 8.1.13.-1 Function block symbol of SYNC1
Synchro-check, SYNC1 (25-1)

Umax (Upper threshold voltage) 0.50...1.00 x Un
Umin (Lower threshold voltage) 0.10...0.80 x Un
dU (Voltage difference) 0.02...0.50 x Un
dphase (Phase angle difference) 5...90°
df (Frequency difference) 0.02...5.00 Hz
Energizing mode Not in use
U1->U2 or U2->U1
U1->U2
U2->U1
U1->U2 or U2->U1 or both “cold”
Operation mode Command mode
Continuous mode
Synchro mode Not in use
Asynchronous Mode
Synchronous Mode
Check time 0.05...300.0 s
Operation accuracy Voltage measurement: ±2.5% of set value or ± 0.01 x Un
Frequency measurement: ±10 mHz
Phase angle measurement: ±2°
Reset time < 50 ms
Reset ratio (typically) 0.975 x Un (range 0.96...0.98)
Operate time accuracy ±2% of set value or ±20 ms
8.1.14. Is2t n<

The motor start-up supervision protection function block Is2t n< is designed to
monitor thermal stress during a single motor start-up.
Ist2t n<
GROUP START
STALL_IND TRIP
STALL
RESTART
A051986
Fig. 8.1.14.-1 Function block symbol of Is2t n<
Three-phase start-up supervision for motors, Is2t n< (48)

l 2t
l2t & stall
Start current 1.0...10.0 x In
Start time 0.3...250.0 s
Time limit 1.0...500.0 s
Countdown rate 2.0...250.0 s/h
Stall time 2.0...120.0 s
117
Three-phase start-up supervision for motors, Is2t n< (48) (Continued)

Note! The values below apply when f/fn = 0.95...1.05:
Operation accuracies Current measurement: ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x In
Stall time accuracy ±2% of set value or ±20 ms
Start time f/fn = 0.95...1.50: Internal time <22 ms
Total time <30 ms1
f/fn = 0.50...0.95 Internal time <32 ms
Total time <40 ms1
Reset ratio Typical 0.95 (range 0.95...0.98)
Retardation time Total retardation time when current drops below the start
value <50 ms 2
Frequency dependence of settings and Frequency dependence is described above
operating times
1 Includes the delay of signal relay
2 Includes the delay of heavy-duty output relay
8.1.15. 3I()
The function block 3I() is designed for phase-reversal protection of motors
3I()
BLOCK START
GROUP TRIP
RESET CBFP
A051987
Fig. 8.1.15.-1 Function block symbol of 3I()
Phase-reversal protection, 3I() (46R)

2-phase
3-phase
Rotation direction Forward
Reverse
Operation accuracies Phase angle difference ±2°
Current ±0.01 x In
Start time Start time when phase order is wrong
and the injected currents = 1.0 < In:
Internal time <72 ms
Total time <80 ms 1
Reset time 40...1000 ms (depending on the minimum pulse width
set for the TRIP output)
Reset ratio Reset value for phase angle difference: 3°
Retardation time Total retardation time when correct phase order is
restored: <60 ms 2
Operate time accuracy Depends on the frequency of the current measured:
±2% of set value or ±20 ms 2
Frequency dependence of the settings and Suppression of harmonics:
operate times (see above) -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
1
Includes the delay of the signal relay
2
Includes the delay of the heavy-duty output relay
118
8.1.16. I2> and I2>>

The function blocks I2> and I2>> are designed for negative phase sequence
protection whenever the operating characteristic is appropriate. The function blocks
are applied in protecting power generators or synchronous motors against thermal
stress and damage
I2> I2>>
BLOCK START BLOCK START

GROUP TRIP GROUP TRIP
RESET CBFP RESET CBFP
BLOCK_OUT BLOCK_OUT
A051988
Fig. 8.1.16.-1 Function block symbols of I2> and I2>>
Negative phase sequence (NPS) protection, low-set stage I2> (46-1) and high-set
stage I2>> (46-2)
Definite time
Inverse time
Start value 0.01...0.50 x In
K 5.0...100.0 s
Start delay 0.1...60.0 s
Minimum time 0.1....120.0 s
Maximum time 500...10000 s
Cooling time 5...10000 s
Number of phases 2...3
Operation accuracies ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x In
Start time Injected negative-sequence current = 2.00 x start value:
internal time <32 ms
total time <40 ms 1
Reset time 40...1000 ms (depending on the minimum pulse width set
for TRIP output)
Reset ratio Typical 0.96 (range 0.96...0.98) in definite-time mode
Retardation time Total retardation time when negative-sequence current
drops below the start value <45 ms 2
Operate time accuracy in definite-time mode Depends on the frequency of the current measured:
±2% of set value or ±20 ms 2
Accuracy class index E in inverse-time mode Depends on the frequency of the current measured:
±2% of the calculated ideal operate time or ±20 ms 2
1
Includes the delay of the signal relay.
2
Includes the delay of the heavy-duty output relay.
8.1.17. 3I<
The undercurrent function block is designed to be used for non-directional three-
phase undercurrent protection. Usually the undercurrent function block indicates
loss of load for pumps, fans and conveyors. Protection is important if the pump is
cooled by the liquid it pumps, or if a broken conveyor belt may cause damage for
the process. Also a broken main circuit, problems with measuring devices, and loss
of supply can be indicated.
119
3I<
BLOCK START
GROUP TRIP
RESET CBFP
A051989
Fig. 8.1.17.-1 Function block symbol of 3I<
Non-directional undercurrent protection, 3I< (37-1)

Alarm
Trip
Operation criteria 1-, 2-, 3-phase
3-phase
Start current 0.10...0.99 x In
Internal blocking Disabled
Enabled
Blocking time 0...7200 s
Drop-off time 0.00...60.00 s
Operation accuracies ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x In
Start time Injected currents = 0.5 x start current:
total time <120 ms 1
for TRIP output)
Reset ratio (typically) 1.02 (range 1.02...1.06)
Retardation time Total retardation time when the current exceeds the start
value: <80ms 2
Operate time accuracy ±2% of set value or ±25 ms 2
Frequency dependence of settings and Measuring mode Suppression of harmonics
operate times 0 No suppression
1 -50dB at f = n x fn,
where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...
1
2 Includes the delay of the heavy-duty output relay
8.1.18. FUSEF
Some voltage-based protection functions may mal-operate if a voltage measurement
circuitry is damaged or if the miniature circuit breaker (MCB) of the measurement
circuitry has opened for example due to an operation of the short-circuit protection.
A failure in the voltage measurement circuitry should, however, be repaired as soon
as possible to restore the blocked protection functions into use.
FUSEF
BSOUT
A051990
Fig. 8.1.18.-1 Function block symbol of FUSEF
120
Fuse failure supervision, FUSEF (60)

Ratio U2/U1> 10...50%
Ratio I2/I1> 10...50%
FuseFail Not in use
In use
Operation accuracies Depends on the frequency of the current and voltage
measured:
f/fn = 0.98...1.02: ±2.0% of Ratio U2/U1> and Ratio I2/I1<
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: ±4.0% of Ratio U2/U1> and Ratio I2/I1<
BSOUT activation time (when task interval Injected negative-sequence voltage = 2.00 x Ratio U2/U1>:
is 10 ms) 1 f/fn = 0.98...1.02: <35 ms (within the same task)
Reset time (when task interval is 10 ms) 2 20 ms (within the same task)
Reset ratio 0.8...0.96 (for Ratio U2/U1>)
1.04...1.2 (for Ratio I2/I1<)
1
When BSOUT output is used for blocking function blocks that are executed in a slower task interval
than FuseFail, an additional delay has to be included in the block activation time
2
When BSOUT output is used for blocking function blocks that are executed in a slower task interval
than FuseFail, an additional delay has to be included in the reset time
8.1.19. 3Ithdev>
The function block protects a motor both from short- and long-duration overloads.
The start situation is a good example of short-duration overload since particularly at
start-up the rotor is in danger to be overloaded by the starting current. The starting
current can be in the range of five to seven times the rated current of the motor.
The motor start-ups also load stator windings. Especially when a warm motor is
restarted, the stator may constitute a limitation regarding thermal protection.
Because the function block calculates the temperature rise both for the stator and the
rotor individually, the motor can be fully protected by proper settings. Furthermore,
the thermal model of two-time constants enables detecting both short-time and long-
time overloadings.
3Ithdev>
3
J>
Dev
CBFP
BLOCK START
GROUP TRIP
RESET CBFP
EN_RESTART
A051991
Fig. 8.1.19.-1 Function block symbol of 3Ithdev>
121
Three-phase thermal overload protection for devices, 3Ithdev (49M/G/T)

Short time constant for stator 0.1...999.0 min
Long time constant for stator 0.1...999.0 min
Weighting factor of stator’s short time-constant 0.00...1.00
Temperature rise when In for stator 50.0...350.0°C
Maximum temperature for stator 50.0...350.0°C
Short time constant for rotor 0.1...999.0 min
Long time constant for rotor 0.1...999.0 min
Weighting factor of rotor’s short time constant 0.00...1.00
Temperature rise when In for rotor 50.0...350.0°C
Maximum temperature for rotor 50.0...350.0°C
Starting current 0.10...10.00 x In
Starting time 0.1...120.0 s
Number of starts 1...3
Device type MOTOR I GENERATOR I
MOTOR II GENERATOR II
MOTOR III TRANSFORMER
MOTOR IV
Trip temperature 80.0...120.0%
Prior alarm 40.0...100.0%
Restart inhibit 40.0...100.0%
Ambient temperature -50.0...100.0°C
Cooling time constant 1.0...10.0 x τ
Gen&Trafo heating time constant 1...999 min
Operation accuracies Current measurement:
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: ±1.0%, I = 0.1...10.0 x In
Operate time accuracy ±2% or ±0.5 s
Reset ratio TRIP: (TEMP(%) -0.1)/Trip temperature
START: (TEMP(%) -0.1)/Prior alarm
EN_RESTART: (TEMP(%) -0.1)/Restart inhibit
8.1.20. U1U2<>_1
The positive-sequence undervoltage function U1< is designed to be used to protect
small generating plant from asynchronous reclosure with the rest of the network, and
to protect the plant from loss of synchronism.
The function block is also used to protect against unwanted isolation of small
generating plant during one- or two-phase network unbalance. The level of positive
sequence voltage is found to be a good criteria when determining the criticality of
the network fault from the generating plant’s point of view.
Additionally, the function block can be used in unsuccessful reclosure protection in
cases where a small generating plant with a faulted feeder supplies fault current
which is too small to be detected by the current relays, but high enough to maintain
the arc.
The negative-sequence overvoltage function U2> is designed to be used to protect
motors against failure on one or more phases (single phasing), to protect against
excessive imbalance between phases, and to protect machines against reversal of
phase sequence both in forward and reverse rotation direction.
122
A faulty voltage transformer or sensor, as well as a wrong connection of voltage

measuring devices causes apparent voltage unbalance. The U2> function can also be
used for monitoring the condition of measuring circuits.
The positive-sequence overvoltage function U1> can be used in various applications
instead of an ordinary three-phase overvoltage protection.
U1U2<>_1
BLOCK START
GROUP TRIP
RESET
A051992
Fig. 8.1.20.-1 Function block symbol of U1U2<>_1
Phase sequence voltage protection, U1U2<>_1 (47-1)

U1< & U2> & U1>
U1< & U2>
U2> & U1>
U1< & U1>
U2>
U1<
U1>
Start value U2> 0.01...1.00 x Un
Start value U1< 0.01...1.20 x Un
Start value U1> 0.80...1.60 x Un
Operate time U2> 0.04...60.00 s
Operate time U1< 0.04...60.00 s
Operate time U1> 0.04...60.00 s
Operation accuracies ±2.5% of set value or ±0.01 x Un
Start time, U2> operation Injected negative sequence voltage = 1.1 x start value:
total time <50 ms 1
Start time, U1< operation Injected positive sequence voltage = 0.50 x start value:
total time <40 ms 1
Start time, U1> operation Injected positive sequence voltage = 1.1 x start value:
total time <50 ms 1
for TRIP output)
Reset ratio U2> operation Typical 0.96 (range 0.90...0.98)
Reset ratio U1< operation Typical 1.04 (range 1.02...1.10)
Reset ratio U1> operation Typical 0.99
Retardation time Total retardation time when negative-/positive-
2
sequence voltage passes the start value: <45 ms
Operate time accuracy Depends on the frequency of the current measured:
f/fn = 0.95...1.05: ±2% of set value or ±20 ms
1
2 Includes the delay of the heavy-duty output relay
123
8.2. Control
8.2.1. I<->O CB1

The circuit-breaker function block is used for controlling the open and close
positions of a circuit breaker. The function block also takes care of the user-defined
interlocking logics and has guaranteed opening and closing pulse widths and forced
open control operations for protection purposes. The open, close and undefined
states of an object can be indicated remotely by the function block. Since the
function block is mainly designed for circuit breakers, it will issue specific alarm
signals based on the condition monitoring features.
I<->O CB1
OPEN OOPEN
CLOSE OCLOSE
CLOSENA AOPEN
BINOPEN ACLOSE
BINCLOSE
A051993
Fig. 8.2.1.-1 Function block symbol of I<->O CB1
8.2.2. I<->O IND1 and I<->O IND2

The object indication function blocks I<->O IND1 and I<->O IND2 indicate the
open, close and undefined states of a disconnector or an earthing switch.
8.2.3. I<->O IND3

The object indication function block I<->O IND3 indicates the state of the motor
(running/stopped) in H07 and H51.
8.2.4. I<->O POS

The function block for logic control position selector, I<->O POS, makes it possible
to choose remote or local position via the input Remote, which facilitates the flexible
selection of control position. The Remote input can be found in
Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\Remote.
In remote position, the circuit breaker can only be controlled via remote
communication and, accordingly, the local position only enables operation via the
HMI and the digital inputs.
I<->O POS
BINREMOTE
A051994
Fig. 8.2.4.-1 Function block symbol of I<->O POS
124
8.2.5. ALARM1-8
The alarm indicating functions are used for controlling alarm LEDs. The following
configuration-specific signals can be connected to the alarm indicating functions :
Table 8.2.5-1 Basic B01
LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED8
3I> Start Io> Start Iub> Start DI1 DI1 MEAS HI ALARM MEAS LO ALARM CB wear1
3I> Trip Io> Trip Iub> Trip DI2 DI2 DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Start Io>> Start 3Ith> Start DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 MCS 3I
3I>> Trip Io>> Trip 3Ith> Trip DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4
3I>>> Start Io>>> Start DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
3I>>> Trip Io>>> Trip DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
DI8 DI8 Interlocking Lockout DI8
Table 8.2.5-2 Basic B02

3I> Start Io> Start Iub> Start DI1 DI1 MEAS HI ALARM MEAS LO ALARM CB wear1
3I> Trip Io> Trip Iub> Trip DI2 DI2 DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Start Io>> Start 3Ith> Start DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 MCS 3I
3I>> Trip Io>> Trip 3Ith> Trip DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4
3I>>> Start Io>>> Start O-->I OPEN DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
3I>>> Trip Io>>> Trip O-->I ACTIVE DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
O-->I ALAR1 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
O-->I ALAR2 DI8 DI8 Interlocking Lockout DI8
Table 8.2.5-3 Medium M01

3I> Start Io>--> Start Iub> Start DI1 DI1 MEAS HI ALARM MEAS LO ALARM CB wear1
3I> Trip Io>-->Trip Iub> Trip DI2 DI2 DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Start Io>>--> Start 3Ith> Start DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 MCS 3I
3I>> Trip Io>>--> Trip 3Ith> Trip DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4
3I>>> Start Io>>>--> Start DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
3I>>> Trip Io>>>--> Trip DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
DI8 DI8 Interlocking Lockout DI8
Table 8.2.5-4 Medium M02

3I> Trip Io>--> Trip Iub> Trip DI2 DI2 DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Trip Io>>--> Trip 3Ith> Trip DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4
3I>>> Start Io>>>--> Start O-->I OPEN DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
3I>>> Trip Io>>>-->Trip O-->I ACTIVE DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
Table 8.2.5-5 High/Sensor H01

3I>--> Start Io>--> Start Iub> Start DI1 DI1 MEAS HI ALARM MEAS LO ALARM CB wear1
3I>--> Trip Io>--> Trip Iub> Trip DI2 DI2 DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>>--> Start Io>>--> Start 3Ith> Start DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 MCS 3I
3I>>--> Trip Io>>--> Trip 3Ith> Trip DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 MCS 3U
3I>>> Trip Io>>>--> Trip O-->I ACTIVE DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
125

3I> Start Io>--> Start f1 Start 1 O-->I OPEN DI1 MEAS HI ALARM MEAS LO ALARM CB wear1
3I> Trip Io>--> Trip f1 Trip 1 O-->I ACTIVE DI2 DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Start Io>>--> Start f1 Start 2 O-->I ALAR1 DI3 DI3 DI3 MCS 3I
3I>> Trip Io>>--> Trip f1 Trip 2 O-->I ALAR2 DI4 DI4 DI4 MCS 3U
3I>--> Start Io>>>--> Start Iub> Start DI1 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
3I>--> Trip Io>>>--> Trip Iub> Trip DI2 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
3I>>--> Start 3Ith> Start DI3 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
3I>>--> Trip 3Ith> Trip DI4 DI8 Interlocking Lockout DI8

3I> Trip Io>--> Trip Iub> Trip DI2 DI2 DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Trip Io>>--> Trip 3Ith> Trip DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 MCS 3U
3I>>> Trip Io>>>-->Trip O-->I ACTIVE DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6

3I> Start Io>--> Start Io> Start f1 Start 1 O-->I OPEN MEAS HI ALARM MEAS LO ALARM CB wear1
3I> Trip Io>--> Trip Io> Trip f1 Trip 1 O-->I ACTIVE DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Start Io>>--> Start Io>> Start f1 Start 2 O-->I ALAR1 DI3 DI3 MCS 3I
3I>> Trip Io>>--> Trip Io>> Trip f1 Trip 2 O-->I ALAR2 DI4 DI4 MCS 3U
3I>>> Start Io>>>--> Start Io>>> Start Iub> Start DI1 DI5 DI5 DI5
3I>>> Trip Io>>>-->Trip Io>>> Trip Iub> Trip DI2 DI6 DI6 DI6
3I>--> Start 3Ith> Start DI3 DI7 DI7 DI7
3I>--> Trip 3Ith> Trip DI4 Interlocking Lockout DI8

3I> Start Io> Start 3U> Start Uo> Start DI1 MEAS HI ALARM MEAS LO ALARM CB wear1
3I> Trip Io> Trip 3U> Trip Uo> Trip DI2 DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Start Io>> Start 3U>> Start Uo>> Start DI3 DI3 DI3 MCS 3I
3I>> Trip Io>> Trip 3U>> Trip Uo>> Trip DI4 DI4 DI4 MCS 3U
3I>>> Start Io>>> Start 3U< Start Uo>>> Start DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
3I>>> Trip Io>>> Trip 3U< Trip Uo>>> Trip DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
3Ithdev> Start 3U<< Start DI1 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
3Ithdev> Trip 3U<< Trip DI2 DI8 Interlocking Lockout DI8

3U> Start Uo> Start f1 Start 1 3I> Start DI1 MEAS HI ALARM MEAS LO ALARM CB wear1
3U> Trip Uo> Trip f1 Trip 1 3I> Trip DI2 DI2 MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3U>> Start Uo>> Start f1 Start 2 3I>> Start DI3 DI3 DI3 MCS 3I
3U>> Trip Uo>> Trip f1 Trip 2 3I>> Trip DI4 DI4 DI4 MCS 3U
3U< Start Uo>>> Start f2 Start 1 DI1 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
3U< Trip Uo>>>Trip f2 Trip 1 DI2 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
3U<< Start f2 Start 2 DI3 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
3U<< Trip f2 Trip 2 DI4 DI8 Interlocking Lockout DI8
126

3I> Start Io>--> Start 3U> Start I2> Start I2> Trip U1U2<>_1 Start MEAS LO ALARM CB wear1
3I> Trip Io>--> Trip 3U> Trip I2>> Start I2>> Trip Restart Disabled MEAS HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Start Io>>--> Start 3U>> Start 3Ithdev> Start 3Ithdev> Trip MEAS HI ALARM DI3 MCS 3I
3I>> Trip Io>>--> Trip 3U>> Trip Is2t n< Start Is2t n< Trip DI1 DI4 MCS 3U
3I>>> Start Io> Start 3U< Start 3I< Start 3I< Trip DI2 DI5 TIME1
3I>>> Trip Io> Trip 3U< Trip 3I() Start 3I() Trip DI3 DI6 Motor Runs
Io>> Start 3U<< Start f1 Start 1/2 f1 Trip 1/2 DI4 DI7 DI7
Io>> Trip 3U<< Trip FUSEF U1U2<>_1 Trip Interlocking Lockout DI8
Table 8.2.5-12 High H08

3I>> Start Io>> Start 3U>> Start Uo>> Start DI3 DI3 DI3 MCS 3I
3I>>> Start Io>>> Start 3U< Start Uo>>> Start DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
3I>>> Trip Io>>> Trip 3U< Trip Uo>>> Trip DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
3Ithdev> Start 3U<< Start DI1 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
3Ithdev> Trip 3U<< Trip DI2 DI8 Interlocking Lockout DI8

3I>> Start Io>> Start 3U>> Start Uo>> Start DI3 f2 Start1/2 f2 Trip1/2 MCS 3I
3I>>> Start Io>>> Start 3U< Start Uo>>> Start DI5 DI5 DI5 O-->I OPEN
3I>>> Trip Io>>> Trip 3U< Trip Uo>>> Trip DI6 DI6 DI6 O-->I ACTIVE
3U<< Start f1 Start1/2 f1 Trip1/2 DI7 DI7 O-->I ALARM1
3U<< Trip DI2 DI8 Interlocking Lockout O-->I ALARM2

3I> Start Io> Start 3U> Start Uo> Start f1 Start 1/2 U1U2<>_1 Start MEAS_LO ALARM CB wear1
3I> Trip Io> Trip 3U> Trip Uo> Trip f1 Trip 1/2 MEAS_HI ALARM MEAS_HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Start Io>> Start 3U>> Start Uo>> Start f2 Start1/2 DI1 DI4 MCS 3I
3I>> Trip Io>> Trip 3U>> Trip Uo>> Trip f2 Trip 1/2 DI2 DI5 MCS 3U
3I>>> Start Io>--> Start 3U< Start 3I>--> Start f prot. DI3 DI6 O-->I OPEN
3I>>> Trip Io>--> Trip 3U< Trip 3I>--> Trip U1U2<>_1 Trip DI4 DI7 O-->I ACTIVE
Io>>--> Start 3U<< Start 3I>>--> Start DI5 DI8 O-->I ALARM1
Io>>--> Trip 3U<< Trip 3I>>--> Trip Interlocking Lockout O-->I ALARM2

3I> Start Io>--> Start 3U> Start I2> Start I2> Trip U1U2<>_1Start MEAS_LO ALARM CB wear1
3I> Trip Io>--> Trip 3U> Trip 3Ithdev> Start 3Ithdev> Trip Restart Disabled MEAS_HI ALARM TCS1
3I>> Start Io>>--> Start 3U>> Start Is2t n< Start Is2t n< Trip MEAS_HI ALARM f prot. MCS 3I
3I>> Trip Io>>--> Trip 3U>> Trip 3I() Start 3I() Trip DI1 DI5 MCS 3U
3I>>> Start Io> Start 3I>>--> Start FUSEF U1<U1U2> Trip DI2 DI6 TIME1
3I>>> Trip Io> Trip 3I>>--> Trip f1 Start 1/2 f2 Start 1/2 DI3 DI7 Motor Runs
Io>> Start Uo> Start f1 Trip 1/2 f2 Trip1/2 DI4 DI8 DI7
Io>> Trip Uo> Trip Interlocking Lockout DI8
127
8.3. Measurement
8.3.1. 3I
The measurement function block 3I measures the true RMS phase currents, that is,
harmonics are not suppressed. The current values are updated once a fundamental
frequency cycle, that is, the integration time for the true RMS calculation is one
fundamental cycle.
3I
IL1
IL2
IL3
A051995
Fig. 8.3.1.-1 Function block symbol of 3I
Three-phase current measurement, 3I

IL1 0.0…20000.0 A
IL2 0.0…20000.0 A
IL3 0.0…20000.0 A
IL1 0.0…1000.0% In
IL2 0.0…1000.0% In
IL3 0.0…1000.0% In
IL1 demand 0.0…20000.0 A
IL2 demand 0.0…20000.0 A
IL3 demand 0.0…20000.0 A
IL1 demand 0.0…1000.0% In
8.3.2. Io
The neutral current measurement function block Io measures the true RMS neutral
current, that is, harmonics are not suppressed. The current values are updated once
a fundamental frequency cycle, that is, the integration time for the true RMS
calculation is one fundamental cycle
Io
Io
A051996
Fig. 8.3.2.-1 Function block symbol of Io
Neutral current measurement, Io

Io (A) 0.0…20000.0 A
Io (%) 0.0…80.0% In
8.3.3. Uo
The function block Uo measures either the true RMS residual voltage, that is,
harmonics are not suppressed, or the numerically calculated fundamental
component amplitude of the residual voltage. A HMI parameter or a serial
communication parameter can be used for selecting the measuring mode. The
voltage value is updated once a fundamental frequency cycle, that is, the integration
time for the true RMS calculation, is one fundamental cycle.
128
Uo
Uo
A051997
Fig. 8.3.3.-1 Function block symbol of Uo
Residual voltage measurement, Uo

Uo 0…440000 V
Uo 0.0…120.0% Un
8.3.4. DREC
The transient disturbance recorder DREC is used for recording current waveforms
and, when available, voltage waveforms. Furthermore, start and trip signals from the
protection functions are recorded. The amount of recorded signals is standard
configuration specific; refer to the block diagram of the standard configuration.
The default setting for the analogue channels recorded in DREC does not include I0b
measurement. When I0b is in use and it is wanted to record data, the used analogue
channel setting has to be changed in Main menu\Measurement\DREC\
General info\AI chs used.
Recording can be triggered on the rising or falling edge of any or several of the
digital inputs, on an adjustable level of overcurrent, overvoltage or undervoltage, or
the recording can be triggered manually via the HMI, via serial communication or a
parameter, or using a periodic triggering.
Notice that the recordings will be cleared if setting some of the parameters which
cause the device to reset.
Refer to Technical Reference Manual, General, chapter "Relay Setting Tool view"
DREC
IL1 Start 3I>
IL2 Start 3I>>
IL3 Start 3I>>>
Io Start Io>
Iob Start Io>>
BI1 Start Io>>>
BI2 Start 3Iub>
BI3 Start 3Ith>
BI4 Trip 3I>
BI5 Trip 3I>>
BI6 Trip 3I>>>
BI7 Trip Io>
BI8 Trip Io>>
BI9 Trip Io>>>
BI10 Trip 3Iub>
BI11 Trip 3Ith>
BI12
BI13
BI14
BI15
BI16
EXT_TRG
A051998
Fig. 8.3.4.-1 Function block symbol of DREC
129
Transient disturbance recorder, DREC

Operation mode Saturation
Overwrite
Extension
Pre-trg time 0…100%
Over limit ILx 0.00…40.00 x In
Over limit Io 0.00…40.00 x In
Over limit Uo 0.00…2.00 x Un
AI filter time 0.000…60.000 s
The recording can be triggered by any (or several) of the alternatives listed below:
• triggering on the rising or falling edge of any (or several) of the digital inputs
• triggering on undercurrent, undervoltage
• triggering via serial communication or a parameter
• periodic triggering
The recording length depends on the number of recordings and inputs used. For example, the following
combination of recording length, number of recordings and number of inputs is available at 50 Hz
(in parentheses the total recording time at 60 Hz):
# recordings \ # inputs 1 2 3 4a 5 6 7b
1066 cyc. 581 cyc. 399 cyc. 304 cyc. 246 cyc. 206 177 cyc.
1 21.3 s 11.6 s 8.0 s 6.1 s 4.9 s ( 4.1 s 3.5 s
(17.8 s) (9.7 s) (6.7 s) (5.1 s) 4.1 s) (3.4 s) (3.0 s)
212 cyc. 116 cyc. 79 cyc. 60 cyc. 49 cyc. 41 35 cyc.
5 4.2 s 2.3 s 1.6 s 1.2 s 1.0 s 0.8 s 0.7 s
(3.5 s) (1.9 s) (1.3 s) (1.0 s) (0.8 s) (0.7 s) (0.6 s)
106 cyc. 57 39 cyc. 30 cyc. 24 cyc. 20 cyc. 17 cyc.
10 2.1 s 1.1 s ( 0.8 s 0.6 s 0.5 s 0.4 s 0.34 s
(1.8 s) 1.0 s) (0.7 s) (0.5 s) (0.4 s) (0.3 s) (0.28 s)
a. Used in Basic and Medium configurations
b. Used in High and Sensor configurations
130
Table 8.3.4-1 DREC digital inputs (Trip 1...5 are Output SWGRP signals.)
Input B01/B02 M01/M02 H01 a H02 H03 H04
BI1 Start 3I> Start 3I> Start 3I>--> Start 3I>--> Start 3I> Start 3I>
BI2 Start 3I>> Start 3I>> Start 3I>>--> Start 3I>>--> Start 3I>> Start 3I>>
BI3 Start 3I>>> Start 3I>>> Start 3I>>> Start 3I> Start 3I>>> Start 3I>>>
BI4 Start Io> Start Io>--> Start Io>--> Start 3I>> Start Io>--> Start Io>-->
BI5 Start Io>> Start Io>>--> Start Io>>--> Start Io>--> Start Io>>--> Start Io>>-->
BI6 Start Io>>> Start Io>>>--> Start Io>>>--> Start Io>>--> Start Io>>>--> Start Io>>>-->
BI7 Start Iub> Start Iub> Start Iub> Start Io>>>--> Start Iub> Start Io>
BI8 Start 3Ith> Start 3Ith> Start 3Ith> Start Iub> Start 3Ith> Start Io>>
BI9 Trip 3I> Trip 3I> Trip 3I>--> Start 3Ith> Trip 3I> Start Io>>>
BI10 Trip 3I>> Trip 3I>> Trip 3I>>--> Start1 f1 Trip 3I>> Start Iub>
BI11 Trip 3I>>> Trip 3I>>> Trip 3I>>> Start2 f1 Trip 3I>>> Start 3Ith>
BI12 Trip Io> Trip Io>--> Trip Io>--> Trip1 Trip Io>--> Start 3I>-->
BI13 Trip Io>> Trip Io>>--> Trip Io>>--> Trip2 Trip Io>>--> Start1 f1
BI14 Trip Io>>> Trip Io>>>--> Trip Io>>>--> Trip3 Trip Io>>>--> Start2 f1
BI15 Trip Iub> Trip Iub> Trip Iub> Trip4 Trip Iub> Trip1
BI16 Trip 3Ith> Trip 3Ith> Trip 3Ith> Trip5 Trip 3Ith> Trip2
Input H05/H08 b H06 H07 H09 b H50 b H51 b

BI1 Start 3I> Start 3I> Start 3I> Start 3I> Start 3I> Start 3I>
BI2 Start 3I>> Start 3I>> Start 3I>> Start 3I>> Start 3I>> Start 3I>>
BI3 Start 3I>>> Start 3U> Start 3I>>> Start 3I>>> Start 3I>>> Start 3I>>>
BI4 Start Io> Start 3U>> Start Io>--> Start Io> Start Io> Start Io>-->
BI5 Start Io>> Start 3U< Start Io>>--> Start Io>> Start Io>> Start Io>>-->
BI6 Start Io>>> Start 3U<< Start Io> Start Io>>> Start Io>-->/Io>>--> Start Io>/Io>>
BI7 Start 3U> Start Uo> Start Io>> Start 3U> Start 3I>-->/3I>>--> Start 3U</3U>
BI8 Start 3U>> Start Uo>> Start 3Ithdev> Start 3U>> Start 3U>/3U>> Start 3Ithdev>
BI9 Start 3U< Start Uo>>> Start I2>/I2>> Start 3U< Start 3U</3U<< Start I2>
BI10 Start 3U<< Start 1 f1 Start Is2t n< Start 3U<< Start 1/Start 2 f1 Start Is2t, n<
BI11 Start Uo> Start 2 f1 Start 3I< Start Uo> Start 1/Start 2 f2 Start 1/Start 2 f1
BI12 Start Uo>> Start 1 f2 Start 3U>/3U>> Start Uo>> Start Uo> Start 1/Start 2 f2
BI13 Start Uo>>> Start 2 f2 Start 3U</3U<< Start Uo>>> Start Uo>> Start 3I>>-->
BI14 Trip 1 Trip 1 Start1/Start2 f1 Start1/Start2 f1 Start U1<U1U2> Start Uo>
BI15 Trip 2 Trip 2 Trip1 Start1/Start2 f2 f prot. f prot.
BI16 Trip 3 Trip 3 Trip2 Trip1 Trip1 Trip1
a. H01 not available with transformers

b. H08, H09, H50, H51 not available with sensors
131
8.3.5. 3U
The measurement function block 3U measures true RMS phase-to-earth or phase-to-
phase voltages. If voltage dividers are used, as in configurations H01S-H07S, only
phase-to-earth voltages can be measured. If voltage transformers are used, as in
configurations H02-H07, H50 and H51 only phase-to-phase voltages can be
measured. As an exception from these, in configurations H08 and H09, voltage
transformers are used and phase-to-earth voltage is measured. The voltage values
are updated once per fundamental frequency cycle, that is, the integration time for
true RMS calculation is one fundamental cycle.
3U
UL1_U12
UL2_U23
UL3_U31
A051999
Fig. 8.3.5.-1 Function block symbol of 3U
Three-phase voltage measurement, 3U

UL1_U12 0.00...999.99 kV UL1_U12 average 0.00...999.99 kV
UL1_U12 0.00...2.00 x Un UL1_U12 average 0.00...2.00 x Un
8.3.6. 3U_B
The measurement function block 3U_B measures true RMS phase-to-earth or phase-
to-phase voltages. In configurations H08 and H09, 3U_B measures the calculated
phase-to-phase voltage. The voltage values are updated once per fundamental
frequency cycle, that is, the integration time for true RMS calculation is one
fundamental cycle.
3U_B
UL1_U12
UL2_U23
UL3_U31
A052000
Fig. 8.3.6.-1 Function block symbol of 3U_B
Three-phase voltage measurement, 3U_B

132
8.3.7. f
The measurement function block f measures the frequency of the network.
A052001
Fig. 8.3.7.-1 Function block symbol of f
System frequency measurement, f

Frequency 10.00...75.00 Hz
Average Freq. 10.00...75.00 Hz
Voltage U 0.0...2.0 x Un
8.3.8. PQE
The measurement function block PQE measures fundamental frequency three-phase
power and energy.
PQE
A052002
Fig. 8.3.8.-1 Function block symbol of PQE
Three-phase power and energy measurement, PQE

P3 (kW) -999999...999999 kW Q3 demand (kVAr) -999999...999999 kVAr
Q3 (kVAr) -999999...999999 kVAr Energy kWh 0...999999999 kWh
Power factor DPF -1.00...1.00 Reverse kWh 0...999999999 kWh
Power factor PF -1.00...1.00 Energy kvarh 0...999999999 kVArh
P3 demand (kW) -999999...999999 kW Reverse kvarh 0...999999999 kVArh
8.3.9. AI1
The analog measuring block is used for supervising current limits and for
determining the state of the motor (running/stopped) in H07 and H51.
AI1
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
A052003
Fig. 8.3.9.-1 Function block symbol of AI1
Analog input, AI1

Limit selection Not in use High alarm -10000.00000...10000.00000
HW, HA, LW, LA Low alarm -10000.00000...10000.00000
HW, HA HA start delay 1.0...300.0 s
LW, LA HA reset delay 1.0...300.0 s
HW, LW LA start delay 1.0...300.0 s
HA, LA LA reset delay 1.0...300.0 s
HW
HA
LW
LA
133
8.4. Condition monitoring
8.4.1. CB wear1
In the circuit-breaker wear function block CB wear1, calculating the electrical wear
of the circuit breaker is based on the current in each phase before opening. The
breaker wear is calculated for each phase separately and when the accumulated
breaker wear has reached the setting value, the function block will issue an alarm
signal.
The function block uses a 16-point setting table
(Main menu\Cond.Monit.\CB wear1\ Control settings) for the
current and the corresponding breaker wear value. The calculation is based on linear
interpolation using the table. Typically, the breaker wear increases in proportion to
the square of the current. However, the interpolation table solution provides a close
match and facilitates the configuration.
CB wear
OPEN ALARM
BINOPEN
BINCLOSE
A052004
Fig. 8.4.1.-1 Function block symbol of CB wear1
8.4.2. TCS1
The trip-circuit supervision function block TCS1 does not perform the supervision
itself but it is used as an aid for configuration. The functional part belongs mainly to
the self-supervision tasks of the PS_ card.
TCS1
TCSSTATE
BS ALARM
A052005
Fig. 8.4.2.-1 Function block symbol of TCS1
8.4.3. MCS 3I
The supervision function block MCS 3I detects interruptions in energizing current
circuits. The function block supervises the energizing circuits by comparing the
measured phase currents. If one or two phase currents exceed the setting “High
limit”, while the measured phase current in the remaining one or two phases is below
the setting “Low limit”, the output ALARM is activated after the adjustable alarm
delay.
The function block is disabled if all input currents are below the setting “Low limit”.
The ALARM output will reset automatically when the fault disappears.
The phase current supervision function block operates on the numerically calculated
fundamental frequency component of the phase currents.
MCS 3I
ALARM
A052006
Fig. 8.4.3.-1 Function block symbol of MCS 3I
134
8.4.4. MCS 3U
The supervision function block MCS 3U detects interruptions in energizing voltage
circuits. The user can select three-phase or two-phase operation. The function block
can also be set out of use by means of the parameter.
The function block supervises the energizing circuits by comparing the measured
voltages. If one or two voltages exceed the setting “High limit”, while the measured
values of the remaining one or two voltages are below the “Low limit”, the output
ALARM is activated after the set alarm delay.
The function block is disabled if all input voltages are below the setting “Low limit”.
The ALARM output resets automatically when the fault disappears.
MCS 3U
ALARM
A052007
Fig. 8.4.4.-1 Function block symbol of MCS 3U
8.4.5. TIME1
The time measuring block TIME1 is used for measuring the motor running time in
H07 and H51.
TIME1
ALARM
A052008
Fig. 8.4.5.-1 Function block symbol of TIME1
135
8.5. Power quality
8.5.1. PQ 3Inf
The current waveform distortion measurement function block PQ 3Inf is used for
measuring the harmonics and monitoring the power quality in distribution networks.
Although the European Standard EN 50160 concerns voltage distortion, the same
standard is applied to current distortion measurements in PQ 3Inf. Measuring
principles for individual harmonics and THD are adapted from the International
standard IEC 61000-4-7. The American standard IEEE Std 1159 is also partly
supported.
The function block measures quasi-stationary (slowly varying) harmonics up to
13th. Distortion measurement does not include rapidly changing harmonics,
interharmonics or other spurious components.
PQ 3Inf
TRIGG HAR_HIGH
RESET CUM_HIGH
A052009
Fig. 8.5.1.-1 Function block symbol of PQ 3Inf
Current waveform distortion measurement, PQ 3Inf

Measuring modes Not in use; L1; L2; L3; Worst phase
Measurement activation Triggering by: setting parameter, binary input, date & time setting
Triggering mode Single; Continuous; Periodic
Distortion factor THD; TDD
Monitored values
THD (3 sec and 10 min mean 0.0... 1000.0%
values)
Harmonic components from 1st to 0.0... 1000.0% In
13th (3 sec mean values)
Harmonic components from 2nd to 0.0... 1000.0% In
13th (10 min mean values)
Statistics
Observation times for statistics 1 hour; 12 hours; 1 day; 2 days; 3 days; 4 days; 5 days; 6 days; 1
week
Percentile setting 90.0... 99.5%
Percentiles for each harmonic and
THD 0.0... 1000.0% In
Five fixed percentiles (1,5,50,95,99)
for one selectable harmonic or THD 0.0... 1000.0% In
Maximum values for each harmonic
and THD 0.0... 1000.0% In
Recorded data One data set for updating; One data set from the previous
observation period
Harmonic limit supervision
Limit for THD 0.0... 60.0%
Limits for each harmonic 0.0... 40.0% In
Recorded data If any limit should be exceeded, the whole harmonic set will be
recorded during the maximum THD (3 sec values)
Operation criteria
Fundamental frequency 0.9... 1.1 Fn
Frequency deviation ≤ 0.5 Hz (difference between max. and min. values within 1s)
Amplitude of the fundamental wave ≥ 1% In
Measurement accuracy
Measured harmonic Im = 1st,...,10th In accordance with IEC 61000-4-7
Measured harmonic Im = 11th,..,13th ± 1.0% In, if Im < 10% In; ± 10% In, if Im ≥ 10% In
136
8.5.2. PQ 3Unf
The function block PQ 3Unf is used for measuring the harmonics and monitoring
the power quality in distribution networks. Power quality measurements carried out
by the function block PQ 3Unf follow the European Standard EN 50160. Data
collection and analysis is done according to EN 50160. Measuring principles for
individual harmonics and THD are adapted from the International standard IEC
61000-4-7. The American standard IEEE Std 1159 is also partly supported.
The function block measures quasi-stationary (slowly varying) harmonics up to
13th.
Distortion measurement does not include rapidly changing harmonics,
interharmonics or other spurious components.
PQ 3Unf
TRIGG HAR_HIGH
RESET CUM_HIGH
A052010
Fig. 8.5.2.-1 Function block symbol of PQ 3Unf
Voltage waveform distortion measurement, PQ 3Unf

Measuring modes Not in use, L1, L2, L3, Worst phase, L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1
Worst main
Measurement activation Triggering by: setting parameter, binary input, date & time
setting
Triggering mode Single, Continuous, Periodic
Monitored values
THD (3 sec and 10 min mean values) 0.0... 120.0%
Harmonic components from 1st to 13th (3
sec mean values) 0.0... 120.0% Un
Harmonic components from 2nd to 13th (10
min mean values) 0.0... 120.0% Un
Statistics
Observation times for statistics 1 hour; 12 hours; 1 day; 2 days; 3 days; 4 days; 5 days;
6 days; 1 week
Percentile setting 90.0... 99.5%
Percentiles for each harmonic and THD 0.0... 120.0% Un
Five fixed percentiles (1,5,50,95,99) for one 0.0... 120.0% Un
selectable harmonic or THD
Maximum values for each harmonic and 0.0... 120.0% Un
THD
Recorded data One data set for updating; One data set from the
previous observation period
Harmonic limit supervision
Limit for THD 0.1... 30.0%
Limits for each harmonic 0.0... 20.0% Un
Recorded data If any limit should be exceeded, the whole harmonic set
will be recorded during the maximum THD (3 sec values)
Operation criteria
Fundamental frequency 0.9... 1.1 Fn
Frequency deviation ≤ 0.5 Hz (difference between max. and min. values within
one second)
Amplitude of the fundamental wave ≥ 0.7 Un
Measurement accuracy
Measured harmonic Im = 1st,..., 10th In accordance with IEC 61000-4-7
Measured harmonic Im = 11th,..., 13th ± 0.3% Un, if Um < 3% Un; ± 10% Un, if Um ≥ 3% Un
137
8.6. Standard functions
8.6.1. Switchgroups (SWGRP)

The switchgroups are used for changing the functionality of the standard
configuration via the HMI or using the Relay Setting Tool.
8.6.2. Selectors
The selectors are used for routing signals and connecting inputs. Every digital input
can be connected to an input signal (for example Blocking 1, Master trip) via a
selector. Likewise, an output signal can be connected to an output relay (Trip1,
Alarm 1) via a selector.
138
9. Example substations
All the application examples are designed for typical HV/MV substations like
below.
3I > 50/51 M CS 000
3I 2f > 68 TC S
CBCM 0 I
C B FP 62
3 I~ harm R
3I I0
REX 5 2 1 B 0 1
3I > 50/51 M CS 000
I 0> TC S
50N/51N
CBCM 0 I
C B FP 62
3 I~ harm R
3I I0
REX 5 2 1 B 0 1
3I > 50/51 M CS 000

3I > 50/51 M CS 000
I 0> TC S
TC S 50N/51N
I 0> 50N/51N
CBCM 0 I
CBCM 0 I I> 46
I> 46
3 I~ harm R
3 I~ harm R 3 49F
3 49F
C B FP 62
C B FP 62
0 I 79 3I I0
3I I0
REX 5 2 1 B 0 1
REX 5 2 1 B 0 2
A052011
Fig. 9.-1 Typical HV/MV substation 1
139
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
U0 > 59N (67N) TCS
CBCM 0 I
CBFP 62
3I~harm R
3I
U0
REX 521 M01
3I > 50/51 MCS 000 3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 67N TCS TCS

I 0> 67N
CBCM 0 I CBCM 0 I
I> 46 I> 46
3I~harm R 3I~harm R
3 49F 3 49F
CBFP 62 CBFP 62
0 I 79 I0
3I 3I I0
U0 U0
REX 521 M02 REX 521 M01

A052012
140
3I> 67 3I> 67
3I > 50/51 3I > 50/51
CBFP */62 CBFP */62

REX 521 H02 REX 521 H02
Incoming feeder, Incoming feeder,
High H02 High H02
U 0> 59N 3I > 50/51 3I> 50/51 3I > 50/51 U 0> 59N
3U> I 0> 50N/51N I 0> 50N/51N 3U> 59

59 CBFP */62
I 0> 67N I 0> 67N 3U< 27

3U< 27 3I 2f > 68
f< 81U I> 46 I> 46 f< 81U

SYNC 25
REX 521 H06 3 49F REX 521 H06
3 49F REX 521 H03
Measurement Bus sectionalizer, Measurement
cubicle, High H06 0 I 79 0 I 79 cubicle, High H06
H03
CBFP */62 CBFP */62
REX 521 H04 REX 521 H04

Outgoing feeder, Outgoing feeder,
High H04 High H04
A052013
141
142
10. Application examples, Basic
10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01
10.1.1. Features
This application example describes an outgoing feeder of a single busbar including:
• Overcurrent protection
• Non-directional earth-fault protection
• Phase discontinuity protection
• Thermal overload protection for cable/line
The network is either resistance or solidly earthed. The three-phase current
measurement is established with a set of current transformers. The neutral current is
measured in a residual connection.
3I > 50/51 M CS 000
I 0> TC S
50N/51N
CBCM 0 I
I> 46
3 I~ harm R
3 49F
C B FP 62
3I I0
REX 5 2 1 B 0 1 Ap p lic atio n Exam p le 1

A052014
Fig. 10.1.1.-1 B01 is used for protection, measuring and supervision on an

outgoing feeder in a single busbar system. The supplying network
is either solidly or resistance earthed.
143

0
TRIP circuit breaker
CLOSE circuit breaker
Blocking signal to the incoming

feeder (START 3I>>)
Circuit-breaker failure
protection
Breaker wear alarm
Internal relay fault
Blocking signal from

the residual voltage relay
to the Io>
0
REX 521
*) Power flow direction

DC
ES
CB
A052015
Fig. 10.1.1.-2 Connection overview diagram of the outgoing feeder
144
10.1.2. Measurement connections

The three-phase current transformers are connected to the connector X1.1 on the rear
panel. The rated currents of the measuring input are 1 A and 5 A.
REX 521
A052016
Fig. 10.1.2.-1 Connection diagram of the standard configuration B01 with three
CTs in a residual connection
The technical data of the current transformers are set via the Relay Setting Tool or
the local HMI. The settings can be found in
Main menu\Configuration\Meas. devices\. Refer to
Technical Reference Manual, General (see Section 1.3. Related documents) for
further information about how to set the rated currents.
10.1.3. Protection
All the necessary settings for the protection functions can be set via the Relay
Setting Tool or the local HMI. The settings can be found in
Main menu\Protection\.
10.1.3.1. Phase overcurrent protection

The phase overcurrent protection includes three stages. By using all the three stages
and giving each overcurrent stage its own start value and operate time, good
selectivity with short operate times can be obtained.
Normally, a two-stage overcurrent protection is sufficient. However, when the short-
circuit protection is based on blocking between the successive protection relays, the
high-set stage 3I>> can be used for blocking purpose. As this stage (3I>>) is not
used for tripping purposes, the blocking level can be freely set. This means that
when the 3I>> overcurrent stage of the outgoing feeder starts, a blocking signal is
provided to the 3I>>> overcurrent stage of the incoming feeder. When no blocking
signal is received, the overcurrent protection of the incoming feeder perceives the
fault as being within its own protection zone and trips the circuit breaker.
145
For more information about the phase overcurrent blocking signals between the first
and the third application example, refer to the overview diagram on Fig. 10.3.5.-1.
The operation of the low-set overcurrent stage 3I> of the relay can be based on a
definite- or on an inverse-time characteristic. The operation characteristic is selected
within the settings of the low-set overcurrent function block. When the definite time
characteristic has been selected, the operate time of the relay is current independent.
On the contrary, when the inverse-time characteristic is in use, the operate time is a
function of the fault current level: the greater the fault current, the shorter the operate
time. Therefore, the operate time is short at close faults. The definite-time
characteristic can be used for obtaining the time grading steps over a wide current
range and it offers faster tripping times than the inverse time protection at low
multiples of the current settings.
The settings for the over current protections can be found in:
Main menu\Protection\3I>\ … \3I>>>\Setting group 1\. The
parameters Operation mode, Start current, Operate time and Time
multiplier for the function can be set in this setting group.
For example, in Main menu\Protection\3I>\ … \3I>>>\Control
setting\ the Drop-off time and the length of the trip signal, Trip pulse,
can be set.
The data of the three last operations, start or trip, are recorded and the values of the
most recent operation can be found in: Main menu\Protection\3I>\ …
\3I>>>\Recorded data1\…3\.
10.1.3.2. Earth-fault protection

The neutral current can be measured either via a set of three-phase current
transformers in a residual connection, like in this example, or via a core-balance
current transformer. The residual connection can be used in the cases of high earth-
fault currents and moderate sensitivity requirements. In solidly earthed networks or
in networks earthed via a low-resistance resistor or low-impedance coil, the earth-
fault current is high enough to guarantee the sufficient accuracy of the residual
current connection for measuring the earth-fault current. The accuracy of the
residual current connection depends on electrical similarity of the current
transformers. To secure selectivity and stability at high fault current levels, current
transformers with sufficient repeatability are recommended, especially, if the high-
set stage is to operate instantaneously.
The earth-fault protection includes three stages. In the application two stages are in
use, the low-set Io> stage and the high-set Io>> stage. The low-set stage fulfills the
sensitivity requirements of the earth-fault protection and can be given definite-time
or inverse-time characteristic. The high-set stage fulfills the operate-time
requirements and can be used for instantaneous operation.
Alternatively the high-set stages Io>> and Io>>> can be used instead of Io> and
Io>> in the example above, then the Io> stage can be an alarming stage for high
resistance faults. Note that in this application example the CBFP signal has to be
taken out of use for this stage. With the default settings, the CBFP is in use.
146
While using the sensitive non-directional earth fault it is recommended to secure the
earth-fault functionality by using the start signal from a residual voltage relay to
release blocking of the earth-fault protection. By doing this, unnecessary trips are
avoided due to disturbances in the measured earth-fault current.
The settings for the earth-fault current protections can be found in
Main menu\Protection\Io>\ … \Io>>>\.
10.1.3.3. Phase discontinuity protection

The phase discontinuity stage Iub> has a tripping function when used for protecting
overhead lines. In cable networks, where phase discontinuity does not cause
dangerous situations, the Iub> stage can give an alarm signal. The phase
discontinuity protection can be used irrespective of the earthing principle.
An example of a phase discontinuity fault is a broken phase wire that has fallen
down on such a place that the resistance towards earth, the specific soil resistivity,
is very high. The earth-fault protection alone is not able to detect the fault and thus
the feeder is not disconnected. The phase discontinuity protection is specially
important in overhead lines and particularly in overhead lines with insulated phase
wires. Another example of a phase discontinuity fault is a line breakdown and a one-
phase earth fault on the load side. Note that a fault in the end of a long feeder behind
several loads may result in a very low unbalance and thus the phase discontinuity
protection may not operate.
The unbalance of the network is detected by monitoring the highest (ILmax) and the
lowest (ILmin) phase currents. The unbalance is calculated according to the
following formula:
IL max – IL min
∆I = 100% × --------------------------------
IL max
Full unbalance (100%) occurs when a phase conductor is broken before the first load
on the phase. Due to asymmetrical load in the network, the normal unbalance has to
be considered when defining the start value. Since this type of protection cannot be
graded with other systems, it is confined to a supplementary role by the use of a long
time delay, adjustable from 1s up to 300 s.
The settings for the phase discontinuity protection can be found in
Main menu\Protection\Iub>\Setting group 1\, where the
parameters Operation mode, Start unbalance and Operate time for
the protection function can be set.
For example, the pulse length for the trip and the start signal can be set in
Main menu\Protection\Iub>\Control setting\.
10.1.3.4. Thermal overload protection

The thermal overload protection 3Ith> is designed for protection of three-phase
power cables and overhead lines. The calculation of the thermal model is based on
the TRUE RMS measuring principle. The thermal load is calculated by means of the
147
highest phase current value. The 3Ith> applies the thermal model of one time-
constant for temperature measurement, which means that both the temperature rise
and the cooling follow an exponential curve.
The following set values have to be defined for the 3Ith>: the time constant for the
rise and cooling of the cable, the maximum rated load current for the cable, the
maximum temperature allowed for the cable and the reference temperature in which
the rated current has been defined.
The Start output becomes active when the calculated conductor temperature exceeds
the setting of the Prior alarm parameter that can be given a value in the range
40% to 100%. The trip output is activated if the conductor temperature-rise
measured in per cents exceeds the value of the Trip temperature parameter
that can be set in the range 80% to 120%. The delayed trip is set into use by giving
the Trip temperature parameter a value higher than 100% and the Trip
delay parameter one higher than 0. For example, the trip temperature can be set to
120% and the trip delay to 60 min, in which case the function block trips when the
cable load remains above 100% for 60 minutes but does not exceed 120%.
The CU_ALARM output alarms when the measured current has exceeded the level
where, if it remains the same, the cable temperature will reach the maximum
temperature set for the cable.
After the thermal overload protection has tripped, reclosing is not possible until the
calculated conductor temperature falls below the value set for the Reclosure
temp parameter, because the function block holds the trip output active. If the re-
closing inhibit is chosen not to be used, the parameter is set to 100%.
In the initializing stage, that is, when the auxiliary voltage is connected to the relay,
the function block assumes that the cable temperature has risen to 50% of the
difference between the parameter values Maximum temp and Ambient temp.
For example, if the maximum temperature has been set to +90°C (cable with PEX
insulation) and the ambient temperature is set to +20°C, the relay assumes a
temperature of +55°C for the cable.
The necessary settings for the thermal overload protection can be found in:
Main menu\Protection\3Ith>\Setting group 1\.
The calculated temperatures of the conductor can be viewed in:
Main menu\Protection\3Ith>\Output data\.
10.1.4. Connections and signal routings

All the necessary settings for the connected signals can be set via the Relay Setting
Tool or the local HMI.
10.1.4.1. Protection signal routing

The protection trip signal, Trip 1, is routed to the high-speed power output HSPO1,
(x4.2.1/2/3/4) as well as the control-open signal to the circuit breaker. The trip
signals from the protection functions are routed to the output relay via the output
switchgroups. These settings can be found in
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\.
148
As the HSPO1 is always routed to the “Trip 1” output signal, the settings are made
directly in Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Trip 1 where
the checksum for the settings is displayed (255 by default).
Using HMI:
To change the settings for the Trip 1, go to Configuration\Output
SWGRP\Trip 1 and press the [E]-button. The different protection functions are
displayed one at a time. By pressing the [→ ] or [← ] navigation push button, it is
possible to scroll between the different protections. By pressing the [↑ ] or [↓ ]
navigation push button, the specific protection function trip signal can be connected
or disconnected. When the two-stage overcurrent (3I> and 3I>>>), two-stage earth
fault (Io> and Io>>), the unbalance and thermal overload protection are selected, the
checksum for the Trip 1 is 221.
Using Relay Setting Tool:
To change the settings for the Trip 1, go to the Configuration in config view
and Output SWGRP and select the “New value” on Trip 1. Press backspace to
change the value. In the “New value” window the protection functions that are used
can be marked or unmarked. The checksum can also be changed directly. Finally,
the new setting has to be sent to the relay with the Download button. For more
information about the tool, refer to Tools for Relays and Terminals, User’s Guide
A052018
Fig. 10.1.4.1.-1 Changing the checksum value for the Trip 1 in the
Relay Setting Tool
149
Using Graphical I/O Setting Tool

To change settings for Trip 1, go to the Output Matrix. Route the Trip 1 signals
to HSPO1 with a mouse-click in the graphical matrix.
There are three connection options for each signal: “Not connected”, “Connected
and non-latched” and “Connected and latched”. You can change the connection
option by clicking the symbol with the mouse (see Fig. 10.1.4.1.-2).
Finally, the new setting has to be sent to the relay by using the Download button.
For more information about the tool, refer to Tools for Relays and Terminals User's
Guide (see Section 1.3. Related documents).
A052019
Fig. 10.1.4.1.-2 Setting Trip 1 signal in the Graphical I/O Setting Tool
10.1.4.2. Indication and control connections

The output signals can be routed to any of the output relays and in this example the
circuit breaker close-signal is connected to the power output 3, PO3 (X4.1.17/18).
The status indications from the circuit breaker can also be connected to any of the
digital inputs DI1…DI9. In this example DI1 (X4.2.5/6), has been used for open
indication and DI2 (X4.2.6/7), for close indication, mainly because these two inputs
have a common ground.
The close signal can be connected to the output relay PO3 like this. In
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals\, scroll down to the PO3
output and select the close signal.
150
The status-indication signals are also routed from the digital inputs to the circuit
breaker function (I<->O CB1) via the input signal selectors. These settings can be
found in: Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\, where the
different input signal names are displayed and the specific inputs selected. The
status-indication signals are named as “CB pos. open” and “CB pos. close”.
Using the HMI:
To change the settings for “CB pos. open” go to the Configuration\Input
Signals\ and scroll with the [↑ ] or [↓ ] navigation push button to “CB pos. open”
and press the [E]-button. The different digital inputs are displayed one at a time by
selecting with the [↑ ] or [↓ ] navigation push button. Select DI1 and press the [E]-
button to confirm. Scroll to the “CB pos. close” and select the DI2 input.
Using Relay Setting Tool:
To change the settings for the CB pos. open go to the Configuration/Input Signals
and find CB pos. open. Select DI1 in the pull-down menu. For more information,
refer to Tools for Relays and Terminals, User’s Guide (see Section 1.3. Related
documents).
A052020
Fig. 10.1.4.2.-1 Selecting the digital input for the status indication of the breaker in
the Relay Setting Tool
In this application example the open and close push buttons are connected to the
digital inputs DI7 and DI8. Normally these buttons are connected directly to the
open or close circuits of the breaker. By including these to the relay, it is possible to
monitor the whole opening and closing time of the breaker and it is also possible to
151
define the pulse width for the open and close pulse. The manual opening and closing
via push buttons are also disabled when the relay is set to remote mode, and vice
versa when the relay is in local mode, the remote control is disabled. If the breaker
is interlocked and the interlocking scheme is used with one or more digital inputs
configured to the “CLOSEENA” input signal, no close pulse will be sent from the
relay. The open and close input signals have to be selected via the
Configuration\Input Signals\ menu in the same way as for the breaker
status indication signals.
CB 0
REX521
A052021
Fig. 10.1.4.2.-2 Connection diagram for the standard configuration B01 with the breaker status indication and
the control signals for opening and closing of the circuit breaker
152
10.1.5. Implementations
In the sections below a few implementation examples for the standard configuration
B01 are presented.
10.1.5.1. Outgoing blocking signal to the incoming feeder

The start signals from any protection function can be routed to an output relay to
provide a blocking signal to the incoming feeder. The overcurrent stages 3I>> and
3I>>> have also a separate BSOUT signal for blocking purpose.
To use the start signal from a protection function the signal has to be routed via the
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Start 1 or
\Start 2. When the start signals have been routed, the output relay has to be
selected in the Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals. In this
example, the overcurrent stage 3I>> is routed via Start 1 and then connected to the
power output 2, PO2. In this application example, the checksum for the Start 1 is 2.
10.1.5.2. Blocking signal received from the residual voltage relay

To release blocking, the start signals from a residual voltage relay can be connected
to the earth-fault stages in the outgoing feeder. There are two input blocking signals,
Blocking 1 and Blocking 2, which can have different functions depending on the
different protections.
The Blocking 1 input signal is connected to the BS1 input and the Blocking 2 input
signal is connected to the BS2 input of the earth-fault stages Io>, Io>> and Io>>>.
The BS1 in this application example will stop the DT (Definite time) or the IDTM
(Inverse Definite Time) timer and the BS2 will block the trip signal. Refer to the CD-
ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions (see Section 1.3. Related documents) for
more information.
In this application example, the digital input DI9 is connected to the input signal
Blocking 1 and then routed to the BS1 input of the earth-fault stage Io>. The
Blocking 1 signal can be found in Main menu\Configuration\Input
Signals\Blocking 1\ where the DI9 is selected. The checksum for the
switchgroup in Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\
Blocking 1\ is 8 to block Io>.
Normally the Blocking 1 signal is set to release the Io> blocking when the residual
voltage relay starts, and give the Io> protection a permission to start and further
execute trip after the set time delay has elapsed. For instance, this can be established
by inverting the digital input DI9 and use the start signal from the residual relay for
permission.
10.1.5.3. Circuit-breaker failure protection

Every protection function in the standard configuration B01 provides a delayed trip
signal CBFP after the trip signal unless the fault has not disappeared during the set
CBFP time delay. In circuit-breaker failure protection, the CBFP output can be used
for operating an upstream circuit-breaker.
153
The settings for the breaker failure are set separately for each protection function.
For example, to set the CBFP time for the 3I>> go to
Main menu\Protection\3I>>\Control settings, where it is possible
to set the CBFP time from 100 ms to 1000 ms. The control parameter Trip
pulse sets the width of the trip output signal, but also of the CBFP output signal.
The CBFP signals from the protection functions are routed to the output signals via
the output switchgroups. These settings can be found in
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\CBFP. When the three-stage
overcurrent, the two-stage earth fault, the unbalance and thermal overload protection
are selected the checksum for the CBFP is 223.
The CBFP signal is then connected to any of the output relays, via
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals\. In this example, the
circuit-breaker failure signal is connected to the power output 1, PO1.
10.1.5.4. Trip-circuit supervision

The trip-circuit supervision is available for the HSPO1 relay. If the resistance of the
trip circuit exceeds a certain limit, for instance due to a bad contact or oxidation, the
supervision function will be activated and a trip-circuit supervision alarm signal is
provided after an adjustable delay time. The settings for the function can be found
in Main menu\Cond. monit.\TCS1\.
To avoid unnecessary alarms, the trip-circuit supervision can be blocked by the BS
signal, which disables the supervision output when the circuit breaker is open. The
BS signal is configured to be operated by the “CB pos. open” status from the selected
digital input. The BS signal can be connected via the switchgroup in
Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\TCS1\. The default setting of
the parameter is ”Not in use”.
Another solution is to use an external resistor to prevent the TCS1 alarm. Refer to
more information about the trip-circuit supervision.
10.1.5.5. Condition monitoring of the breaker wear

Calculating the electrical wear of the circuit breaker is based on the current in each
phase before opening. The breaker wear is calculated for each phase separately and
when the accumulated breaker-wear has reached the setting value, the function
block will issue an alarm signal.
When the circuit breaker is in the close state, the rising edge of the Open pulse will
trigger the function, which again ends when the circuit breaker enters from the
undefined state to the open state. The function finds the maximum current peak-
value in each phase and uses the obtained values as a reference when interpolating
the breaker wear for each phase by means of the 16-point setting table. The settings
for the breaker-wear function can be found in Main menu\Cond. monit.\CB
wear1\.
The status indications “CB pos. open” and “CB pos. close” are automatically used
for the breaker-wear function. The open pulse for the HSPO1 also triggers the
function.
154
The alarm signal from the breaker wear function is routed via
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Alarm 1\ or \Alarm 2\
to the output signal together with the other available alarm signals from the relay. If
the CB wear1 alarm alone is selected in Alarm 1, the checksum is 128.
The Alarm 1 signal is then connected to an output relay via
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals\, and in this example, the
breaker wear alarm signal is connected to the signal output 1, SO1.
10.1.5.6. Disconnector and earth-switch indication

If the status indication signals are available from the disconnector or the earth
switch, they can be connected to the digital inputs for indication sent as events to a
monitoring system or to include in the interlocking scheme for close-operation of the
breaker. These settings can be found in: Main menu\Configuration\Input
Signals\.
The status indication signals for the disconnector are named as “DC pos. open” and
“DC pos. close” and for the earth switch as “ES pos. open” and “ES pos. close”. In
this example, the disconnector indication signals are connected to the inputs DI3
(open) and DI4 (close). The earth-switch indication is connected to the inputs DI5
(open) and DI6 (close).
With these indication signals, it is possible to prevent or give permission for the
closing of the breaker. The different interlocking options are described in Section
6.2. Interlocking. In this example, the interlocking option “Interlocking_B” is used.
This option allows closing of the breaker only when the disconnector is closed and
the earth switch is open. The different interlocking options can be set in
Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\Close enable.
155
DC
CB 0
ES
0
Breaker wear alarm
1
protection
to Io> Blocking signal to the incoming feeder
(START 3I>>)
REX521
A052022
Fig. 10.1.5.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration B01 with the breaker status indication, the
control and alarm signals.
156
10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01
10.2.1. Features
This application example describes an incoming feeder to a single busbar including:
The network is resistance or solidly earthed. The three-phase current measurement
is established with current transformers. The neutral current is measured via a
current transformer located in the neutral earthing circuit on the LV side of the
power transformer.
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 50N/51N TCS
CBCM 0 I
CBFP 62
3I~harm R
3I I0
REX 521 B01 Application Example 2
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 50N/51N TCS
CBCM 0 I
I> 46
3I~harm R
3 49F
CBFP 62
3I I0

A052023
Fig. 10.2.1.-1 B01 is used for protection, measuring and supervision on both an
incoming and an outgoing feeder in a single busbar system. The
supplying network is either solidly or resistance earthed
157
1
Io>>> TRIP to breaker on

HV side of transformer
protection
OC blocking signal to
the HV relay (3I>> START)
OC blocking signal
from the outgoing feeders
to the 3I>>> stage
0
REX521
DC
CB
A052024
Fig. 10.2.1.-2 Connection overview diagram of the incoming feeder
158

The three-phase current transformers are connected to the connector X1.1 on the rear
REX 521
IncProt

A052025
Fig. 10.2.2.-1 Connection diagram of the B01 for protection of an incoming

feeder and as back-up protection of the outgoing feeders
Main menu\Configuration\Meas. devices\. Refer to Technical
Reference Manual, General (see Section 1.3. Related documents) for further
information about how to set the rated currents.
10.2.3. Protection
All the necessary settings for the protection functions can be set by means of the
Relay Setting Tool or the local HMI. The settings can be found in
159

In the example of the incoming feeder application, the stages 3I> and 3I>> of the
overcurrent protection operate time selectively as a back-up protection of the
outgoing feeders. The 3I>>> stage is used for the short-circuit protection of the
busbar system. The set operate time of a back-up protection stage can be calculated
as follows:
Time grading + Operate time of the

protection relay of the
outgoing feeder
The time grading includes (definite time):
2 X Tolerance of the + Operation time + Retardation time + Saturation and delay

relays’ operate times of the CB of the relay margin
If a fault occurs in the feeder, the overcurrent protection relay of the outgoing feeder
provides a blocking signal to the overcurrent protection relay of the incoming feeder.
If the fault should occur in the busbar system, no blocking signal is issued and the
3I>>> stage of the overcurrent protection of the in-feeder provides a trip signal to
the in-feeder circuit breaker. Therefore, when no auxiliary relay is used, it is possible
to use a minimum operate time of 100 ms when a fault in the busbar system occurs.
The needed time for blocking includes:
Start time of the relay + Input delay on the relay + Retardation time + Margin
(40 ms) to be blocked (30 ms) (20 ms)
(10 ms)
The blocking arrangement can be extended to include the HV side overcurrent

protection of the main transformer. For example, the start signal of the high-set stage
3I>> can be routed as blocking to the high-set stage 3I>> of the HV relay.
The busbar protection and the co-operation of the relays between the different
protection levels can be arranged in many ways and they vary in different
applications. A few examples of how the described application can be changed using
some of the features of REX 521 are described below.
The back-up protection can be made with the circuit-breaker failure protection
function of the protection relay of the outgoing feeder. A fast back-up function can
be achieved because the safety margin can be omitted when setting the CBFP time.
Furthermore, the different time settings in the outgoing feeders do not affect the
operation because each relay has a separate CBFP function. The CBFP function
requires external wiring from the protection relays of the outgoing feeders to the
relay of the in-feeder.
If an operate time of less than 100 ms is required in the busbar protection system and
the non-selective operation is allowed, one possibility is to use the instantaneous
stage 3I>>> with an instantaneous operate time. Then the start current value has to
be set to such a level that the fault most probably is in the busbar system. It is of
advantage if a fault in the busbar system does not cause serious damage due to the
160
instantaneous trip of the busbar system. On the other hand, it is difficult to find the
right setting value since a close-up fault in a feeder can cause the circuit breaker of
the in-feeder to trip instead of the feeder protection relay.
In a double busbar system where the busbar circuit breaker is closed and two main
transformers are connected in parallel, the breaking capacity of the circuit breakers
of the outgoing feeders may not be sufficient and so tripping should be carried out
by the circuit breaker of the in-feeder. Then the current setting of the outgoing
instantaneous stage 3I>>> is set to the same level as the breaking capacity of the
feeders. This means that if the fault current exceeds the breaking capacity of the
outgoing feeders, the tripping is performed by the protection of the in-feeder. An
external control signal can be used for shifting to the second settings when the
transformers are used in parallel operation. Then the stage 3I>>> is active in parallel
operation and inhibited or has other settings when the parallel operation is not used.
The settings for the overcurrent protections can be found in:
Main menu\Protection\3I>\ … \3I>>>\Setting group 1\ where
the parameters Operation mode, Start current and Operate time for
the function can be set. In Main menu\Protection\3I>\Control
setting\ can for example the Drop-off time and the length of the trip signal
Trip pulse be set. The data of the three last operations, start or trip, are recorded
and the values of the most recent operation can be found in
Main menu\Protection\3I>\Recorded data1\…3\.

The earth-fault stages can be used in different ways depending on the used earthing
principle. In this example with a low-resistance earthed network, the two stages are
used as back-up earth-fault protection and as earth-fault protection of the busbar
system. The low-set Io> stage of the earth-fault protection serves as back-up
protection of the outgoing feeders and the high-set stage Io>> as the primary earth-
fault protection of the busbar system. The instantaneous stage Io>>> is configured
to trip the breaker on the HV side of the transformer.
Main menu\Protection\Io>\ … \Io>>>\.

The trip signal (Trip 1) of the protection functions are routed to the high speed power
output HSPO1 (x4.2.1/2/3/4) as well as the control-open signal for the circuit
breaker. The trip signals from the protection functions are routed to the output relay
via the output switchgroups. These settings can be found in
As the HSPO1 is always routed to the “Trip 1” output signal, the settings are made
the checksum of the settings is displayed (255 by default).
161
Using the HMI:

To change the settings for Trip 1 go to Output SWGRP\Trip 1 and press the
[E]-button. The different protection functions are displayed one at a time. By
pressing the [→ ] or [← ] navigation push button, it is possible to scroll between the
different protections. By pressing the [↑ ] or [↓ ] navigation push button, the specific
protection function trip signal can be connected or disconnected. When the three-
stage overcurrent (3I> 3I>> and 3I>>>), two-stage earth fault (Io> and Io>>)
protection is selected the checksum for Trip 1 is 31.

All the necessary settings for the indication and control signals of the circuit breaker
and the disconnector for the incoming feeder can be set as described in the first
application example on Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01 onwards for the
outgoing feeder (except for the earth switch). The settings are made by means of the
Relay Setting Tool or the local HMI. The settings can be found in:
Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\
Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals\
B01 are presented.
10.2.4.1. Blocking signal received from the outgoing feeder

The start signals from the overcurrent protection of the outgoing feeder can be
connected in order to block the overcurrent protection stages on the incoming feeder.
There are two input blocking signals, Blocking 1 and Blocking 2, which can have
different functions depending on the different protections.
The Blocking 1 input signal is connected to the BS1 input and the Blocking 2 input
signal is connected to the BS2 input of the overcurrent stages 3I>, 3I>> and 3I>>>.
The BS1 in this application example will stop the DT or IDTM timer and the BS2
will block the trip signal. Refer to the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions
(see Section 1.3. Related documents) for more information.
In this application example, the digital input DI9 is connected to the input signal
Blocking 1 and then routed to the BS1 input of the overcurrent stage 3I>>>. The
Signals\Blocking 1\ where the DI9 is selected. The checksum for the
switchgroup in Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP
\Blocking 1\ should be 4 to block 3I>>>.
10.2.4.2. Outgoing blocking signal to the overcurrent relay on the HV side

The start signals from the overcurrent protection function can be routed to an output
relay to provide a blocking signal. The overcurrent stages 3I>> and 3I>>> have also
a separate BSOUT signal for blocking purpose.
162
As mentioned above the start signal from the high-set overcurrent stage 3I>> can be
routed to the high-set stage 3I>> of the HV relay. To use the start signal of a
protection function, the signal has to be routed via
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Start 1 or \Start 2.
When the start signal has been routed, the output relay has to be selected in
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals. In this example, the
overcurrent start signal from the 3I>> stage is routed via Start 1 and then connected
to the signal output 2, SO2. The checksum in this application example for Start 1
is 2.
10.2.4.3. Earth-fault stage Io>>> used to trip the breaker on the HV side of
the transformer
The trip signal from the earth-fault instantaneous stage can be routed to an output
relay to trip the breaker on the HV side of the transformer. To use the trip signal from
the earth-fault function, the signal has to be routed via
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Trip 2 or \Trip 3.
When the trip signal has been routed, the output relay has to be selected in
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals.
In this example, the trip signal of the earth-fault stage Io>>> is routed via
Trip 2 and then connected to the power output 2, PO2. The checksum in this
application example for Trip 2 is 32.

All of the protection functions in the standard configuration B01 provide a delayed
trip signal CBFP after the trip signal unless the fault has not disappeared during the
set CBFP time delay. In the circuit-breaker failure protection, the CBFP output can
be used for operating an upstream circuit breaker.
The settings for the breaker failure are set separately for each protection function.
For example, to set the CBFP time for 3I>>, go to
Main menu\Protection\3I>>\Control setting, where it is possible
overcurrent and the two-stage earth-fault protection are selected the checksum for
CBFP is 31.
10.2.4.5. Disturbance recorder

The disturbance recorder (DREC) can be found in
Main menu\Measurement\DREC\. All of the measured current signals as well
as all of the start signals from the protection functions are connected to the DREC
in the B01 standard configuration.
163
The recording can be triggered by any of the alternatives listed below:

• Triggering on the rising or falling edge of the protective start signals
• Triggering on current measurement
• Manual triggering via the HMI or with the external input signal
• Triggering via communication by a parameter
• Periodic triggering
Regardless of the triggering type, each recording generates the event E31. The
triggering time and reason are included in the recording. Number of recordings can
be viewed in Main menu\Measurements\DREC\Control setting\
# records.
External triggering can be made by means of the reserved input signal “DREC trig”
connected to one of the digital inputs. The settings can be found in
Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\DREC trig.
Refer to the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions (MEDREC16) for more
information about the disturbance recorder.
10.2.4.6. Power quality

The power quality function (PQ 3Inf) can be found in Main menu\Power
Quality\PQ 3Inf. The function is used for measuring the harmonics and
monitoring the power quality in distribution networks.
The power quality function can be triggered by any of the alternatives listed below:
• Manual triggering via the HMI
• With the external input signal
• Triggering via communication parameter
• Preset time and date
External triggering can be made by means of the reserved input signal “PQ 3Inf trig”
Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\PQ 3Inf trig.
The function can deliver the alarm signals “PQ 3Inf cum”, an output signal for
exceeding a setting limit for cumulative probability of a harmonic and the “PQ 3Inf
har”, an output signal for exceeding a setting limit for a harmonic. The alarm signals
can be routed to the output contacts via the switchgroups. The connection settings
can be made in Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Alarm 1\
or \Alarm 2\. The “Alarm 1” or “Alarm 2” output signal can be then connected
to an output relay and the settings are done in
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals\.
Refer to the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions (PQCU3H) for more
information about the power quality function.
164
0
CB
DC 1
1
OC-blocking signal to
HV-relay (3I>> START)
Circuit breaker failure

protection
OC-blocking signal
from outgoing-feeders
to 3I>>> stage Io>>> TRIP to breaker on
REX 521
A052026
Fig. 10.2.4.6.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration B01 with the
breaker-status indication, blocking-, control- and breaker failure
signals.
165
10.3. Transformer feeder, Basic B01
10.3.1. Features
This application example describes a transformer feeder including:
• Inrush protection
The application described in this example can serve as a backup protection for a
differential protection of the transformer or as main protection for smaller
transformers.
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
3I 2f> 68 TCS
CBCM 0 I
CBFP 62
3I~harm R
3I I0
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 50N/51N TCS
CBCM 0 I
CBFP 62
3I~harm R
3I I0
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 50N/51N TCS
CBCM 0 I
I> 46
3I~harm R
3 49F
CBFP 62
3I I0
A052027

outgoing, an incoming and a transformer feeder in a single busbar
system.
166
1 TRIP circuit breaker
protection
OC blocking signal from

the MV relay to the 3I>> stage
0
REX 521
*)Power flow direction
DC
CB
A052028
167

The three phase current transformers are connected to the connector X1.1 on the rear
HV
REX 521
MV *) Power flow direction

A052029
Fig. 10.3.2.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration B01 with three
current transformers
Main menu\Configuration\Meas. devices\. Refer to Technical
Reference Manual, General (see Section 1.3. Related documents) for further
information about how to set the rated currents.
10.3.3. Protection

The overcurrent protection includes three stages. The relay measures the phase
currents on the HV side. The definite-time instantaneous overcurrent stage 3I>>> is
set to operate on short circuits occurring on the primary side of the transformer and
most of the transformer winding. The fault currents are limited by the impedance of
the transformer so it does not detect faults on the secondary side of the transformer.
The 3I>>> is current selective and it is set to a minimum operate time or
instantaneous.
168
The high-set overcurrent stage 3I>> is configured to operate in case of a short-circuit

in the poles of the LV side. The stage serves also as back-up at short-circuits in the
MV busbar system. The protection method for the stage is based on blocking and the
blocking signal is delivered from the high-set stage 3I>> of the relay on the MV side.
The low-set overcurrent stage 3I> of the relay is employed as definite time
overcurrent back-up protection for the MV feeders. The stage is time-graded with
the down-stream relay. In this case where this application example is used together
with the second application example (chapter Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic
B01), the operate time will be the operate time of the low-set stage 3I> in the second
example plus time grading. The start current setting and the inrush current and its
duration may have to be considered.
The settings for the overcurrent protections can be found in
the parameters Operation mode, Start current and Operate time can
be set for the function. In Main menu\Protection\3I>\Control
setting\ the Drop-off time and the length of the trip signal, Trip pulse,
for example, can be set.
The data of the three last operations, start or trip, are recorded and the values of the
most recent operation can be found in
10.3.3.2. Transformer inrush

The Inrush 3I2f> function is used for doubling the set start-current of overcurrent
protection in a transformer magnetizing inrush situation or at motor start-up. The
operation of the overcurrent stages 3I>> and 3I>>> can be inhibited by the inrush
function.
Transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when energizing the transformer.
The inrush current may be many times the rated current and the halving time may be
up to several seconds. The inrush current that may arise, would cause the relay to
start practically always when the transformer is connected to the network. Typically,
the inrush current contains a large amount of the second harmonic. Doubling the
operation of the overcurrent stage of the relay at magnetizing inrush current is based
on the ratio of the amplitudes of the second harmonic digitally filtered from the
current and the fundamental frequency.
The overcurrent stage is doubled once the numerically derived ratio I2f/I1f between
the amplitudes of the second harmonic and the fundamental frequency current in one
phase exceeds the value set for the Ratio I2f/I1f> parameter. Thus a set start
current value below the connection inrush current level may be selected for the
overcurrent stages. The doubling can be activated only if the amplitude of the
fundamental frequency current of the corresponding phase is above 2.0% In. A
control parameter is used for setting the minimum pulse width of the doubling
signal. However, the signal remains active until the ratio I2f/I1f drops below the
value set for the Ratio I2f/I1f> parameter in all phases, that is, until the inrush
situation is over, even if the pulse counter has elapsed earlier.
The settings for the inrush protection can be found in
Main menu\Protection\3I2f>\.
169
The signal from the inrush function is configured as an input signal to the standard
configuration and has to be routed to the overcurrent functions when taken into use.
The settings, for which overcurrent stage to double, are made in
Main menu\Input SWGRP\Double\.

The trip signal of the protection, Trip 1, is routed to the high speed power output
HSP01 (x4.2.1/2/3/4) as well as the control-open signal for the circuit breaker. The
trip signals from the protection functions are to be routed to the output relay via the
output switchgroups. These settings can be found in
As the HSPO1 is always named as the “Trip 1” output signal, the settings are made
Using the HMI:
pressing the [→ ] or [← ] navigation push button, it is possible to scroll between the
different protections. By pressing the [↑ ] or [↓ ] navigation push button, the specific
stage overcurrent (3I> 3I>> and 3I>>>) is selected the checksum for Trip 1 is 7.

All the necessary settings for the indication and the control signals of the circuit
breaker and the disconnector for the incoming feeder can be set as described above
in the first application example on Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01. The
settings are made by means of the Relay Setting Tool or the local HMI. The settings
can be found in
In the section below a few implementation examples for the standard configuration
B01 are presented.
10.3.4.1. Blocking signal from the MV relay on the secondary side of the
transformer
The start signal from the high-set overcurrent stage 3I>> of the MV relay (incoming
feeder) can be routed to the high-set stage 3I>> of the HV relay to block the
overcurrent protection stage. There are two input blocking signals, Blocking 1 and
Blocking 2, which can have different functions depending on the different
protections.
170
On the overcurrent stages 3I>, 3I>> and 3I>>>, the Blocking 1 input signal is
connected to the BS1 input and the Blocking 2 input signal is connected to the BS2
input of the function. The BS1 in this application example will stop the DT or IDTM
timer and the BS2 will block the trip signal. Refer to the CD-ROM Technical
Descriptions of Functions (see Section 1.3. Related documents) for more
information about the different protection function blocks.
In this application example the digital input DI9 is connected to the input signal
Blocking 1 and then routed to the BS1 input of the overcurrent stage 3I>>. The
Signals\Blocking 1\ where DI9 is selected. The checksum for the
switchgroup in Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\
Blocking 1\ should be 2 to block the 3I>>.

All of the protection functions in the standard configuration B01 provide a delayed
The settings for breaker failure are set separately for each protection function. For
example, to set the CBFP time for 3I>>, go to
Main menu\Protection\3I>>\Control setting, where it is possible
overcurrent and two-stage earth-fault protection are selected the checksum for
CBFP will be 31.
171
0
CB
DC 1

protection
OC-blocking signal from
MV-relay to 3I>> stage
REX 521
A052030
Fig. 10.3.4.2.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration B01 with
breaker status indication, blocking, control and breaker failure
signals.
172
10.3.5. Blocking signal overview

To clarify the blockings between the different levels in the first three application
examples (Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01, Section 10.2. Incoming feeder,
Basic B01 and Section 10.3. Transformer feeder, Basic B01) the signals are
presented in the following figure.
REX521 Application
3I> example 3
BS
3I>>
3I>>>
TRIP
REX521 Application
START 3I>>
3I> example 2
3I>>
BS 3I>>>
TRIP
REX521 Application
example 1
START 3I>>
3I>
3I>>
3I>>>
TRIP
A052031
Fig. 10.3.5.-1 Phase overcurrent blocking signal overview diagram for the first
three application examples with trip signals from the different
overcurrent stages
173
10.4. Outgoing feeder, Basic B02
10.4.1. Features
• Autoreclose function
The network is either resistance or solidly earthed. Three-phase current
measurement is established with a set of current transformers and the neutral current
is measured in a residual connection.
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 50N/51N TCS
CBCM 0 I
I> 46
3I~harm R
3 49F
CBFP 62
0 I 79 I0
3I

A052032

outgoing feeder in a single busbar system. The supplying network
is either solidly or resistance earthed.
174
1
Blocking signal to incoming

feeder (START 3I>>)
protection
Definite trip alarm

to the Io>
External reclosure
initialization signal
REX 521
*)Power flow direction
DC
CB
ES
A052033
175

The three-phase current and neutral current transformers are connected to the
connector X1.1 on the rear panel. The rated currents of the measuring input are 1 A
and 5 A.
REX 521
A052016
Fig. 10.4.2.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration B02 with three
CTs in a residual connection
Main menu\Configuration\Meas. devices\. Refer to REX 521
further information about how to set the rated currents.
10.4.3. Protection
The following protection functions can be implemented in the same way as in the
first application example (see Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01):
• Earth-fault protection
• Thermal overload protection
176
10.4.3.1. Autoreclose function

The autoreclose function (O-->I) enables different types of auto-reclosing. An
autoreclose sequence is initiated either by a start signal or by a trip signal.
In the following example two auto-reclosures initiated by the start of the protection
are carried out. The auto-reclosures are subject to a preset start-delay time initiated
from the start signal of the protection.
The first auto-reclosure (see Fig. 10.4.3.1.-1) is delayed only slightly to avoid
unwanted auto-reclosures (100 ms). Shot 1 is a high-speed auto-reclosure (short
dead-time 300 ms) mainly used for extinguishing the arc at the fault place. Before
the second shot is initiated, a longer start delay time is used to attempt to burn the
fault (300 ms). The dead time of the Shot 2 is long, a so called delayed auto-
reclosure, that typically lasts minutes (in this case 2 min). Should the fault still
persist when Shot 2 has been performed (after 200 ms), a final circuit-breaker
tripping will follow and a DEFTRIP alarm signal is activated and it can be routed to
an output contact if needed.
The operate time of the protection is longer than the operate times of the autoreclose
function and the final trip time. Therefore the protection operates as a back-up for
the autoreclose function, if the tripping carried out by the autoreclose function fails.
Instant of fault
AR1
(Start signal
from protection)
Trip
Circuit breaker
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3
Start Start Start
delay delay delay
0.1 s 0.3 s 0.2 s
Open signal
Shot 1 Shot 2
Dead time Dead time
0.3 s 120 s
Close signal
A052034
Fig. 10.4.3.1.-1 Autoreclose sequence, when AR is initiated by the start signal.

An autoreclose sequence can also be initiated by the trip signal of a protection
function (see Fig. 10.4.3.1.-2). The trip signal from the protection trips the breaker
after the set start-time of the protection function.
When the set dead-time of the autoreclose function elapses, the function closes the
circuit breaker and a discriminating time (TDDUE output signal) is started. If one of
the initiation signals is activated during the discriminating time, and if the short
circuit current or the earth-fault current increases and the operate time of the
protection function shortens at inverse-time operation, the AR shots are prevented
and a definite tripping will follow. The discriminating time (td) can be set out of use
by selecting the value 0. Normally, this discriminating time is shorter than the
operate time of the protection function, so the sequence is allowed to continue with
the second shot, the third shot, and so on, until the selected sequence has been
completed or the fault has disappeared.
177
Instant of fault
Start
Protection
AR1 operation
(Trip signal time
from protection)
Circuit breaker
Shot 1 Shot 2
Dead time Dead time
Close signal
Discrimination
Time
Alarm
Definite Trip
A052035
Fig. 10.4.3.1.-2 Autoreclose sequence, when AR is initiated by the trip signal.

The reclaim time is always started or restarted at a circuit breaker close operation. A
new initiation signal during the reclaim time will perform the next shot if such has
been selected. When all shots have been executed, the autorecloser is locked out.
When the reclaim time has elapsed, the lock-out function of the autorecloser ends,
if lock-out mode for the autoreclose function has been set to "automatic".
To be able to initiate the autoreclose function with the start or trip signal from a
protection function, a few settings must be prepared. The initiation signals from the
different protections can be found in Main menu\Configuration\Input
SWGRP\, where for example the overcurrent initiation signals are named as O-->I
\3I>…3I>>>.
To select the high overcurrent stage (3I>>) in order to initiate the autoreclose
function, choose O-->I\3I>>. Press [E] push button and scroll the different
initiation signal methods with the [→] and [←] navigation push buttons. The
specific initiation method can be enabled or disabled with the [↑] and [↓] push
buttons. The checksum will be 1 if “3I>> Start AR1” is set and 2 if “3I>> Trip AR1”
is set.
After the initiation method is chosen, the settings for the autoreclose function has to
be made. In Main menu\Protection\O-->I\General setting\ the
operation is taken in use when the AR operations is set to ON and the Reclaim
time can be set.
The different shot settings are given in Main menu\Protection\
O-->I\Shot1…5 settings. To set the first shot as in the example above with
the initiation from the start:
1. Go to the Shot 1 setting.
2. Select Initiation mode as “Start”.
3. Select AR1 oper. mode as “Init Shot”.
4. Set the AR1 start delay to 0.1 s.
5. Set the Dead time to 0.3 s.
Proceed with the Shot 2 setting in the same way and with the start delay and dead-
time settings as in the example or as the functionality requires.
178
To make the initiation by the trip signal:

1. Go to the Shot 1 setting, select Initiation mode as “Trip”.
2. Select AR1 oper. mode as “Init Shot”.
3. Set the first Dead time as the requirements.
The Shot 2 and the ongoing shots are made in the same way.
The open signal from the autorecloser is connected as the trip directly to the HSPO1
and the close signal is connected to the same output signal as the close signal from
the circuit breaker function. The reclose signal is depended on the interlocking
method chosen for closing of the breaker. If the trip is activated during the close-
pulse period, the close signal is deactivated.
Alarms and action signals are available as three different signals from the
autorecloser. The signals can be found in Main
menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\ and are named as O-->I ACTIVE,
O-->I Alarm 1 and O-->I Alarm 2.
Refer to the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions for more information
about the auto-reclosing function.
10.4.4. Protection signal routing

The settings for the protection signal routing can be implemented as described in the
first application example (see Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01).
10.4.5. Indication and control connections

The connections for indication and control can be implemented as described in the
first application example (see Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01), except the
signals for the open and close buttons that in this example are disconnected to free
the digital inputs for other functionality. Local control can be executed via the HMI
according to the instructions in REX 521 Operator’s Manual (see Section 1.3.
Related documents).
179
0
CB
REX 521
A052036
Fig. 10.4.5.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration B02 with
breaker status indication and the control signals for opening and
closing of the circuit breaker
B02 are presented.
10.4.6.1. Definite Trip alarm to output relay

To get the DEFTRIP signal to activate an output contact go to
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\O-->I Alarm 1, press
the [E]-button and scroll to DEFTRIP and take it in to use with the help of the [↑]
and [↓] push buttons. The checksum for O-->I Alarm 1 will then be 32. The O-->I
Alarm 1 signal can then be routed to an output contact, in this example SO2, in
180
10.4.6.2. Digital input to initiate auto-reclosing function

If an external start or trip signal is available for initializing the autorecloser, the
signal can be connected to a digital input of the relay. Set the digital input, in this
example DI7, to the O-->I Ext. start or O-->I Ext. trip in
Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\.
Further in Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\, the external
initiation signal is named as O-->I External. The initiation method is chosen
and in this example Trip AR1 or Start AR1 can be used depending on the signal
available and the methods parametrized within the autoreclose function.
The rest of the settings are made in the settings for the autorecloser in the same way
as mentioned above.
DC
0
CB
ES
External re-closure
Definite Trip Alarm

protection
Residual voltage relay
to Io> Blocking signal to incoming feeder
(START 3I>>)
REX 521
A052037
Fig. 10.4.6.2.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration B02 with the
breaker status indication, control and alarm signals.
181
182
11. Application examples, Medium
11.1. Outgoing feeder, Medium M01
11.1.1. Features
• Directional earth-fault protection
The network is compensated earthed or isolated. Three-phase current measurement
is established with a set of current transformers and the neutral current is measured
with a cable transformer. The residual voltage is measured with a set of voltage
transformers in an open-delta connection.
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 67N TCS
CBCM 0 I
I> 46
3I~harm R
3 49F
CBFP 62
3I I0
U0
REX 521 M01 Application Example 5

A052038
Fig. 11.1.1.-1 REX 521 M01 used for protection, measuring and supervision on
an outgoing feeder in a single busbar system. The system earthing
of the supplying network is either compensated or isolated.
183
1

feeder (START 3I>>)
protection
Earth-fault TRIP Alarm
Overcurrent TRIP Alarm
Control signal for selecting

the basic angle of Io>-->
(BACTRL)
b
Uo
5
v
REX 521
100V
0,2
dn

da
N
A
DC
CB
ES
A052039
184

The three-phase current, neutral current transformers and residual voltage
transformer are connected to the connector X1.1 on the rear panel. The rated currents
of the measuring input are 1 A and 5 A and additionally, for earth fault, 0.2 A and 1
A. The rated values for voltage are 100 V, 110 V, 115 V and 120 V.
da dn
100V
v Uo
0,2
5 b
REX 521
A052040
Fig. 11.1.2.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration M01

The technical data of the current transformers and the voltage transformer are set via
the Relay Setting Tool or the local HMI. The settings can be found in
further information about how to set the rated currents and voltage.
11.1.3. Protection
The following protection functions can be implemented in the same way as in the
• Thermal overload protection
185
11.1.3.1. Directional earth-fault protection

The neutral current can be measured with a cable current transformer and the
residual voltage can be measured with a set of voltage transformers in a open-delta
connection. In the REX 521 M01 it is suitable to use the directional earth-fault
protection with the sensitive current input. The rated values are 0.2 A/1 A.
In most cases, in compensated and isolated networks the directional earth fault is
used if the sensitive requirements are high and the configuration of the network is
varying a lot.
The directional earth-fault function includes three protection stages: a low stage
Io>--> a high stage Io>>--> and an instantaneous stage Io>>>-->. The protection is
based on measuring the neutral current Io, the residual voltage Uo and the phase
angle between these. An earth-fault stage starts if the neutral current and the residual
voltage exceeds the set values and the phase angle is within the specified operating
sector. The earth-fault function can also be configured to operate as a three-stage
residual voltage protection.
The basic angle of the function can be set to 0°, -30°, -60° or -90°. If the network to
be protected is compensated, the basic angle is normally set to 0°. When an isolated
neutral system is protected the basic angle is set to -90°. It is also possible to use an
external control signal BACTRL for selecting the basic angle (0°/-90°) to be
automatically determined by the earthing situation of the network. The operation
direction, forward or reverse, can be individually selected for the three stages.
The start value of the low stage Io>--> of the earth-fault protection should be set low
enough to fulfil the sensitivity requirements of the safety regulations. The
requirements regarding operate times are mainly fulfilled by the operation of the
high stage Io>>--> and instantaneous operation by the third stage Io>>>-->. The
directional earth-fault protection in this example is configured with two stages,
Io>--> and Io>>-->.
Main menu\Protection\Io>-->\ … \Io>>>-->\.


Related documents).
186
CB 0
REX 521
A052041
Fig. 11.1.3.3.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration M01 with
breaker status indication and control signals for opening and
M01 are presented.
11.1.4.1. Basic angle control by digital input

If an external control signal determined from the earthing situation of the network is
available, it can be used for changing the settings for the basic angle of the
directional earth-fault protection. The angle can be switched in between 0° and –90°.
The usage of basic angle control is useful as compensated network is normally set
to 0° and an isolated network is set to -90°.
187
In this example the digital input DI8 is connected to the input signal BACTRL and
then routed to the BACTRL input of the directional earth-fault functions. The
BACTRL signal can be found in Main menu\Configuration\Input
Signals\BACTRL\ where DI8 is selected. The checksum for the switchgroup in
Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\BACTRL\ should be 3 to change the
angle on Io>--> and Io>>-->. Refer to the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of
Functions (see Section 1.3. Related documents) for more information about the basic
angle control (directional earth-fault function).
11.1.4.2. Outgoing blocking signal to the incoming feeder

The start signals from any protection function can be routed to an output relay to
provide a blocking signal to the incoming feeder. The overcurrent stages 3I>> and
3I>>> have also a separate BSOUT signal for blocking purpose.
To use the start signal from a protection function, the signal has to be routed via
When the start signals have been routed, the output relay has to be selected in
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals. In this example the
overcurrent stage 3I>> is routed via Start 1 and then connected to power output 2,
PO2. The checksum in this application example for Start 1 is 2.
11.1.4.3. Trip-alarm signals from overcurrent and earth fault

The trip signals from any protection function can be routed to an output relay in
order to provide an alarm signal to indicate which protection has tripped.
To use the trip signal from a protection function, the signal has to be routed via
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Trip 2 or \Trip 3.
When the trip signals have been routed, the output relay has to be selected in
In this example, the overcurrent stages 3I> and 3I>>> are routed via Trip 2, then
connected to the signal output 1, SO1. The earth-fault stages Io>--> and Io>>--> are
routed via Trip 3, then connected to signal output 2, SO2. The checksum in this
application example for Trip 2 is 5 and 24 for Trip 3.

All of the protection functions in the standard configuration M01 provide a delayed
example, to set the CBFP time for 3I>> go to
Main menu\Protection\3I>>\Control settings where it is possible
188
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\CBFP. When the two-stage
overcurrent, the two-stage directional earth fault, the unbalance and thermal
overload protection are selected the checksum for CBFP will be 221.
The CBFP signal is then connected to any of the output relays via
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals\, and in this example the
circuit-breaker failure signal is connected to power output 1, PO1.

supervision function will be activated and a trip-circuit supervision alarm signal is
provided after an adjustable delay time. The settings for the function can be found
To avoid unnecessary alarms the trip-circuit supervision can be blocked by the BS
BS signal is configured to be operated by the CB pos. open status from the
selected digital input. The BS signal can be connected via the switchgroup in
Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\TCS1\. The default setting of
the parameter is ”Not in use”.
REX 521 Technical Reference Manual, General (see Section 1.3. Related
documents) for more information about the trip-circuit supervision.
189
DC
0
CB
ES
Overcurrent TRIP Alarm
Earth-fault TRIP Alarm

(BACTRL)
protection
Blocking signal to incoming feeder

(START 3I>>)
REX 521
A052042
190
11.2. Incoming feeder, Medium M01
11.2.1. Features
• Residual voltage protection
The network is either compensated earthed or isolated. The three-phase current
measurement is established with current transformers and the residual voltage is
measured with a set of voltage transformers in an open-delta connection.
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
U0 > 59N (67N) TCS
CBCM 0 I
CBFP 62
3I~harm R
3I
U0
an incoming feeder in a single busbar system. The system earthing
on the supplying network is compensated or isolated.
191
1
Uo>> TRIP to the outgoing

feeders
protection
Uo>> Start to release blocking

of outgoing feeders
OC blocking signal
to the 3I>>> stage
Second settings
b
Uo
0

5
v
REX 521
100V
0,2
dn
da
A
DC
CB
A052044
192

The three-phase current transformers and residual voltage transformers are
connected to the connector X1.1 on the rear panel. The rated currents of the
measuring input are 1 A and 5 A. The rated values for the voltage are 100 V,
110 V, 115 V and 120 V.
100V
v Uo
0,2
5 b
da dn
REX 521

A052045
Fig. 11.2.2.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration M01 for
protection of an incoming feeder and as back-up protection of the
outgoing feeders
further information about how to set the rated currents and voltage.
193
11.2.3. Protection
11.2.3.1. Overcurrent protection

The overcurrent protection can be implemented as described in the second
application example (see Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01).
11.2.3.2. Residual voltage protection

On the busbar, the residual voltage can be measured with a set of voltage
In this example, the directional earth-fault functions are configured to operate as
three-stage residual voltage protection. The directional earth-fault functions include
three protection stages: a low stage Io>-->, a high stage Io>>--> and
an instantaneous stage Io>>>-->. The protection is based on measuring the neutral
current Io, the residual voltage Uo and the phase angle between these. In this
application example the stages are set to residual protection (Uo).
In an isolated network, a three-stage residual overvoltage protection can be used for
the main earth-fault protection of the busbar system and for the back-up protection
of the network. The low stage can be given a sensitive setting and have an alarming
function. Note that in this application example the CBFP signal has to be taken out
of use for this stage. With the default settings, the CBFP is in use.
The high stage can work as back-up for the network and perform trip on the outgoing
feeders. Further, the start signal from the high-set stage can be routed to an output
contact to release the blocking for the non-directional earth-fault protection stages
of the outgoing feeders (see also application example 9.1. for the outgoing feeder).
The instantaneous stage can be configured as busbar protection and provide trip to
the incoming feeder.
The settings for the residual voltage protection are made in the settings for the
directional earth-fault current functions and can be found in
Main menu\Protection\Io>-->\ … \Io>>>-->\.
In Main menu\Protection\Io>-->\Setting group 1, the operation
criteria is set to Non.dir.Uo.
11.2.4. Connections
All the necessary settings for the connections and signal routings can be set via the
Relay Setting Tool or the local HMI.

The settings for the protection signal routing (except the settings for the earth-fault
protection) can be implemented as described in the second application example (see
Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01).
194

The connections for the indication and the control signals of the circuit breaker and
the disconnector for the incoming feeder can be set as described in the first
application example on Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01 onwards. Settings
are made via the Relay Setting Tool or the local HMI. The settings can be found in:
M01 are presented.
11.2.5.1. Start signal from the second residual voltage stage to release
blocking
The start signal from the residual voltage high stage can be routed to an output relay
to release the blocking signal for the non-directional earth-fault stages on the
outgoing feeders of the network. To use the start signal from the residual protection
function, the signal has to be routed via
In this example, the directional earth-fault stage Io>>--> is configured as a Uo>>
protection and the start signal is routed via Start 1 and then connected to the signal
output 2, SO2. The checksum in this application example for Start 1 is 16.

The start signals from the overcurrent protection of the outgoing feeder can be
connected to block the overcurrent protection stages on the incoming feeder. There
are two input blocking signals, Blocking 1 and Blocking 2, which can have different
functions depending on the different protections.
On the overcurrent stages 3I>, 3I>> and 3I>>>, the Blocking 1 input signal is
input of the function. In this application example, the BS1 will stop the DT or IDTM
Blocking 1 and then routed to the BS1 input of the overcurrent stage 3I>>>. The
Signals\Blocking 1\ where DI9 is selected. The checksum for the
switchgroup in Main menu\Configuration\Input
SWGRP\Blocking 1\ should be 4 to the block 3I>>>.
195

The start signals from the overcurrent protection function can be routed to an output
relay to provide a blocking signal. The overcurrent stages 3I>> and 3I>>> have also
a separate BSOUT signal for blocking purpose.
As mentioned above, the start signal from the first high-set overcurrent stage 3I>>
can be routed to the first high-set stage 3I>> of the HV relay. To use the start signal
from a protection function the signal has to be routed via
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals. In this example, the
overcurrent start signal from the 3I>> stage is routed via Start 1 and then connected
to the signal output 1, SO1. The checksum in this application example for Start 1
is 2.
11.2.5.4. Trip signal from second residual voltage stage

The trip signal from the residual voltage high stage can be routed to an output relay
to provide a back-up trip signal to the outgoing feeders of the network.
To use the trip signal from the residual voltage protection function, the signal has to
be routed via the Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Trip 2
or \Trip 3. When the trip signal has been routed, the output relay has to be
selected in Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals.
In this example, the directional earth-fault stage Io>>--> is configured as a Uo>>
protection and is routed via Trip 2 and then connected to the power output 2, PO2.
The checksum in this application example for Trip 2 is16.
Note also that the events (for example start and trip) for the residual overvoltage
protection will be sent from the directional earth-fault stages.
11.2.5.5. Second settings for residual voltage protection

available, it can be used for changing to the second settings of the residual voltage
protection. The usage of different settings can be useful when switching between a
compensated network and an isolated network which results in changes in the level
of the neutral voltage during earth fault.
In this example, the digital input DI5 is connected to the input signal Group and then
routed to the group input of the directional earth-fault functions, which in this
example is configured as residual protection. The Group signal can be found in
Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\GROUP\ where DI5 is
selected. The checksum for the switchgroup in
Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\GROUP\ should be 2 to
change to the second settings for earth fault. In the control settings for the directional
earth-fault functions, the group input has to be chosen for the group selection. Refer
to the CD-ROM Technical Descriptions of Functions (see Section 1.3. Related
documents) for more information about the directional earth-fault function.
196

All of the protection functions in the standard configuration M01 provide a delayed
example, to set the CBFP time for 3I>> go to
Main menu\Protection\3I>>\Control setting where it is possible to
set the CBFP time from 100 ms to 1000 ms. The control parameter Trip pulse
sets the width of the trip output signal, but also of the CBFP output signal.
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\CBFP. When the two-stage
overcurrent, the two-stage directional earth fault, the unbalance and thermal
overload protection are selected, the checksum for CBFP will be 221.
The CBFP signal is then connected to any of the output relays via

supervision function will be activated and a trip-circuit supervision alarm signal will
be provided after an adjustable delay time. The settings for the function can be found
To avoid unnecessary alarms the trip-circuit supervision can be blocked by the BS
Main menu\Input SWGRP\TCS1\. The default setting of the parameter is
”Not in use”.
197
0
CB
DC 1
0
Second settings
OC-blocking signal to
HV-relay (3I>> START)
1
Uo>> Start to release blocking
of outgoing feeders
protection
OC-blocking signal
from outgoing-feeders
to 3I>>> stage Uo>> TRIP to outgoing feeders
REX521
A052046
198
11.3. Outgoing feeder, Medium M02
11.3.1. Features
• Directional earth-fault protection
The network is either compensated or isolated. Three-phase current measurement is
established with a set of current transformers and the neutral current is measured
with a cable transformer. The residual voltage is measured with a set of voltage
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 67N TCS
CBCM 0 I
I> 46
3I~harm R
3 49F
CBFP 62
0 I 79 I0
3I
U0

A502047
an outgoing feeder in a single busbar system. The supplying
network is either compensated or isolated.
199
1

feeder (START 3I>>)
protection
Definite trip alarm

(BACTRL)
External reclosure
b
Uo
5
v
REX 521
100V
0,2
dn

da
N
A
DC
CB
ES
A052048
200

da dn
100V
v Uo
0,2
5 b
REX 521

A052049
Fig. 11.3.2.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration M02

Main menu\Configuration\Meas. devices\.
Refer to REX 521 Technical Reference Manual, General (see Section 1.3. Related
documents) for further information about how to set the rated currents and voltage.
11.3.3. Protection
The overcurrent, the phase discontinuity and thermal overload protection can be
implemented in the same way as in the first application example (see Section 10.1.
Outgoing feeder, Basic B01) and the directional earth-fault protection as in the fifth
application example (seec Section 11.1. Outgoing feeder, Medium M01).

The autoreclose function (O-->I) enables different types of auto-reclosing. An
autoreclose sequence is initiated either by a start signal or by a trip signal.
201
In the following example two auto-reclosures initiated by the start of the protection
are carried out. The auto-reclosures are subject to a preset start-delay time initiated
from the start signal of the protection. The first auto-reclosure is delayed only
slightly to avoid unwanted auto-reclosures (100 ms). Shot 1 is a high-speed auto-
reclosure (short dead time 300 ms) mainly used for extinguishing the arc at the fault
place. Before the second shot is initiated, a longer start delay time is used to attempt
to burn the fault (300 ms). The dead time of Shot 2 is long, a so called delayed
autoreclose, that typically lasts minutes, (in this case 2 min). Should the fault still
persist when Shot 2 has been performed (after 200 ms), the final circuit-breaker
tripping will follow and a DEFTRIP alarm signal is activated and can be routed to
an output (contact if needed).
The operate time of the protection is longer than the operate times of the autoreclose
function and the final trip-time. Thus the protection operates as a back-up for the
autoreclose function, if the tripping carried out by the autoreclose function fails.
Instant of fault
AR1
(Start signal
from protection)
Trip
Circuit breaker
Shot 1 Shot 2 Shot 3
Start Start Start
delay delay delay
0.1 s 0.3 s 0.2 s
Open signal
Shot 1 Shot 2
Dead time Dead time
0.3 s 120 s
Close signal
A052034
Fig. 11.3.3.1.-1 An autoreclose sequence, when AR is initiated by the start signal

An autoreclose sequence can also be initiated by the trip signal of a protection
function. The trip signal from the protection trips the breaker after the set start-time
of the protection function.
When the set dead-time of the autoreclose function elapses, the function closes the
circuit breaker and a discriminating time (TDDUE output signal) is started. If one of
the initiation signals is activated during the discriminating time, and if the short
circuit current or the earth-fault current increases and the operate time of the
protection function shortens at inverse-time operation, the AR shots are prevented
and definite tripping will follow. The discriminating time, usually called td, can be
set out of use by selecting the value 0. Normally, this discriminating time is shorter
than the operate time of the protection function, so the sequence is allowed to
continue with the second shot, the third shot, and so on, until the selected sequence
has been completed or the fault has disappeared.
202
Instant of fault
Start
Protection
AR1 operation
(Trip signal time
from protection)
Circuit breaker
Shot 1 Shot 2
Dead time Dead time
Close signal
Discrimination
Time
Alarm
Definite Trip
A052035
Fig. 11.3.3.1.-2 An autoreclose sequence, when AR is initiated by the trip signal

The reclaim time is always started or restarted at a circuit breaker close operation. A
new initiation signal during the reclaim time will perform the next shot if one has
been selected. When all shots have been executed, the autorecloser is locked out.
When the reclaim time has elapsed, the lock-out function of the autorecloser ends,
if lock-out mode for the autoreclose function has been set to “automatic”.
To be able to initiate the autoreclose function with the start or trip signal from a
protection function a few settings must be prepared. The initiation signals from the
different protections can be found in Main menu\Configuration\Input
SWGRP\ where for example the overcurrent initiation signals are named as O-->I
\3I>…3I>>>.
To select the high overcurrent stage (3I>>) to initiate the autoreclose function,
choose the O-->I/3I>>, press [E], scroll the different initiation signal methods
with the [→] and [←] navigation push buttons and the specific initiation method
can be enabled or disabled with the [↑] and [↓] push buttons. The checksum will
be 1 if the 3I>> Start AR1 is set, and 2 if the 3I>> Trip AR1 is set.
After the initiation method is chosen, the settings for the autoreclose function has to
be done. In Main menu\Protection\O-->I\General setting\ the
operation is taken in use with the AR-operation set to ON and the Reclaim
time can be set.
The different shot settings are given in Main menu\Protection\O-->I\
Shot1…5 settings. To set the first shot as earlier in this section with initiation
from the start, go to the Shot 1 settings, select Initiation mode as “Start”,
select AR1 oper. mode as “Init. shot”, set AR1 start delay to 0.1 s and
set Dead time to 0.3 s. Proceed with the Shot 2 settings in the same way and with
the start-delay and dead-time settings as the example or as the functionality requires.
To make the initiation by the trip signal, go to the Shot 1 settings, select
Initiation mode as “Trip”, select AR1 oper. mode as “Init. shot” and set
the first Dead time according to the requirements. The Shot 2 and the ongoing
shots are made in the same way.
The open signal from the autorecloser is connected as the trip directly to the HSPO1
and the close signal is connected to the same output signal as the close signal from
the circuit breaker function. The reclose signal is depended on the interlocking
203
method chosen for closing of the breaker. If the trip is activated during the close-
pulse period, the close signal is deactivated. Alarms and action signals are available
as three different signals from the autorecloser. The signals can be found in
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\ and they are named as
O-->I ACTIVE, O-->I Alarm1 and O-->I Alarm2. Refer to the CD-ROM
Technical Descriptions of Functions (see Section 1.3. Related documents) for more
information about the auto-reclosing function.
11.3.4. Protection signal routing

The settings for the protection signal routing can be implemented as described in
the first application example (see Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01).
11.3.5. Indication and control connections

The connections for indication and control can be implemented as described in first
application example (see Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01), except the
Related documents).
0
CB
REX 521
A052050
Fig. 11.3.5.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration M02 with
breaker status indication and control signals for opening and
204
M02 are presented.
11.3.6.1. Definite trip alarm to output relay

To receive the DEFTRIP signal on an output contact go to
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\O-->I Alarm 1, press
the [E]-button and scroll to the DEFTRIP and take it in to use with the help of the
[↑] and [↓] push buttons. The checksum for O-->I Alarm 1 is then 32. The O-->I
Alarm1 signal can then be routed to an output contact, in this example SO2, in
Main menu\Configuration\Output signals\.
11.3.6.2. Digital input to initiate auto-reclosing function

If an external start or trip signal is available for initializing the autorecloser, the
signal can be connected to a digital input of the relay. Set the digital input, in this
example DI7, for the O-->I Ext. start, or O-->I Ext. trip in
Main menu\Configuration\Input signals\. Further, in
Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\ the external initiation signal
is named as O-->I External. The initiation method is chosen and in this
example Trip AR1 or Start AR1 can be used depending on the signal available and
the methods parametrized within the autoreclose function.
The rest of the settings are made in the settings for the autorecloser in the same way
as mentioned above.
11.3.6.3. Basic angle control by digital input

available, it can be used for changing the settings for the basic angle of the
directional earth-fault protection. The angle can be switched in between 0° and –90°.
The usage of basic angle control is useful when compensated network is set to 0°
and an isolated network is set to -90°.
In this example, the digital input DI8 is connected to the input signal BACTRL and
then routed to the BACTRL input of the directional earth-fault functions. The
BACTRL signal can be found in Main menu\Configuration\Input
Signals\BACTRL\ where the DI8 is selected. The checksum for the switchgroup
in Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\BACTRL\ should be 3 in
order to change the angle on Io>--> and Io>>-->. Refer to the CD-ROM Technical
information about the basic angle control.
205
DC
0
CB
ES
External reclosure
initialization signal Definite trip alarm
(BACTRL) Circuit-breaker failure
protection
Blocking signal to the incoming feeder

(START 3I>>)
REX 521
A052051
Fig. 11.3.6.3.-1 Connection diagram for the standard configuration M02 with breaker status indication, control
and alarm signals.
206
12. Application examples, High
12.1. Incoming feeder, High H01
12.1.1. Features
This application example describes an incoming feeder to a single busbar with
parallel feeders including:
• Directional overcurrent protection
• Non-directional overcurrent protection
• Synchro-check and voltage-check
This application example is an optional solution for the application example 9 (see
Section 12.2. Incoming feeder, High H02), if there is a parallel generator feeder
connected to the same busbar.
The network is either compensated earthed or isolated. The directional overcurrent
protection is used because of the parallel feeders. There is no earth-fault protection
included in this application example, because residual voltage-based protection can
be located on the measurement cubicle of the busbar.
The three-phase current measurement is established with Rogowski sensors and the
residual voltage is calculated from phase-to-earth voltages which are measured by
the voltage dividers. Phase-to-phase voltage of the busbar for synchro- and voltage-
check is measured by the voltage transformer.
G
3I> 67 MCS 000
TCS
VD
3I > 50/51
CBCM 0 I
CBFP */62
3I~harm R
SYNC 25
3I P
3U U0 Q
f pf E
REX 521 H01 Application Example 8
A052052
Fig. 12.1.1.-1 REX 521 High H01 used for protection, measuring and supervision
on an incoming feeder in a single busbar system with parallel
generator feeder. The system earthing on the supplying network is
compensated or isolated.
207
2
TCS1
HSPO1
0
1
TRIP1 circuit breaker
3 4 1
Q
P
E
X4. 2
P03
R
I
000
U0
pf
17 18
P02
3I ~har m
CBCM
3I> -> TRIP2 to the
TCS
MCS
3U
3I
HV side circuit breaker
f
14 15
P01
protection
9 12 13
50/ 51
* / 62
S02
25
67
OC blocking signal to the
HV-side 3I>> stage (3I>>-> START)
6 10 11
SYNC
3I >
CBFP
S01
3I >
3I>>> stages (3I>-> START)
3 8 7
IRF
5 4
TempAlarm
2
Mains ACFail
1X4. 1
OC blocking signal
1 2
DI9
and the bus sectionalizer
X3. 1
to the 3I>>> stage

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI8
DI7
DI6
DI5
U12b
I ob
Io
DI4
8 9 10
Sensor VD2
Sensor VD1
Sensor RS2
Sensor RS1
Sensor VD3
Sensor RS3
DI3
VT1
CT5
CT4
DI2
5 6 7
DI1
REX 521
X4. 2
DIFF
DIFF
DIFF
DIFF
DIFF
DIFF
0. 2A
1A
5A
100V
1A
X1. 1
X2. 2
X2. 3
X2. 5
X2. 6
X2. 1
X2. 4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
2
2
2
{
{
L2
L3
L1
2
A
DC
CB
A052053
208
12.1.2. Measurements
Following measurements are supported in this application example:
• True RMS measurement of phase currents
• True RMS measurement of phase-to-earth voltages
• True RMS measurement of residual voltage (calculated value from phase-to-earth
voltages)
• Fundamental frequency active power [kW]
• Fundamental frequency reactive power [kVAr]
• Fundamental frequency displacement power factor cos (φ)
• Power factor PF including the harmonics
• Fundamental frequency active energy [kWh]
• Fundamental frequency reactive energy [kvarh]
12.1.3. Protection

The basic overcurrent protection principles presented in the application example
Section 12.2. Incoming feeder, High H02 are applicable, but different overcurrent
protection stages have been used.
In the example of the incoming feeder application, the stage 3I>>--> of the
overcurrent protection of the incoming feeder operate time-selectively as a
directional overcurrent back-up protection of the outgoing feeders. The stage 3I> ->
is used for the directional overcurrent protection of the parallel incoming feeders to
disconnect faulty feeder from the network. The stage 3I>>> is used for the non-
directional short-circuit protection of the busbar system.
12.1.3.2. Synchro-check function

In this application example the synchro-check function is used for checking the
conditions for the closing of incoming feeders circuit-breaker. The synchro-check
function does not allow the circuit breaker to be closed if the criteria are not fulfilled.
The synchro-check function can be used for two different operating conditions. The
most typical case is the one where both sides of the circuit breaker to be closed are
live and thus the synchronism is always checked before the circuit breaker is given
the permission to close. In the other situation one or both sides of the circuit breaker
to be closed are dead and, consequently, the frequency and phase differences cannot
be measured, in which case the relay checks the energizing direction.
209
Operation criteria of the function are:

• Voltages must be in accordance with the energizing direction.
• In cases “Live-Dead”, “Dead-Live” and “Dead-Dead” no other conditions are
checked.
• In the case “Live-Live” also the following must be fulfilled:
• ∆U< dU setting
• ∆f< df setting
• ∆ϕ< dphi setting
Before the function block allows the CB closing, it ensures that the phase difference
will remain within the setting range until the CB closes.
The command mode is used as a basic control principle of the synchro-check
function. In command mode, the synchro-check function directly uses the output
signal to close the circuit breaker. The close command for example from the HMI is
connected to the synchro-check function. When the close command is activated, the
synchro-check function checks the closing criteria and if they are fulfilled, it will
route the command to the output relay of the protection relay. In this application
example the close signal is connected to the power output PO3.
The command mode principle means that the interlocking logic related to the control
functionality will affect the synchro-check function as well. If blocking is needed it
can be carried out by using the ready-made interlocking logic, for example in a case
where the phase-to-phase voltage is missing from either side of the circuit breaker
because of the open miniature circuit breaker (MCB) of the measurement circuit.
12.1.4. Connections

second application example (see Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01). In this
application two different trip signals are used: Trip 1 for opening of the circuit
breaker of the incoming feeder and Trip 2 for opening of the circuit breaker of the
transformer feeder. In this application separate power output relays are used for Trip
2 and CBFP (circuit breaker failure protection) function.

The connections for indication and control can be implemented as described in first
application example (see Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01), except the
signals for the open and close buttons that in this example are disconnected. Local
control can be executed by HMI according to the instructions in REX 521 Operator’s
Manual (see Section 1.3. Related documents).
210
H01 are presented.
12.1.5.1. Blocking principles

The blocking principles presented in the application example Section 12.2.
Incoming feeder, High H02 are applicable, but different overcurrent protection
stages have been used.

All of the current-based protection functions in the standard configuration H01
provide a delayed trip signal CBFP after the trip signal unless the fault has not
disappeared during the set CBFP time delay. In the circuit-breaker failure protection,
the CBFP output can be used for operating an upstream circuit breaker.
example, to set the CBFP time for 3I>> -> go to
Main menu\Protection\3I>> ->\Control setting where it is
possible to set the CBFP time from 100 ms to 1000 ms. The control parameter
Trip pulse sets the width of the trip output signal, but also of the CBFP output
signal.
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\CBFP. The CBFP signal is
then connected to any of the output relays via

To avoid unnecessary alarms, trip-circuit supervision can be blocked by
the BS signal, which disables the supervision output when the circuit breaker is
open. The BS signal is configured to be operated by the “CB pos. open” status from
the selected digital input. The BS signal can be connected via the switchgroup in
“Not in use”.
211
12.2. Incoming feeder, High H02
12.2.1. Features
This application example describes an incoming feeder to a single busbar with
parallel incoming feeders including:
• Directional overcurrent protection
The network is either compensated earthed or isolated. The directional overcurrent
protection is used because of the parallel incoming feeders. There is no earth-fault
protection included in this application example because residual voltage-based
protection can be located on the measurement cubicle of the busbar.
The three-phase current measurement is established with current transformers and
the residual voltage is measured with a set of voltage transformers in an open-delta
connection. Phase-to-phase voltage measurements are established with voltage
transformers.
3I> 67 MCS 000
TCS
3I > 50/51
CBCM 0 I
CBFP */62
3I~harm R
3U~harm
3I P
3U U0 Q
f pf E
A052054
Fig. 12.2.1.-1 H02 used for protection, measuring and supervision on an

incoming feeder in a single busbar system with parallel feeders.
The system earthing on the supplying network is compensated or
isolated.
212
2
TCS1
HSPO1
0
1
TRIP1 circuit breaker
34 1
X4.2
P03
Q
P
E
17 18
R
000
P02
3I> -> TRIP2 to the
pf
0
U0
HV side circuit breaker
14 15
3I~harm
3U~harm
P01
CBCM
TCS
MCS
3U
3I
f
protection
9 12 13
S02
HV-side 3I>> stage (3I> START)
50/51
6 10 11
*/62
67
S01
3I>> stages (3I>-> START)
3I >
CBFP
3 87
3I>
IRF
54
TempAlarm
2
Mains ACFail
1X4.1
OC blocking signal
1 2
DI9
and the bus sectionalizer
X3.1
to the 3I>> stage

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI8
DI7
DI6
DI5
Iob
U23
U12
U31
IL2
IL1
IL3
Io
Uo
DI4
8 9 10
DI3
CT3
VT1
CT5
CT2
VT3
VT2
CT4
CT1
VT4
DI2
5 6 7
DI1
REX 521
X4.2
0.2A
100V
100V
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
X1.1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
21
22
25
24
27
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
L2
L3
L1
N
A
S1
S2
P1
P2
DC
CB
A052055
213

• True RMS measurement of phase-to-phase voltages
• True RMS measurement of residual voltage
• Power factor PF including harmonics
12.2.3. Protection

In the example of the incoming feeder application, the stage 3I> of the overcurrent
protection of the incoming feeder operate time selectively as a non-directional
overcurrent back-up protection of the outgoing feeders. The stage 3I>--> is used for
the directional overcurrent protection of the parallel incoming feeders to disconnect
faulty feeder from the network. The stage 3I>> is used for the non-directional short-
circuit protection of the busbar system.
The directional low-set stage 3I>--> is set to look into the protected line. This means
it is set to operate in reverse direction. The definite time or IDMT mode can be used.
The directional stage 3I>--> of the incoming feeder provides blocking signal to the
3I>>> stage of the bus sectionalizer. Also it will provide blocking signal for the 3I>>
stages of the parallel incoming feeders. The current setting of the directional stage
looking in reverse direction can be 50% of the normal full load of the protected
circuit.
If the fault should occur in the busbar system, the stage 3I>> of the bus sectionalizer
provides blocking signal to the incoming feeders and the 3I>>> stage of the
overcurrent protection of the bus sectionalizer provides a trip signal to the bus
sectionalizer. When the fault is limited to the one busbar sector the 3I>> stage of the
overcurrent protection of the incoming feeder provides a trip signal to the circuit
breaker of the incoming feeder.
provides a blocking signal to the overcurrent protection relays of the bus
sectionalizer and incoming feeders. Therefore it is possible to use a minimum
operate time of 100 ms for the overcurrent protection 3I>>> stage of the bus
sectionalizer and for the 3I>> stage of the incoming feeders when a fault in the
busbar system occurs.
214
(10 ms)
The set operate time of a back-up protection stage 3I> of the incoming feeder can be
calculated as follows:

protection relay of the bus
sectionalizer

As an example the time grading can be:

2 x 25 ms + 50 ms + 30 ms + 20 ms = 150 ms
Back-up protection can be realized with the circuit-breaker failure protection
function of the protection relay. A fast back-up function can be achieved because the
safety margin can be omitted when setting the CBFP time. The CBFP function
requires external wiring from the protection relay of the LV-side incoming feeder to
the relay of the HV-side in-feeder. Notice that in this application example the CBFP
function is only operating in the HV side of the transformer, but fault current will be
fed from the other direction as well if the fault is between the LV- and the HV-side
circuit breakers of the transformer feeder.
Main menu\Protection\3I>-->\ 3I> \3I>>\Setting group 1\
where the parameters Operation mode, Start current and Operate
time for the function can be set. In Main menu\Protection\3I_\Control
setting\ can, for example, the Drop-off time and the length of the trip
signal, Trip pulse, be set. The data of the three last operations, start or trip, are
recorded and the values of the most recent operation can be found in
Main menu\Protection\3I>_\Recorded data1\…3\.
12.2.4. Connections

second application example (see Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01). In this
application example two different trip signals are used: Trip 1 for opening the circuit
breaker of the incoming feeder and Trip 2 for opening the circuit breaker of the
transformer feeder. In this application example separate power output relays are
used for Trip 2 and CBFP (circuit-breaker failure protection) function.
215

control can be executed via HMI according to the instructions in REX 521
Operator’s Manual (see Section 1.3. Related documents).
H02 are presented.
12.2.5.1. Blocking signal received from the outgoing feeder and the bus
sectionalizer
The start signals from the overcurrent protection of the outgoing feeder and bus
sectionalizer can be connected in order to block the overcurrent protection stage on
the incoming feeder. There are two input blocking signals, Blocking 1 and Blocking
2, which can have different functions depending on the different protections. See
Fig. 12.2.5.1.-1.
On the overcurrent stages 3I>-->, 3I> and 3I>>, the Blocking 1 input signal is
input of the function. In this application example, the BS1 will stop the DT or IDTM
Blocking 1 and then routed to the BS1 input of the overcurrent stage 3I>>. The
Signals\Blocking 1\ with DI9 is selected. The checksum for the SWGRP in
Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\Blocking 1\ should be 8
to the block 3I>>.
216
REX 521 REX 521

3I> 3I>
BS BS
3I>> 3I>>
3I>>> 3I>>>
TRIP
TRIP
START 3I>
START 3I>
REX 521 REX 521
Trip 2
3I> 3I>
Trip 2
Incoming feeder 3I> 3I> Incoming feeder
(H02) (H02)
START 3 I>->
START 3 I>->
BS 3I>> BS 3I>>
Trip 1
Trip 1
REX 521 REX 521
START 3I>>
START 3I>>
3I> 3I>
3I>> REX 521 3I>>
START 3I>>
3I>
3I>>> TRIP 3I>>>
TRIP
3I>>
BS
TRIP
Outgoing feeder (H04) 3I>>>
Outgoing feeder (H04)
Bus sectionalizer (H03)
A052056
Fig. 12.2.5.1.-1 Overcurrent blocking diagram
12.2.5.2. Blocking signal from 3I>--> stage to 3I>> stage

In addition to the blocking described in Section 11.2.5.1. Start signal from the
second residual voltage stage to release blocking the blocking signal from the
directional overcurrent stage 3I>--> can be used for blocking the 3I>> stage of the
same relay. With this arrangement we can set the operating time of the 3I>> shorter.
External wiring is needed for this blocking. The start signal of the 3I>--> is routed
to the signal output SO1. The output is connected to the input DI9 which is routing
blocking signal to the BS1 input of the overcurrent stage 3I>> as described in
Section 11.2.5.1. Start signal from the second residual voltage stage to release
blocking.

All of the current-based protection functions in the standard configuration H02
provide a delayed trip signal CBFP after the trip signal unless the fault has not
disappeared during the set CBFP time delay. In the circuit-breaker failure protection,
the CBFP output can be used for operating an upstream circuit breaker.
example, to set the CBFP time for 3I>>--> go to
Main menu\Protection\3I>>-->\Control setting where it is
possible to set the CBFP time from 100 ms to 1000 ms. The control parameter
Trip pulse sets the width of the trip output signal, but also of the CBFP output
signal.
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\CBFP. The CBFP signal is
217
then connected to any of the output relays via


To avoid unnecessary alarms, trip-circuit supervision can be blocked by the BS
“Not in use”.
218
12.3. Bus sectionalizer, High H03
12.3.1. Features
This application example describes a bus sectionalizer of a single busbar including:
• Synchro-check and
• Voltage-check function
The network can be compensated, isolated, resistance or solidly earthed. Three-
phase current measurement is established with a set of current transformers. Phase-
to-phase voltage measurements are established with voltage transformers in both
sections of the busbar.
The High H03 variant of REX 521 is selected to be used in this application because
of the synchro-check and voltage-check functionality. This selection makes it
possible to extend the automatic supervision functionality in the substation. The
synchro-check function does not allow closing of the bus sectionalizer if the
operation criteria are not fulfilled.
3I> 50/51 MCS 000
TCS
CBFP */62
CBCM 0 I
3I > 68
2f 3I~harm R
SYNC 25 3U~harm
3I
3U

A052057
Fig. 12.3.1.-1 H03 is used for protection, measuring and supervision on a bus
sectionalizer in a single busbar system. The supplying network can
be compensated, isolated, solidly or resistance earthed.
219
2
TCS1
0
HSPO1
3 4 1
X4.2
P03
17 18
E
P02
R
000
pf
0
14 15
feeder (START 3I>>)
P01
3U~harm
3I~harm
CBCM
MCS
TCS
3U
3I
9 12 13
protection
S02
Definite trip alarm
6 10 11
50/51
25
68
*/62
S01
CBFP
SYNC
3I 2f>
3 8 7
3I>
IRF
5 4
TempAlarm
2
Mains ACFail
1 X4.1
Blocking signal
2
from outgoing DI9

1
feeders
X3.1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
L2
L3
L1
DI8
DI7
DI6
DI5
U12b
U23
U12
Iob
Uo
IL2
IL1
IL3
Io
DI4
N
A
8 9 10
DI3
DI2
CT3
VT1
VT3
VT2
CT5
CT2
CT4
CT1
VT4
7
5 6
REX 521
DI1
X4.2
0.2A
100V
100V
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
10
12
13
X1.1
14
15
16
11
18
19
21
22
25
24
27
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
P1 S1
S2
P2
DC
CB
N
A
L2
L3
L1
A052058
Fig. 12.3.1.-2 Connection overview diagram of the bus sectionalizer
220
12.3.3. Protection

Overcurrent protection of the bus sectionalizer is used for disconnecting the faulty
sector of the busbar from the healthy sector to minimize disturbances in distribution
of electrical energy.
In the example of the bus sectionalizer application, the stage 3I> of the overcurrent
protection of the bus sectionalizer and incoming feeder operate time selectively as a
back-up protection of the outgoing feeders. The stage 3I>> is used for blocking of
the incoming feeders. The stage 3I>>> is used for short-circuit protection of the
busbar system.
If a fault should occur in the busbar system, the stage 3I>> of the bus sectionalizer
provides blocking signal to the 3I>> stage of the incoming feeders. Also, the 3I>>>
stage of the overcurrent protection of the bus sectionalizer provides a trip signal to
the bus sectionalizer circuit breaker.
When a fault is limited to one busbar sector, the blocking from the 3I>> stage of the
bus-sectionalizer overcurrent protection disappears and the 3I>> stage of the
overcurrent protection of the incoming feeder provides a trip signal to the circuit
breaker of the incoming feeder.
provides a blocking signal to the overcurrent protection relays of the bus
sectionalizer and incoming feeders. Therefore, it is possible to use a minimum
operate time of 100 ms for the overcurrent protection 3I>>> stage of the bus
sectionalizer and for the 3I>> stage of the incoming feeders when a fault in the
busbar system occurs.
(10 ms)
The set operate time of a back-up protection stage 3I> of the bus sectionalizer can
be calculated as follows:

protection relay of the
outgoing feeder
221

As an example the time grading can be:

2 x 25 ms + 50 ms + 30 ms + 20 ms = 150 ms
Back-up protection can be realized with the circuit-breaker failure protection
function of the protection relay. A fast back-up function can be achieved because the
safety margin can be omitted when setting the CBFP time. The CBFP function
requires external wiring from the protection relay of the bus sectionalizer to the relay
of the in-feeder.
the parameters Operation mode, Start current and Operate time for
the function can be set. In Main menu\Protection\3I>\Control
setting\ can for example the Drop-off time and the length of the trip signal
Trip pulse be set. The data of the three last operations, start or trip, are recorded
and the values of the most recent operation can be found in
12.3.3.2. Synchro-check function

In this application example where the synchro-check function is used for ensuring
the condition between two busbar sections fed by own transformers, the voltage
difference between busbar sections is the most important criterion. The synchro-
check function does not allow the circuit breaker to be closed if the voltage
difference is too high. If the voltage difference is high, the inrush current between
the busbar sectors can be too high. In an application where a generator is connected
to one of the busbar sectors other criteria are also important and the need for the
synchro-check functionality is unavoidable.
The synchro-check function can be used in two different operating conditions. The
most typical case is one where both sides of the circuit breaker to be closed are live
and thus the synchronism is always checked before the circuit breaker is given the
permission to close. In an other situation one or both sides of the circuit breaker to
be closed are dead and, consequently, the frequency and phase differences cannot be
measured, in which case the relay checks the energizing direction.
Operation criteria of the function are:
• Voltages must be in accordance with the energizing direction.
• In cases “Live-Dead”, “Dead-Live” and “Dead-Dead” no other conditions are
checked.
• In the case “Live-Live” also the following must be fulfilled:
• ∆U< dU setting
• ∆f< df setting
• ∆ϕ< dphi setting
222
Before the function block allows the closing of the CB, it ensures that the phase
difference remains within the setting range until the CB closes.
The command mode is used as a basic control principle of the synchro-check
function. In command mode, the synchro-check function directly uses the output
signal to close the circuit breaker. The close command for example from the HMI is
connected to the synchro-check function. When the close command is activated, the
synchro-check function checks the closing criteria and if they are fulfilled, it will
route the command to the output relay of the protection relay. In this application
example the close signal is connected to the power output PO3.
The command mode principle means that the interlocking logic related to the control
functionality will affect the synchro-check function as well. If blocking is needed it
can be carried out by using the ready-made interlocking logic, for example in a case
where the phase-to-phase voltage is missing from either side of the circuit breaker
because of the open miniature circuit breaker (MCB) of the measurement circuit.
12.3.4. Connections


control can be executed via the HMI according to the instructions in REX 521
Operator’s Manual (see Section 1.3. Related documents).
223
12.4. Outgoing feeder, High H04
12.4.1. Features
• Directional and non-directional earth-fault protection
• Thermal overload protection for cable or line
This application example is an optional solution for the seventh application example
(chapter 10.3), if extended earth-fault protection against a cross-country fault is
required or wider range of measurements is needed.
The network is either compensated or isolated. Three-phase current measurement is
established with a set of current transformers. The neutral current I0b is measured
with a cable current transformer and the neutral current I0 is measured with the sum
connection of the phase current transformers. The residual voltage is measured with
a set of voltage transformers in an open-delta connection. Phase-to-phase voltage
measurements are established with voltage transformers.
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> TCS
50N/51N
CBCM 0 I
I 0> 67N
3I~harm R
I> 46
3U~harm
3 49F
3I I0 P
0 I 79
CBFP */62 3U U0 Q
f pf E

A052059
Fig. 12.4.1.-1 REX 521 H04 used for protection, measuring and supervision on
an outgoing feeder in a single busbar system. The supplying
224
2
TCS1
HSPO1
0
1
3 4 1
X4.2
P03
17 18
Q
P
E
P02
R
000
14 15
I0
feeder (START 3I>>)
U0
pf
0
P01
3U~harm
3I~harm
CBCM
9 12 13
MCS
TCS
3U
f
protection
3I
S02
Definite trip alarm
6 10 11
50N/51N
50/51
49F
67N
S01
46
79
*/62
I
CBFP
3 8 7
I>
I 0>
3I >
3
I 0>
0
IRF
5 4
TempAlarm
2
Mains ACFail
1
2 X4.1
DI9
1

X3.1

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI8
(BACTRL)
External reclosure
DI7
DI6
DI5
U23
U12
U31
Iob
Uo
IL2
IL1
IL3
Io
DI4
8 9 10
DI3
CT3
VT1
CT5
CT2
VT3
VT2
CT4
CT1
VT4
DI2
7
5 6
DI1
REX 521
X4.2
0.2A
100V
100V
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
10
12
13
X1.1
14
15
11
16
18
19
21
22
25
24
27
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
L2
L3
L1
N
A
S1
S2
S2
S1
P1
P2
DC
CB
ES
A052060
225
• True RMS measurement of neutral current

In this application two neutral current measurements are used. The neutral current
I0b measured by a cable transformer is used for directional earth-fault protection and
the neutral current I0 measured by the sum connection of the phase current
transformers is used for non-directional earth-fault protection.
Main menu\Configuration\Meas. devices\.
Refer to REX 521 Technical Reference Manual, General (see Section 1.3. Related
documents) for further information about how to set the rated currents and voltage.
12.4.4. Protection
The overcurrent, the phase discontinuity and thermal overload protection can be
implemented in the same way as in the first application example Section 10.1.
Outgoing feeder, Basic B01, and the directional earth-fault protection as in the fifth
application example Section 11.1. Outgoing feeder, Medium M01.
12.4.4.1. Non-directional earth-fault protection

A double earth fault occurs when two phase-conductors get in galvanic connection
with the earth. This can occur in the same line or between two lines when the fault
current has to flow through the earth. This fault type is also known as a cross-country
fault.
226
EF in phase L2
EF in phase L3
A052061
Fig. 12.4.4.1.-1 Cross-country fault

Detection of a cross-country fault can be implemented by non-directional earth-fault
protection. In a case where the fault current is lower than the start current level of
the overcurrent protection because of the fault resistance, the separated non-
directional high-set earth-fault stage I0>> can be used for detecting the fault. With
this arrangement it is also possible to get clear indication of the fault type if the
settings are selected so that this protection stage will operate only in double earth
fault situations.
In H04 standard configuration the measurement channel I0 for earth-fault current
measurement is fixedly connected to the non-directional earth-fault stages.

The autoreclose function can be implemented as described in the seventh application
example (Section 11.3. Outgoing feeder, Medium M02)
12.4.5. Connections

first application example (refer to Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01).

first application example (Section 10.1. Outgoing feeder, Basic B01), except the
Related documents).
The implementations for the seventh application example (see Section 11.3.
Outgoing feeder, Medium M02) are also applicable for this application example.
227
12.5. Incoming feeder, High H05/H50
12.5.1. Features
• Overvoltage protection
• Undervoltage protection
This application example is an optional solution for the second application example
(Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01), if overvoltage and undervoltage
protection is required or wider range of measurements is needed.
power transformer. Phase-to-phase voltage measurements are established with
voltage transformers.
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> TCS
50N/51N
CBCM 0 I
3U> 59
3I~harm R
3U< 27
3U~harm
CBFP */62
3I I0 P
3U Q
f pf E
A052062
Fig. 12.5.1.-1 H05 and H50 are used for protection, measuring and supervision
on an incoming feeder in a single busbar system. The supplying
network is either solidly or resistance earthed
228
2
TCS1
HSPO1
3 4 1
X4.2
P03
Q
P
E
R
17 18
000
P02
I0
0
pf
14 15
3U~harm
3I~harm
CBCM
MCS
TCS
P01
3U
3I
f
9 12 13
protection
S02
50N/51N
50/51
27
6 10 11
59
*/62
S01
CBFP
3U<
3U>
I 0>
3I >
3 8 7
IRF
5 4
TempAlarm
2
Mains ACFail
1 X4.1
OC blocking signal
2
DI9
1
to the 3I>>> stage

X3.1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI8
DI7
DI6
DI5
U23
U12
U31
Iob
Uo
IL2
IL1
IL3
Io
0
DI4
8 9 10
DI3
DI2
CT3
VT1
VT3
VT2
CT5
CT2
CT4
CT1
VT4
7
5 6
REX 521
DI1
X4.2
0.2A
100V
100V
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
10
12
13
X1.1
14
15
16
11
18
19
21
22
25
24
27
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
L2
L3
L1
S2
S1
A
S1
S2
P1
P2
DC
CB
A052063
229
Following measurements are supported in this application example.
12.5.3. Protection

application example (Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01)

The earth-fault protection can be implemented as described in the second application
example (Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01)
12.5.3.3. Overvoltage and undervoltage protection

Faults in the network or a faulty tap changer or voltage regulator of a power
transformer may cause abnormal busbar voltages. The overvoltage and undervoltage
protection is used for preventing possible damages to the devices connected to the
network.
In this application the overvoltage and undervoltage protection is included in the
functionality of the protection relay of the incoming feeder. In the overvoltage or
undervoltage situation the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder will be opened.
The overvoltage protection includes two protection stages: a low stage U> and a
high stage U>>. The low stage can be set to the definite-time or inverse-time
operation. The definite-time operation is used with the high-set stage.
Similarly, the undervoltage protection includes two protection stages: a low stage
U< and a high stage U<<. The low stage can be set to the definite-time or inverse-
time operation. The definite-time operation is used with the high set stage.
An operational characteristic example on overvoltage and undervoltage protection
is presented in the picture below (Fig. 12.5.3.-1).
230
85% 115%
t(s)
70% 130% DT operation
100 60 s
60 s
IDMT operation
10
3s
1
0.1 s
70 80 90 100 110 120 130
U/Un(%)
UNDERVOLTAGE
U< = 0.85 x Un, t> = 60 s, DT
U<< = 0.7 x Un, t> = 3 s, DT
OVERVOLTAGE
U> = 1.15 x Un, t> = 60 s, DT
or U> = 1.09 x Un, k = 0.2, p = 2, IDMT
U>> = 1.3 x Un, t> = 0.1 s, DT

A052064
Fig. 12.5.3.-1 Example on overvoltage and undervoltage protection
12.5.4. Connections

The trip signal (Trip 1) of the protection functions is routed to the high speed power
As the HSPO1 is always routed to the “Trip 1" output signal, the settings are made
directly in Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Trip 1, where
Using the HMI:
pressing the [→] or [←] navigation push button, it is possible to scroll between the
different protections. By pressing the [↑] or [↓] navigation push button, the specific
stage overcurrent (3I> 3I>> and 3I>>>), two-stage earth fault (I0> and I0>>), two-
stage overvoltage (U> and U>>) and two-stage undervoltage (U< and U<<)
protection is selected the checksum for Trip 1 is 991. When the earth-fault protection
stage Io>>> is selected the checksum for Trip 2 is 32.
231

In the sections below a few implementation examples for the standard
configurations H05 and H50 are presented.

The blocking signal received from the outgoing feeder can be implemented as
described in the second application example (Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic
B01).

The outgoing blocking signal to the overcurrent relay on the HV side can be
implemented as described in the second application example (Section 10.2.
Incoming feeder, Basic B01).
12.5.5.3. Earth-fault stage Io>>> to trip the breaker on the HV side of the
transformer
The earth-fault stage Io>>> to trip the breaker on the HV side of the transformer can
be implemented as described in the second application example (Section 10.2.
Incoming feeder, Basic B01). The earth-fault stage Io>>> is not found in H50.

The circuit-breaker failure protection can be implemented as described in the second
application example (Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01). CBFP function is
not available for the overvoltage and undervoltage protection.
232

The disturbance recorder (DREC) can be found in Main menu\Measurement\
DREC\. All of the measured current and voltage signals as well as all of the start
signals from the protection functions and the Trip 1..3 signals are connected to the
DREC in the H05 standard configuration. In H50 all measured current and voltage
signals, all start signals from the protection functions as well as the Trip 1 signal are
connected to the DREC.
• Triggering on current or voltage measurement
# records.

The power quality functions (PQ 3Inf and PQ 3Unf) can be found in
Main menu\Power Quality\PQ 3Inf and Main menu\Power
Quality\PQ 3Unf. The functions are used for measuring the harmonics and
External triggering can be made by means of the reserved input signals “PQ 3Inf
trig” and “PQ 3Unf trig” connected to the digital inputs. The settings can be found
in Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\PQ 3Inf trig and
Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\PQ 3Unf trig.
The functions can deliver the alarm signals “PQ 3Inf cum” and “PQ 3Unf cum”, an
output signal for exceeding a setting limit for cumulative probability of a harmonic
and the “PQ 3Inf har” and “PQ 3Unf har”, an output signal for exceeding a setting
limit for a harmonic. The alarm signals can be routed to the output contacts via the
switchgroups. The connection settings can be made in
233
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Alarm 1\ or \Alarm 2\.

The “Alarm 1” or “Alarm 2" output signal can be then connected to an output relay
and the settings are done in Main menu\Configuration\Output
Signals\.
12.6. Measurement cubicle, High H06
12.6.1. Features
This application example describes a measurement cubicle in a single busbar system
including:
• Residual voltage protection
• Underfrequency protection with two stages
The network is either compensated or isolated. The residual voltage is measured
with a set of voltage transformers in an open-delta connection. Phase-to-phase
voltage measurements are established with voltage transformers.
U 0> 59N MCS 000
3U> TCS
59
3U~harm 0 I
3U< 27
R
f< 81U
3U U0
A052065
Fig. 12.6.1.-1 H06 is used for protection, measuring and supervision in a

measurement cubicle in a single busbar system. The supplying
234
2
TCS1
HSPO1
TRIP1 to the incoming feeder
3 4 1
Uo>>>,Uo>>
X4.2
P03
R
000
TRIP3 to all outgoing feeders
17 18
U0
0
Uo>>>,Uo>>, U<, U<<, U>, U>> and f<<
P02
3U~harm
MCS
TCS
TRIP2 to the load shedding group 1f<
14 15
3U
f
P01
9 12 13
59N
81U
59
27
S02
6 10 11
f<
U 0>
3U<
3U>
S01
Earth-fault alarm Uo>
3 8 7
IRF
5 4
TempAlarm
2
Mains ACFail
1
2 X4.1
DI9
1 X3.1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI8
DI7
DI6
DI5
U23
U12
U31
Iob
Uo
IL2
IL1
IL3
Io
DI4
8 9 10
DI3
DI2
CT3
VT1
VT3
VT2
CT5
CT2
CT4
CT1
VT4
7
5 6
REX 521
DI1
X4.2
0.2A
100V
100V
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
10
12
13
X1.1
14
15
16
11
18
19
21
22
25
24
27
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
L2
L3
L1
ES
DC
N
A
A052066
Fig. 12.6.1.-2 Connection overview diagram of the measurement cubicle
235
12.6.3. Protection
12.6.3.1. Residual voltage protection

In a compensated or isolated network, a three-stage residual overvoltage protection
can be used for the main earth-fault protection of the busbar system and for the back-
up protection of the network. On the busbar, the residual voltage can be measured
with a set of voltage transformers in an open-delta connection.
The low stage Uo> can be given a sensitive setting and have an alarming function.
The high stage Uo>> can work as back-up for the outgoing feeders and perform trip
on the incoming feeder and outgoing feeders. The instantaneous stage Uo>>> can
be configured as busbar protection and provide trip to incoming feeder and outgoing
feeders.
The settings for the residual voltage protection are made in the settings for the
residual overvoltage functions and can be found in
Main menu\Protection\Uo>\ … \Uo>>>\.

protection is used to prevent possible damages to the devices connected to the
network.
In this application the overvoltage and undervoltage protection is included to the
functionality of the protection relay of the measurement cubicle. In the overvoltage
or undervoltage situation the circuit breakers of the outgoing feeders will be opened.
high stage U>>. The low stage can be set to the definite-time or inverse-time
operation. The definite-time operation is used with the high set stage.
U< and a high stage U<<. The low stage can be set to the definite-time or inverse-
time operation. The definite-time operation is used with the high set stage.
An operational characteristic example for overvoltage and undervoltage protection
is presented in the following picture.
236
85% 115%
t(s)
100 60 s
60 s
IDMT operation
10
3s
1
0.1 s
70 80 90 100 110 120 130
U/Un(%)
UNDERVOLTAGE
U< = 0.85 x Un, t> = 60 s, DT
U<< = 0.7 x Un, t> = 3 s, DT
OVERVOLTAGE
U> = 1.15 x Un, t> = 60 s, DT
or U> = 1.09 x Un, k = 0.2, p = 2, IDMT
U>> = 1.3 x Un, t> = 0.1 s, DT

A052064
Fig. 12.6.3.2.-1 Example on overvoltage and undervoltage protection
12.6.3.3. Underfrequency protection

The underfrequency protection is included in the functionality of the protection relay
of the measurement cubicle. The underfrequency protection includes two protection
stages: a low stage f< and a high stage f<<.
In this application two load shedding groups are used. The low stage f< is used for
disconnecting the load shedding group 1. The high stage f<< is used for
disconnecting the load shedding group 2.
The trip signal of the f< stage is connected to the power output relay PO2 via Trip 2
signal. This trip signal is used for disconnecting the outgoing feeders of the first load
shedding group.
The trip signal of the f<< stage is connected to the power output relay PO3 via
Trip 3 signal. Also the residual voltage stage Uo>>, under- and overvoltage
protection trips are connected to this power output and those signals have to be
connected to all outgoing feeders. Therefore the trip signal of the high stage f<< will
be connected to all circuit breakers of the outgoing feeders. All outgoing feeders are
included in the load shedding group 2.
12.6.4. Connections

The trip signal (Trip 1) of the residual voltage stages Uo>> and Uo>>> protection
function are routed to the high speed power output HSPO1 (x4.2.1/2/3/4).
237
The trip signal (Trip 2) of the underfrequency stage f< protection function is routed
to the power output PO2 (x4.2.14/15).
The trip signals (Trip 3) of the residual voltage stages Uo>>> and Uo>>,
undervoltage, overvoltage and underfrequency stage f<< protection function are
routed to the power output PO3 (x4.2.17/18).
The trip signals from the protection functions are routed to the output relay via the
output switchgroups. These settings can be found in
As the HSPO1 is always named as the “Trip 1" output signal, the settings are made
The Trip 2 has to be set to PO2 and the Trip 3 to PO3 in
Main menu\Configuration\Output Signals\. The trip signals from the
protection functions can be set to the correct trip group in
Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Trip 2…3 where the
checksum of the settings is displayed (255 by default).
Using the HMI:
protection function trip signal can be connected or disconnected.
To change the settings for PO2 and PO3 go to Output Signals\PO2…PO3 and
press the [E]-button. The different signals (Trip 2, Trip 3, CBFP, etc.) are displayed
one at a time. By pressing the [→] or [←] navigation push button, it is possible to
scroll between the different signals. By pressing the [↑] or [↓] navigation push
button, the specific signal can be selected. Select the Trip 2 for the PO2 and Trip 3
for the PO3.
To define settings for Trip 2 and Trip 3 the same principle as shown above for the
Trip1 can be used.
When the residual voltage stages Uo>>> and Uo>> are selected the checksum for
Trip 1 is 384.
When the underfrequency protection stage f< is selected for the load shedding group
1, the checksum for Trip 2 is 512.
When the residual voltage stages Uo>>> and Uo>>, two-stage overvoltage (U> and
U>>), two-stage undervoltage (U< and U<<) and underfrequency protection stage
f<< are selected the checksum for Trip 3 is 2492.

All the necessary settings for the alarm signals and indication signals of the
disconnector for the measurement cubicle can be set as described in the first
outgoing.
238
The settings are made by means of the Relay Setting Tool or the local HMI. The
settings can be found in:
H06 are presented.

Main menu\Measurement\DREC\. All of the measured voltage signals as well
as all of the start signals from the protection functions and the Trip 1, Trip 2 and
Trip 3 signals are connected to the DREC in the H06 standard configuration.
• Triggering on voltage measurement
# records.

The power quality function (PQ 3Unf) can be found in Main menu\Power
Quality\PQ 3Unf. The function is used for measuring the harmonics and
239
External triggering can be made by means of the reserved input signal

“PQ 3Unf trig” connected to digital input. The settings can be found in
The function can deliver the alarm signal “PQ 3Unf cum”, an output signal for
exceeding a setting limit for cumulative probability of a harmonic and the
“PQ 3Unf har”, an output signal for exceeding a setting limit for a harmonic. The
alarm signals can be routed to the output contacts via the switchgroups. The
connection settings can be made in Main menu\Configuration\Output
SWGRP\Alarm 1\ or \Alarm 2\. The “Alarm 1” or “Alarm 2” output signal
can be then connected to an output relay and the settings are done in
Main menu\Output Signals\.
240
12.7. Motor protection, High H07/H51
12.7.1. Features
This application example describes a single busbar motor feeder including:
• Negative phase sequence (NPS) protection
• Motor start-up supervision
• Thermal protection for motors
• Non-directional undercurrent protection (only in H07)
• Phase reversal protection
• Fuse fail protection
Three-phase current measurement is established with current transformers, and
residual voltage is measured with a set of voltage transformers in an open-delta
connection. Phase-to-phase voltage measurements are established with voltage
transformers.
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> 50N/51N TCS
CBCM 0 I
3U< 27
3I~harm R
Is2t,n< 48,14,66
3I 3U~harm
3I 46R
I2> 46 3I I0 P
3I< 37
3U U0 Q
F
60
3 49
f pf E
CBFP */62
REX 521 H07 Application example 14
M
A052067
Fig. 12.7.1.-1 H07 and H51 are used for protection, measuring, and supervision
of a single busbar motor feeder
241
L1
242
L2
L3
A
N
REX 521
0
0
CB
1
DC 1
ES
protection
Prior alarm
Speed Switch
RESTART enable

Definite trip alarm
P1 S1
Protection Relay
S2
P2
X4.2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 X3.1 1 2 X4.1 1 2 5 4 3 8 7 6 10 11 9 12 13 14 15 17 18 X4.2 3 4 1 2
Mains
S1 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9
IRF S01 S02 P01 P02 P03 HSPO1
S2 X1.1
ACFail
27 VT4 3I > 50/51 MCS 000

100V U31
TempAlarm
25
24 TCS
TCS1
100V
VT3 U23
I 0> 50N/51N
22
21 CBCM 0 I
100V
VT2 U12 3U< 27
Fig. 12.7.1.-2 Connection overview diagram of the single busbar motor feeder
19
3I~harm R
18 VT1 Is2t,n< 48,14,66
100V Uo
16
15 0.2A 3I 3U~harm
14 1A CT5 Iob 46R
13 3I
12 1A
11 5A CT4 P
Io I2> 46 3I I0
10
9 1A
8 5A CT3 IL3 3I< 37
7
6 1A 3U Q
U0
5 5A
CT2 IL2 F
60
4
M 3
2
1A
5A CT1 IL1 3 49
1 f pf E
REX 521 CBFP */62

1MRS751802-MUM
A052068
The following measurements are supported in this application example:
• Power factor PF including the harmonics
12.7.3. Protection
All the necessary settings for the protection functions can be set via Relay Setting
Tool or the local HMI. The settings can be found in Main menu\Protection\.
12.7.3.1. Thermal overload protection

Thermal Overload Protection (3Ithdev>) constitutes a full three-phase thermal
overload protection. When applied to motor protection, the thermal unit forms an
overload protection with two time-constants, separately for both the stator and the
rotor.
Two setting groups (basic settings and advanced settings) are available. Normally,
the user sets the motor data only to the basic settings, and the relay automatically
calculates the advanced settings.
• The type of the motor to be protected is selected by means of the Device type
setting.
• The Starting current setting is the ratio of the motor starting current to full load
current.
• The Starting time setting is the maximum permitted starting time for motor.
• No of starts setting specifies how many times the motor is allowed to be started
from cold condition state (assuming the motor has the ambient temperature).
• Cooling factor setting determines how slowly (compared to running condition)
the motor cools down in case the motor is stopped. It can be defined also as a
ratio of cooling constant (for a stopped motor) to heating constant.
(τ cooling / τ heating) A normal, totally enclosed motor cooled by a fan on the rotor
shaft generally has the setting of 4...6.
• By means of Ambient temp. setting, the thermal protection can be given a
standard temperature reference level (typically 40°C).
• For other basic setting parameters, the factory default values can be used as a
starting point. The Gen&Trafo τ setting applies only if the Device type setting is
set to be a generator or transformer.
243
12.7.3.2. Start-up supervision (stall protection)

The thermal stress during any single start-up condition is monitored by the start-up
supervision (Is2t n<), which monitors the thermal stress equivalent product I2xt.
The Start current setting is set directly to motor starting current value, whereas the
Start time setting is set about 10% above the normal start-up time in order to give a
safety margin for the operation.
For example, if the motor starting current is 6.2 x FLC and the starting time is 11
seconds, the Start current setting = 6.2 and Start time setting =11 s x 1.1 ≈ 12
seconds.
Check-up of the need of speed switch
In case the start-up time of the motor is smaller than the maximum stall time for cold
condition, no speed switch information is needed for protection.
In many applications, for example in ExE-type drives, the motor is not allowed to
be in a stalled condition as long as its own start-up time, that is, the maximum stall
time is shorter than the start-up time. To find out whether the motor is speeding up
or not, a speed switch on the motor shaft is used. Refer to Fig. 12.7.1.-2 for an
example of speed switch connection to the inputs of REX 521.
The speed switch information is used to control the stall protection (the operation
mode of Is2t n< is set to “I2t & stall”). In case the motor starts accelerating, the speed
switch will inhibit the stall protection trip and leave the protection to the thermal
unit. If the motor does not speed up, tripping will be carried out after the Stall time.
12.7.3.3. Cumulative start-up counter

A motor manufacturer may give a statement of how many times a motor may be
restarted within a certain time interval. The totalling check of start-up time acts as a
backup to the thermal protection by ensuring that restarts cannot be made too
frequently, in other words that the manufacturer recommendations are not exceeded.
The start-up time counting possibility is integrated in the function of Is2t n< so that
no extra timers are needed. To use the start-up time counter, you have to determine
two settings.
Firstly, you have to define the restart inhibit level (Time limit setting) in start
seconds. Secondly, the module has to be told how rapidly the accumulated amount
of start seconds should be counted down.
The equation for restart inhibit level is:

Time limit = ( n – 1 ) × t – margin
where
n = required number of starts
t = starting time of the motor (in seconds)
margin = safety margin, about 10...20%
244
The equation for Countdown rate setting is:

t
= -----------
t reset
where
t = starting time (in seconds)
treset = time (in hours) to reset one start-up stress
If it is assumed that the motor is recommended to be started at most three times

within eight hours, and that the start-up time is 20 seconds each, the situation
described in the diagram (see Fig. 12.7.3.3.-1) occurs if all the allowed three starts
in a row are made:.
8h
Dts
[s]
50
Start 3
40
Next start possible

30
Start 2
Restart inhibit activated above 41 s level
20
Start 1
10
t
A052069
Fig. 12.7.3.3.-1 Operation of start-up time counter

The three 20 second starts add up to a total of 60 seconds. Right after the third start
has been initiated, the inhibit should be activated, and the fourth start attempt is
therefore not allowed. This means that the setting of the Time limit in this case
is set to 41 seconds. Note that the start sequence still proceeds even though the
inhibit is activated. The inhibit is only interrupting the close path to the circuit-
breaker, and thereby preventing further start-ups.
Furthermore, the recommendation of at most three starts within eight hours means
that the count-down should reach the inhibit level after 8 hours in order for it to allow
a single new start. In this example it means that it should be counted down 20
seconds in 8 hours, that is, the Countdown rate setting is 20 s/8 h = 2.5 s/h.
For readability reasons the time scaling in the diagram is not the
same for start-up versus cooling-down sequences.
245
12.7.3.4. Short-circuit (high-set overcurrent) protection

The high-set overcurrent protection (3I>> or 3I>>>) constitutes an interwinding
short-circuit protection for the motor and a phase-to-phase short circuit protection
for the feeder cable.
It is recommended to use doubling function which automatically doubles the high-
set overcurrent setting during start-up. Thus, the current setting can be given a value
lower than the motor starting current. Normally, the setting can be chosen to
0.70...0.90 times the motor starting current. With a suitable operating time set, this
feature enables the high-set overcurrent unit to operate in case the motor is jammed
while the motor is running. Generally, a setting value as low as 75% gives good
results but if the inrush current causes trippings during start-up, choose a higher
setting.
The doubling is controlled by the Is2t n< function block. The checksum for the
switchgroup in Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\Double
should be 1 to double the 3I>> settings, and 2 to double the 3I>>> settings.
12.7.3.5. Unbalance protection

The negative phase sequence protection (I2> and I2>>) monitors the current
asymmetry of the network and protects the motor against heavy network unbalance
or single-phasing. Typically, the operating time of the protection follows an inverse
time characteristic.
Selecting Start value -setting
The Start value -setting is the negative phase sequence (NPS) current, which
the machine is able to continuously withstand without damage. The setting is
selected as instructed by the machine manufacturer.
In case the maximum permitted negative phase sequence voltage is known (instead
of NPS current), the NPS current is approximately equal to the product of the NPS
voltage and the ratio of starting current to full load current.
Example:
Motor start-up current is 6 x FLC, the highest permitted NPS voltage is 4% and
thereby the estimated NPS current is 6 x 4% = 24%.
Selecting K-setting
The machine constant K is equal to the I22 x t capability of the machine, as stated by
the machine manufacturer. It defines the rotor capability of accepting additional
heating caused by negative sequence current.
A conservative estimate is calculated as:
175
K 2 = --------------2-
( I LR )
where
ILR = locked-rotor current (times the Full Load Current of the motor
246
Example:
Motor start-up current is 5.2 x FLC and thereby the estimated K-setting is
175/(5.2)2 = 6.5%.
The most severe unbalance is caused by an broken phase. It should be checked that
in case of broken (open) phase the operation time of the unbalance protection is
shorter than the permissible locked-rotor jam time.
12.7.3.6. Phase reversal protection

The separate phase-reversal protection (3I()) checks for phase reversal conditions
based on the phase order of currents. The protection operates within a set definite
time after detecting wrong phase sequence.
Alternatively, the phase-sequence voltage protection (U1U2<>_1) can be used for
phase-reversal protection if it is set to trip at high negative phase sequence voltage.
Because the protection is based on voltage instead of current, this protection can be
used to inhibit the starting of the motor on wrong phase sequence.
The phase-reversal protections should be taken out of use for a motor which is used
also with a reversed direction of rotation.
12.7.3.7. Undercurrent protection

The undercurrent protection (3I<) operates upon a sudden loss of load. The
protection is used, for example, for submersible pumps where the cooling is based
on a constant flow of liquid. If this flow is interrupted, the cooling capacity of the
motor is reduced. This condition is detected by the undercurrent unit, which trips the
motor. This function block is only found in H07.
12.7.3.8. Fuse fail protection

If an undervoltage or phase sequence voltage protection is used, the fuse failure
supervision (FUSEF) should be used to block these protections. This will prevent
disruptive tripping (for example fuse blow) in case of failure in the voltage
measuring circuits.
12.7.4. Condition monitoring
12.7.4.1. Operation time counter

Operation time counting (in hours) is necessary for some motors. The TIME1
function block uses the motor runs-indication for counting the operate time. Refer
to Section 12.7.5.3. Indication of motor status on how to enable motor status
indication. The cumulative counting value is recorded.
The ALARM output of the TIME1 function block can be connected to Alarm 1 or
Alarm 2 output signal (Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\).
The operate time alarm can also be connected to the Alarm LED 8
(Main menu\Configuration\Alarm LEDs\).
247
12.7.5. Connections
All the necessary settings for the connections and signal routings can be set by using
Relay Setting Tool or a local HMI.

The settings for the protection signal routing can be implemented as described in
Section 10.2.3.3. Protection signal routing.

The connections for indication and control can be implemented as described in
Section 10.2.3.4. Indication and control connections with the exception of the
signals for the open and close buttons that are disconnected in this example. Local
control can be executed via HMI according to the instructions in REX 521
Operator's Manual (see Section 1.3. Related documents).
If the TOL3Dev or MotStart block are not in use, they should be disconnected from
the Restart Enable signal by the SWGRP (10V325).
12.7.5.3. Indication of motor status

The motor statuses “Stop” and “Runs” can be indicated both remotely and locally
by the function block I<->O IND3. Indication can be based on the measured current
level, and/or on the state of the speed switch binary input, or on the measured current
level and circuit breaker state. The open indication of I<->O IND3 function block
corresponds to “Stop” status and close indication corresponds to “Runs” status of the
motor.
The basis for the motor status indication can be selected in
Main menu\Configuration\Input SWGRP\Motor status. The
different options are the following:
Table 12.7.-1 Motor status indication options

Option Description Checksum
STOP:CB & I Motor stop indication by current limit (low 1
alarm) and circuit breaker open status input
STOP:I Motor stop indication by current limit (low 2
alarm)
STOP:I & Ind. Motor stop indication by current limit (low 4
alarm) and motor status input
STOP:Ind. Motor stop indication by speed switch input 8
RUNS:Ind. Motor runs indication by speed switch input 16
RUNS:I & Ind. Motor runs indication by current limit (high 32
alarm) and speed switch input
RUNS:I Motor runs indication by current limit Motor 64
runs indication by current limit (high alarm)
RUNS:CB & I Motor runs indication by current limit (high 128
alarm) and circuit breaker close status input
248
For logical operation of motor status indication, the “Stop” and

“Runs” indications must be selected in pairs and the corresponding
checksums must be added together, for example:
STOP:Ind. and RUNS:Ind. checksum = 24.
The high and low alarm signals of the function block AI1 are used when the
measured current level is selected for indicating motor statuses “Stop” and “Runs”.
The settings for the AI1 can be made in
Main menu\Measurements\AI1\Control setting\.
The function block is set in use by using the Limit Selection parameter.
249
12.8. Incoming feeder, High H08/H09
12.8.1. Features
This application example is an optional solution for the second application example
(Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01), if overvoltage and undervoltage
protection is required or wider range of measurements is needed.
power transformer. Phase-to-earth voltage measurements are established with
voltage transformers.
3I > 50/51 MCS 000
I 0> TCS
50N/51N
CBCM 0 I
3U> 59
3I~harm R
3U< 27
3U~harm
CBFP */62
3I I0 P
3U 3U_B Q
f pf E
REX 5 2 1 H 0 8 Applic atio n Example 15
A052070
Fig. 12.8.1.-1 H08/H09 is used for protection, measuring and supervision on an

incoming feeder in a single busbar system. The supplying network
is either solidly or resistance earthed
250
2
TCS1
H SPO1
3 4 1
X4.2
P03
Q
P
E
R
17 18
000
3U_B
P02
I0
0
pf
14 15
3U~harm
3I~harm
CBCM
MCS
TCS
P01
3U
3I
f
9 12 13
protection
S02
50N/51N
50/51
27
6 10 11
59
*/62
S01
CBFP
3U<
3U>
I 0>
3I >
3 8 7
IRF
5 4
TempAlarm
2
Mains ACFail
1 X4.1
OC blocking signal
2
DI9
1
to the 3I>>> stage

X3.1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI8
DI7
DI6
DI5
Iob
Uo
U2
U1
IL2
IL1
U3
IL3
Io
0
DI4
8 9 10
DI3
DI2
CT3
VT1
VT3
VT2
CT5
CT2
CT4
CT1
VT4
7
5 6
REX 521
DI1
X4.2
0.2A
100V
100V
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
100V
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
10
12
13
X1.1
14
15
16
11
18
19
21
22
25
24
27
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
L2
L3
L1
S2
S1
A
S1
S2
P1
P2
DC
CB
A052071
251
The following measurements are supported in this application example.
• True RMS measurement of phase-to-earth voltages
• True RMS measurement of calculated phase-to-phase voltages
12.8.3. Protection

application example (Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01)

The earth-fault protection can be implemented as described in the second application
example (Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01)

protection is used to prevent possible damages to devices connected to the network.
In this application the overvoltage and undervoltage protection is included in the
functionality of the protection relay of the incoming feeder. In the overvoltage or
undervoltage situation the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder will be opened.
high stage U>>. The low stage can be set to definite-time or inverse-time operation.
Definite-time operation is used with the high-set stage.
U< and a high stage U<<. The low stage can be set to definite-time or inverse-time
operation. Definite-time operation is used with the high set stage.
An operational characteristic example on overvoltage and undervoltage protection
is presented in the following picture (Fig. 12.5.3.-1).
252
85% 115%
t(s)
100 60 s
60 s
IDMT operation
10
3s
1
0.1 s
70 80 90 100 110 120 130
U/Un(%)
UNDERVOLTAGE
U< = 0.85 x Un, t> = 60 s, DT
U<< = 0.7 x Un, t> = 3 s, DT
OVERVOLTAGE
U> = 1.15 x Un, t> = 60 s, DT
or U> = 1.09 x Un, k = 0.2, p = 2, IDMT
U>> = 1.3 x Un, t> = 0.1 s, DT

A052064
Fig. 12.8.3.-1 Example on overvoltage and undervoltage protection
12.8.4. Connections

The trip signal (Trip 1) of the protection functions is routed to the high speed power
As the HSPO1 is always named as the “Trip 1" output signal, the settings are made
directly in Main menu\Configuration\Output SWGRP\Trip 1, where
Using the HMI:
stage overcurrent (3I> 3I>> and 3I>>>), two-stage earth fault (I0> and I0>>), two-
stage overvoltage (U> and U>>) and two-stage undervoltage (U< and U<<)
protection is selected the checksum for Trip 1 is 991. When the earth-fault protection
stage Io>>> is selected the checksum for Trip 2 is 32.
253

In the sections below a few implementation examples for the standard
configurations H08 and H09 are presented.

The blocking signal received from the outgoing feeder can be implemented as
described in the second application example (Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic
B01)

The outgoing blocking signal to the overcurrent relay on the HV side can be
implemented as described in the second application example (Section 10.2.
Incoming feeder, Basic B01)
12.8.5.3. Earth-fault stage Io>>> to trip the breaker on the HV side of the
transformer
The earth-fault stage Io>>> to trip the breaker on the HV side of the transformer can
be implemented as described in the second application example (Section 10.2.
Incoming feeder, Basic B01)

The circuit-breaker failure protection can be implemented as described in the second
application example (Section 10.2. Incoming feeder, Basic B01). CBFP function is
not available for the overvoltage and undervoltage protection.

Main menu\Measurement\DREC\. All of the measured current and voltage
signals as well as all of the start signals from the protection functions and the Trip 1
and Trip 2 signals are connected to the DREC in the H08 and H09 standard
configurations.
254

• Triggering on current or voltage measurement
# records.

The power quality functions (PQ 3Inf and PQ 3Unf) can be found in
Main menu\Power Quality\PQ 3Inf and Main menu\Power
Quality\PQ 3Unf. The functions are used for measuring the harmonics and
External triggering can be made by means of the reserved input signals “PQ 3Inf
trig” and “PQ 3Unf trig” connected to the digital inputs. The settings can be found
in Main menu\Configuration\Input Signals\PQ 3Inf trig and
The functions can deliver the alarm signals “PQ 3Inf cum” and “PQ 3Unf cum”, an
output signal for exceeding a setting limit for cumulative probability of a harmonic
and the “PQ 3Inf har” and “PQ 3Unf har”, an output signal for exceeding a setting
limit for a harmonic. The alarm signals can be routed to the output contacts via the
switchgroups. The connection settings can be made in Main menu\
Configuration\Output SWGRP\Alarm 1\ or \Alarm 2\. The
Alarm 1 or Alarm 2 output signal can be then connected to an output relay and the
settings are done in
255
256
13. Symbol notations
3I > 50/51 = multiple-stage three-phase overcurrent protection, low-set, high-set and instantaneous
stage available
3I> 67 = multiple-stage three-phase directional overcurrent protection, low-set, high-set and

instantaneous stage available
I0> 50N/51N = multiple-stage earth-fault protection, low-set, high-set and instantaneous stage
available
I0> 67N = multiple-stage directional earth-fault protection, low-set, high-set and instantaneous
stage available
3U > 59 = three-phase overvoltage protection, low-set and high-set stage available
3U < 27 = three-phase undervoltage protection, low-set and high-set stage available
U0> 59N = multiple-stage residual overvoltage protection, low-set, high-set and instantaneous
stage available
3I2f > 68 = inrush detection based on the 2nd harmonic content of phase currents, applied for
preventing possible unnecessary operation of overcurrent or earth-fault protection
during transformer switching-in or to start cold load pick-up logic
DI> 46 = phase discontinuity protection
3 49F = thermal overload protection for feeders
f </f> 81U/81O = under/overfrequency protection/load shedding scheme
0 I 79 = multiple-shot auto-recloser
SYNC 25 = circuit breaker synchro-check/direction of energizing check function
CBFP * /62 = circuit-breaker failure protection
LO 86 = lockout (Refer to chapter Lockout function in this manual)
Is2 t, n< 48,14,66 = start-up supervision for motors (MotStart)
3I = phase reversal protection (PREV3)

3I 46R
I2 > 46 = negative phase-sequence protection, low-set and high-set

stages available (NPS3_)
3I< 37 = three-phase non-directional undercurrent protection, stages 1 and 2

available (NUC3St2)
F 60 = fuse failure supervision (FuseFail)
3 49 = three-phase thermal overload protection for motors, generators

and transformers (TOL3Dev)
A052072
257
E = energy counter, forward or reverse active / reactive energy
MCS = measuring circuit supervision
TCS = trip circuit supervision
CBCM = circuit-breaker condition monitoring
3U~harm = voltage waveform distortion measurement
3I~harm = current waveform distortion measurement
R = annunciating, event generating and value recording functions
= disturbance recorder
000 = digital value indication
0 I = local and remote control interface
= annunciating, event generating and value recording functions
P = active power measurement, indication and supervision
Q = reactive power measurement, indication and supervision
3I = 3-phase current measurement, indication and supervision
3U = 3-phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage measurement, indication

and supervision
f = frequency measurement, indication and supervision
pf = power factor measurement, indication and supervision
I0 = residual current measurement, indication and supervision
U0 = residual voltage measurement, indication and supervision
A052073
258
14. Abbreviations
AR Auroreclose
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
CB Cicuit breaker
CBFP Circuit creaker failure protection function
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CT Current transformer
DC Disconnector
DI Digital input
ES Earth switch
HMI Human-machine interface
HSPO High-speed power output
IDMT Inverse definite minimum time
IRF Internal relay fault
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light-emitting diode
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MMI Man-machine interface
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
NPS Negative phase sequence
PO Power output
RS Rogowski sensor
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation automation
SO Signalling output
TCS Trip-circuit supervision
VD Voltage divider
VT Voltage transformer
259
1MRS751802-MUM EN 09.2006
ABB Oy
Distribution Automation
P.O. Box 699
FI-65101 Vaasa
FINLAND
Tel. +358 10 22 11
Fax. +358 10 224 1094
www.abb.com/substationautomation

REX521 Conf 751802 ENk PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

REX521 Conf 751802 ENk PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Protection Relay

Technical Reference Manual, Standard Configurations

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

4.3.6. Standard configuration H06 ............................... 52

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

6.1.5. Power quality trigger ..........................................86

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

8.2.4. I<->O POS ....................................................... 124

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

10.1.5.3.Circuit-breaker failure protection ......................153

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

10.4.6. Implementations .............................................. 180

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

11.3.Outgoing feeder, Medium M02 .................................................199

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

12.3.2. Measurements ................................................. 221

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

12.6.3.2.Overvoltage and undervoltage protection ........236

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

12.8.5.3.Earth-fault stage Io>>> to trip the breaker

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

1. About this manual

1.2. Use of symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

The information icon alerts the reader to relevant facts and

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

1.3. Related documents

• Technical Reference Manual, General 1MRS751108-MUM

• Parameter List for REX 521 1MRS751999-RTI

• CAP505 Installation and Commissioning Manual 1MRS751901-MEN

1.4. Document revisions

Version Date History

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

The device contains components which are sensitive to

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

Differences between REX 521 and RED 500 platform in the

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

Table 3.-1 Standard configurations for REX 521

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

Table 3.-1 Standard configurations for REX 521 (Continued)

Calculated Uo (Uos) is used in the Sensor versions of H01 and H03

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

Table 3.-2 Protection functions available in the different standard

Table 3.-3 Control functions available in the different standard

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

Table 3.-4 Measurement functions available in the different standard

Table 3.-5 Condition monitoring functions available in the different

Table 3.-6 Power quality monitoring function available in the different

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

4.1. HW version: Basic

4.1.1. Standard configuration B01

Technical Reference Manual, Standard

3I > 50/51 MCS 000

I 0> 50N/51N TCS

REX 521 B01

Fig. 4.1.1.1.-1 Block diagram of B01

DI1 BINCLOSE 3I>

I<->O CB1 GROUP TRIP Alarm LED3

I<->O IND2 CB wear 1 DI8

Technical Reference Manual, Standard